Canon PIXMA MP250

Add to my manuals
684 Pages

advertisement

Canon PIXMA MP250 | Manualzz
Canon MP270 series / MP250 series On-screen Manual
Strana 1 z celkového počtu 684
Ako používať túto príručku
Tlač tejto príručky
MC-3770-V1.00
Základná príručka
Rozšírená príručka
Obsahuje súhrnné
informácie o tomto výrobku.
Podrobne opisuje funkciu
tohto výrobku.
Riešenie problémov
MP270/MP250 series Základná príručka
Strana 2 z celkového počtu 684
Ako používať túto príručku
Tlač tejto príručky
MP-3291-V1.00
Rozšírená príručka
Obsah
Prehľad zariadenia
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Hlavné súčasti
Vkladanie papiera
Displej LED a základné úkony
Umiestnenie originálov
Kopírovanie
Bežná údržba
Kopírovanie dokumentov
Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne
farby
Kopírovanie fotografií
Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane
Výmena kazety FINE
Čistenie zariadenia
Skenovanie
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
Príloha
Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania
výrobku a obrázkov
Tlač z počítača
Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Tlač dokumentov (Windows)
Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
Ďalšie použitie
Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so
štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie
MP270 series)
Užitočné softvérové aplikácie
Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Prehľad zariadenia
Strana 3 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Prehľad zariadenia
Prehľad zariadenia
Táto časť obsahuje názvy súčastí zariadenia a opisuje základné úkony, s ktorými sa musíte oboznámiť
pred jeho používaním.
Hlavné súčasti
Pohľad spredu
Pohľad zozadu
Vnútorné súčasti
Ovládací panel
Displej LED a základné úkony
Na začiatok strany
Hlavné súčasti
Strana 4 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Prehľad zariadenia > Hlavné súčasti
Hlavné súčasti
Pohľad spredu
Pohľad zozadu
Vnútorné súčasti
Ovládací panel
Pohľad spredu
(1) Kryt dokumentov
Otvorte ho pri umiestňovaní originálov na ploché predlohové sklo.
(2) Podpera papiera
Zdvihnite ju a sklopte dozadu, aby ste mohli papier vložiť do zadného zásobníka.
(3) Zadný zásobník
Vložte doň rôzne veľkosti a typy papiera, ktoré možno použiť v zariadení. Naraz možno vložiť jeden alebo
viacero hárkov rovnakej veľkosti a typu papiera, ktoré sa však automaticky budú podávať po jednom.
Pozrite si časť Vkladanie papiera .
(4) Vodiace lišty papiera
Posunutím ich zarovnajte s bočnými hranami balíka papiera.
(5) Ovládací panel
Používajte ho na zmenu nastavení alebo ovládanie zariadenia.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
Poznámka
Ak sa približne päť minút nepoužívajú ovládacie prvky zariadenia, vypnú sa displej LED a
indikátory na ovládacom paneli (okrem indikátora Napájanie (Power) ). Ak ich chcete
obnoviť, stlačte ľubovoľné tlačidlo okrem tlačidla ZAP. (ON) alebo vykonajte tlač.
(6) Výstupný zásobník papiera
Automaticky sa otvorí pri spustení tlače alebo kopírovania a vysunutí vytlačeného papiera.
(7) Vysúvacia časť výstupného zásobníka
Hlavné súčasti
Strana 5 z celkového počtu 684
Po otvorení podopiera výtlačky. Otvorte ju pri tlači alebo kopírovaní.
(8) Ploché predlohové sklo
Položte sem originál, ktorý chcete kopírovať alebo skenovať.
(9) Port priamej tlače (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Umožňuje priamu tlač zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge, napríklad digitálneho
fotoaparátu.
Pozrite si časť Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie
MP270 series).
Varovanie
K portu priamej tlače na zariadení nepripájajte iné zariadenia než zariadenia kompatibilné
so štandardom PictBridge. Mohli by ste spôsobiť požiar, úraz elektrickým prúdom alebo
poškodenie zariadenia.
Dôležité
Nedotýkajte sa kovového krytu.
Pohľad zozadu
(10) Port USB
Zasuňte sem kábel USB, ktorým sa zariadenie pripája k počítaču.
Dôležité
Nedotýkajte sa kovového krytu.
Kým zariadenie tlačí alebo skenuje originály pomocou počítača, neodpájajte ani znova
nepripájajte kábel USB.
(11) Konektor napájacieho kábla
Zasuňte sem dodaný napájací kábel.
Hlavné súčasti
Strana 6 z celkového počtu 684
Vnútorné súčasti
(12) Zaisťovacie kryty kazety s atramentom
Zaisťujú kazety FINE na svojom mieste.
(13) Skenovacia jednotka (kryt)
Slúži na skenovanie originálov. Otvorte ju pri výmene kaziet FINE alebo odstraňovaní zaseknutého papiera
vnútri zariadenia. Pri otváraní skenovacej jednotky (krytu) nechajte kryt dokumentov zatvorený.
(14) Podpera skenovacej jednotky
Pridržiava skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), kým je otvorená.
(15) Držiak kazety FINE
Slúži na vloženie kaziet FINE.
Farebná kazeta FINE sa vkladá do ľavej zásuvky (
) a čierna kazeta FINE do pravej zásuvky (
(16) Kazety FINE (kazety s atramentom)
Vymeniteľné kazety s integrovanou tlačovou hlavou a kazetou s atramentom.
Poznámka
Podrobné informácie o vkladaní kaziet FINE nájdete v tlačenej príručke Prvé spustenie .
Dôležité
Oblasť (A) znázornenú na nasledujúcom obrázku môže pokrývať rozliaty atrament. Nemá to
vplyv na výkon zariadenia.
Nedotýkajte sa oblasti (A). Ak sa jej dotknete, zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť.
Ovládací panel
MP270 series
MP250 series
).
Hlavné súčasti
Strana 7 z celkového počtu 684
(1) Tlačidlo ZAP. (ON)/indikátor Napájanie (Power)
Zapína a vypína zariadenie. Pred zapnutím skontrolujte, či je zatvorený kryt dokumentov.
Dôležité
Odpojenie zástrčky napájacieho kábla
Keď sa po vypnutí zariadenia chystáte odpojiť zástrčku napájacieho kábla, vždy
skontrolujte, či nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) . Ak vytiahnete zástrčku napájacieho
kábla z nástennej elektrickej zásuvky, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti alebo bliká,
môžete tým znemožniť správnu tlač zo zariadenia, pretože tlačová hlava nie je chránená.
Poznámka
Indikátory Napájanie (Power) a Alarm
Pomocou indikátorov Napájanie (Power) a Alarm môžete skontrolovať stav zariadenia.
- Indikátor Napájanie (Power) nesvieti: zariadenie je vypnuté.
- Indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti na zeleno: zariadenie je pripravené na tlač.
- Indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno: zariadenie sa práve spúšťa alebo vypína.
- Indikátor Alarm svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo: vyskytla sa chyba a zariadenie nie je
pripravené na tlač. Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka .
- Indikátory striedavo blikajú – indikátor Napájanie (Power) na zeleno a indikátor Alarm
na oranžovo: pravdepodobne sa vyskytla chyba, ktorá vyžaduje kontaktovanie
servisného strediska. Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke
on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
(2) Displej LED (Dióda emitujúca svetlo (Light Emitting Diode))
Zobrazuje počet kópií, kód údržby alebo prevádzkový stav, napríklad kód chyby.
(3) Tlačidlo [+]
Slúži na zadanie počtu kópií.
(4) Indikátory Atrament (Ink)
Svietia alebo blikajú na oranžovo, napríklad keď sa minie atrament. Indikátor naľavo signalizuje stav farebnej
kazety FINE a indikátor napravo stav čiernej kazety FINE.
(5) Tlačidlo Papier (Paper)
Slúži na výber veľkosti strany a typu média.
(6) Tlačidlo SKENOVAŤ (SCAN)
Spúšťa skenovanie originálu, ktorý chcete uložiť v počítači.
(7) Tlačidlo Stop/Reset
Ruší úkony. Stlačením tohto tlačidla môžete tiež zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, úlohu kopírovania alebo
skenovania.
(8) Tlačidlo Farebne (Color) *
Hlavné súčasti
Strana 8 z celkového počtu 684
Spúšťa farebné kopírovanie. Stlačením tohto tlačidla môžete tiež dokončiť výber položky nastavenia.
(9) Tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) *
Spúšťa čiernobiele kopírovanie. Stlačením tohto tlačidla môžete tiež dokončiť výber položky nastavenia.
(10) Tlačidlo a indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page)
Povoľuje funkciu kopírovania s prispôsobením strane. Veľkosť kopírovaných originálov môžete automaticky
zväčšovať alebo zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobili vybratej veľkosti strany. Pokiaľ je funkcia kopírovania s
prispôsobením strane vypnutá, môžete vytvárať kópie rovnakej veľkosti ako originál.
(11) Tlačidlo
(Údržba)
Slúži na zadanie kódu údržby.
(12) Indikátor Papier (Paper)
Rozsvietením signalizuje veľkosť strany a typ média vybraté pomocou tlačidla
Papier (Paper) .
(13) Indikátor Alarm
Svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo, keď sa vyskytne chyba. Napríklad keď sa minie papier alebo atrament.
* V softvérových aplikáciách alebo príručkách sa tlačidlá Čiernobielo (Black) a Farebne (Color) spoločne
nazývajú Spustiť (Start) alebo OK.
Na začiatok strany
Displej LED a základné úkony
Strana 9 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Prehľad zariadenia > Displej LED a základné úkony
Displej LED a základné úkony
Zariadenie môžete používať na vytváranie kópií alebo vykonávanie operácií údržby bez použitia počítača.
Táto časť opisuje displej LED a základné úkony vykonávané pomocou ovládacieho panela.
Po zapnutí zariadenia sa na displeji LED spravidla zobrazí číslo 1.
Displej LED signalizuje stav zariadenia nasledujúcim spôsobom.
Stav zariadenia
Pri kopírovaní
Displej LED
Počet kópií (bliká)
Pri tlači, skenovaní alebo
vykonávaní údržby
(bliká v tomto poradí)
Pokiaľ sa objaví chyba
Striedavo sa zobrazujú písmeno E a príslušné číslo.
Podrobné informácie o kódoch chýb nájdete v časti Riešenie
problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Striedavo sa zobrazujú písmeno P a príslušné číslo.
Zrejme sa vyskytla chyba, ktorá vyžaduje kontaktovanie servisného
strediska.
Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Pokiaľ je otvorená
skenovacia jednotka (kryt)
(bliká)
Poznámka
Ak je k zariadeniu pripojené zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge, napríklad digitálny
fotoaparát, na displeji LED sa bude zobrazovať písmeno C (len na zariadení MP270 series).
Počet kópií
Po spustení kopírovania sa na displeji LED zobrazí zadaný počet kópií. Počas kopírovania bliká na
displeji LED číslo, ktoré sa postupne o jedno znižuje, čím signalizuje počet zostávajúcich kópií.
Každým stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa číslo na displeji LED zvýši o jedno. Keď sa zobrazí písmeno F, znamená
to, že počet kópií je nastavený na hodnotu 20. Opätovným stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa vrátite späť na
Displej LED a základné úkony
Strana 10 z celkového počtu 684
hodnotu 1.
Kódy údržby
(Údržba). Po zobrazení
Ak chcete vykonať údržbu zariadenia, opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
požadovaného kódu na displeji LED stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Kód
Úkon
údržby
Pozrite si časť
Vytlačí sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz.
Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Vyčistí sa tlačová hlava.
Čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Hĺbkovo sa vyčistí tlačová hlava.
Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Vytlačí sa hárok na zarovnanie
tlačovej hlavy.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Naskenovaním hárka na zarovnanie
tlačovej hlavy sa automaticky
zarovná tlačová hlava.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Vytlačia sa aktuálne hodnoty
upravujúce polohu tlačovej hlavy.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Vyčistí sa valček podávača papiera.
Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera
Vyčistí sa vnútro zariadenia.
Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne)
Slúži na prepínanie medzi veľkosťami Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11"
A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera
(Letter)
vloženého v zadnom zásobníku.
(Toto nastavenie sa používa pri
vytváraní kópií.)
Zariadenie sa nastaví tak, aby
bránilo odretiu papiera.
Informácie nájdete v odseku Na papieri sú šmuhy/
Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný v časti
Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual
Rozšírená príručka .
Kódy chýb
Pokiaľ nastane chyba, na displeji LED sa začnú striedavo zobrazovať písmeno E a príslušné číslo, ktoré
označuje kód chyby.
Napríklad E, 1, 6.
(bliká v tomto poradí)
Poznámka
Podrobné informácie o kódoch chýb nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen
manual Rozšírená príručka .
Ak sa zobrazí kód chyby s písmenom P, zrejme sa vyskytla chyba, ktorá vyžaduje kontaktovanie
servisného strediska.
Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená
Displej LED a základné úkony
Strana 11 z celkového počtu 684
príručka .
Na začiatok strany
Kopírovanie
Strana 12 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Kopírovanie
Kopírovanie
Okrem bežných kópií môžete z originálu vytvárať zväčšené alebo zmenšené kópie prispôsobené strane a
kópie vytlačenej fotografie bez okrajov.
Kopírovanie dokumentov
Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter)
Kopírovanie fotografií
Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane
Na začiatok strany
Kopírovanie dokumentov
Strana 13 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Kopírovanie > Kopírovanie dokumentov
Kopírovanie dokumentov
Táto časť opisuje postup pri kopírovaní dokumentov veľkosti A4 alebo Letter na obyčajný papier.
Konkrétne úkony sú opísané v poznámkach a operačných postupoch na príslušnej referenčnej strane.
Musíte si pripraviť:
Originály, ktoré chcete kopírovať. Pozrite si časť Originály, ktoré možno použiť .
Papier na tlač. Pozrite si časť Použiteľné typy médií .
1.
Pripravte sa na kopírovanie.
(1) Zapnite zariadenie.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
(2) Vložte papier.
Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera .
V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter.
(3) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
Kopírovanie dokumentov
Strana 14 z celkového počtu 684
(4) Položte originál na ploché predlohové sklo.
Pozrite si časť Umiestnenie originálov .
Originál umiestnite tak, aby STRANA URČENÁ NA KOPÍROVANIE SMEROVALA NADOL a bola zarovnaná so
značkou zarovnania
, ako je to znázornené nižšie.
Potom opatrne zatvorte kryt dokumentov.
Poznámka
Podrobnosti o typoch a podmienkach pre originály, ktoré možno kopírovať, nájdete v časti
Originály, ktoré možno použiť .
2.
Spustite kopírovanie.
(1) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla [ +] zadajte počet kópií (max. 20 kópií).
Ak chcete vytvoriť 1 až 9 kópií alebo 20 kópií
Na displeji LED zobrazte požadovaný počet kópií.
Kopírovanie dokumentov
Strana 15 z celkového počtu 684
Každým stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa číslo na displeji LED zvýši o jedno. Keď sa zobrazí písmeno F, znamená to,
že počet kópií je nastavený na hodnotu 20. Opätovným stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa vrátite späť na hodnotu 1.
Ak chcete vytvoriť 10 až 19 kópií
(1) Na displeji LED zobrazte písmeno
F.
(2) Vložte len požadovaný počet hárkov na kopírovanie.
(2) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany a typ
média.
Indikátor Papier (Paper) signalizuje vybratú veľkosť strany a typ média.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali typ Plain Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11".
Poznámka
Môžete vybrať nasledujúce veľkosti strán a typy médií.
- Typ Plain Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11"
- Typ Photo Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11"
- Typ Photo Paper veľkosti 10 x 15 cm alebo 4" x 6"
Bez ohľadu na veľkosť signalizovanú na ovládacom paneli môžete prepínať medzi
veľkosťami A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku.
Pozrite si časť Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) .
Ak je zapnutá funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane, môžete veľkosť kopírovaných
originálov automaticky zväčšovať alebo zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobili vybratej
veľkosti strany. V takom prípade sa originál skopíruje na obyčajný papier s okrajmi a na
fotografický papier bez okrajov.
Ak chcete vytvoriť kópiu rovnakej veľkosti ako originál, zrušte funkciu kopírovania s
prispôsobením strane.
Pozrite si časť Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane .
(3) Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením
tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie.
Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie.
Počas kopírovania bliká na displeji LED číslo, ktoré sa postupne o jedno znižuje, čím signalizuje počet
zostávajúcich kópií.
Po dokončení kopírovania zoberte originál z plochého predlohového skla.
Ak chcete vytvoriť 10 až 19 kópií
Pokiaľ sa minú všetky vložené papiere, nastane chyba minutia papiera (na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód E, 0,
2). Chybu zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset .
Poznámka
Kvalitu tlače môžete nastaviť na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti) len v prípade,
ak je ako veľkosť strany a typ média vybratý obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter.
Nastavenie kvality tlače na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti)
1. V bode (3) kroku č. 2 stlačte a minimálne dve sekundy podržte tlačidlo Farebne (Color)
alebo Čiernobielo (Black) .
Displej LED raz zabliká.
* Ak tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black) podržíte kratšie ako dve
sekundy, zariadenie spustí kopírovanie s kvalitou tlače „Standard“.
2. Uvoľnite tlačidlo.
Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie.
Ak kvalitu tlače nastavíte na hodnotu „Fast“, rýchlosť tlače sa uprednostní pred kvalitou.
Ak chcete uprednostniť kvalitu, tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black)
podržte stlačené kratšie ako dve sekundy, čím sa spustí kopírovanie s kvalitou tlače „
Standard“.
Dôležité
Kým sa kopírovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položený
originál.
Poznámka
Kopírovanie dokumentov
Strana 16 z celkového počtu 684
Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset .
Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter)
Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku.
Toto nastavenie je užitočné, ak zvyčajne vkladáte papier veľkosti Letter do zadného zásobníka, pričom
ovládací panel signalizuje veľkosť strany A4, alebo naopak.
1.
Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
2.
Stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) vyberte veľkosť A4, stlačením tlačidla
Farebne (Color) veľkosť 8,5" x 11" (Letter).
(Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno d.
Poznámka
Po prepnutí na veľkosť A4 alebo 8,5" x 11" (Letter) vložte papier vybratej veľkosti bez ohľadu
na veľkosť signalizovanú na ovládacom paneli.
- Ak je nastavená veľkosť strany A4, vložte obyčajný alebo fotografický papier veľkosti A4.
- Ak je nastavená veľkosť strany 8,5" x 11" (Letter), vložte obyčajný alebo fotografický papier
veľkosti Letter.
Na začiatok strany
Kopírovanie fotografií
Strana 17 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Kopírovanie > Kopírovanie fotografií
Kopírovanie fotografií
Táto časť opisuje postup pri kopírovaní vytlačenej fotografie na fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15
cm.
Musíte si pripraviť:
Vytlačené fotografie.
Papier na tlač fotografií. Pozrite si časť Použiteľné typy médií .
1.
Pripravte sa na kopírovanie fotografií.
(1) Zapnite zariadenie.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
(2) Vložte papier.
Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera .
V tomto príklade sme vložili fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm.
(3) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
(4) Umiestnite fotografiu na ploché predlohové sklo.
Pozrite si časť Umiestnenie originálov .
2.
Spustite kopírovanie.
(1) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla [ +] zadajte počet kópií.
Pozrite si krok č. 2 v časti Kopírovanie dokumentov .
(2) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany a typ
média.
Indikátor Papier (Paper) signalizuje vybratú veľkosť strany a typ média.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali typ Photo Paper veľkosti 10 x 15 cm alebo 4" x 6".
Poznámka
Môžete vybrať nasledujúce veľkosti strán a typy médií.
- Typ Plain Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11"
Kopírovanie fotografií
Strana 18 z celkového počtu 684
- Typ Photo Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11"
- Typ Photo Paper veľkosti 10 x 15 cm alebo 4" x 6"
Bez ohľadu na veľkosť signalizovanú na ovládacom paneli môžete prepínať medzi
veľkosťami A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku.
Pozrite si časť Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) .
Ak je zapnutá funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane, môžete veľkosť kopírovaných
originálov automaticky zväčšovať alebo zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobili vybratej
veľkosti strany. V takom prípade sa originál skopíruje na obyčajný papier s okrajmi a na
fotografický papier bez okrajov.
Ak chcete vytvoriť kópiu rovnakej veľkosti ako originál, zrušte funkciu kopírovania s
prispôsobením strane.
Pozrite si časť Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane .
(3) Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením
tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie.
Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie.
Po dokončení kopírovania zoberte fotografiu z plochého predlohového skla.
Dôležité
Kým sa kopírovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položenú
fotografiu.
Poznámka
Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset .
Na začiatok strany
Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane
Strana 19 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Kopírovanie > Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane
Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane
Funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane umožňuje kopírovaný originál automaticky zväčšovať alebo
zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobil vybratej veľkosti strany.
1.
Pripravte sa na kopírovanie.
Pozrite si krok č. 1 v časti Kopírovanie dokumentov .
2.
Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla [ +] zadajte počet kópií.
3.
Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany a typ média.
Poznámka
Pokiaľ ako typ média vyberiete obyčajný papier, originál sa skopíruje s okrajmi.
Pokiaľ ako typ média vyberiete fotografický papier, originál sa skopíruje bez okrajov a vyplní
celú stranu.
Pri tlači bez okrajov môže dôjsť na okrajoch k jemnému orezaniu, pretože kopírovaný obrázok
sa zväčší, aby vyplnil celú stranu.
4.
Stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) .
Rozsvieti sa indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) a zapne sa funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením
strane. Kopírovaný originál sa automaticky zväčší alebo zmenší, aby sa prispôsobil vybratej veľkosti strany.
Poznámka
Ak chcete zrušiť funkciu kopírovania s prispôsobením strane a vytvárať kópie rovnakej
veľkosti ako originál, opätovne stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) .
5.
Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla
Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie.
Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane.
Po dokončení kopírovania zoberte originál z plochého predlohového skla.
Dôležité
Kým sa kopírovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položený
originál.
Poznámka
Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane
Strana 20 z celkového počtu 684
Kvalitu tlače môžete nastaviť na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti) len v prípade, ak je
ako veľkosť strany a typ média vybratý obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. Ak chcete
nastaviť kvalitu tlače na hodnotu „Fast“, v kroku č. 5 stlačte a minimálne dve sekundy podržte
tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black) .
Pozrite si časť Nastavenie kvality tlače na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti) .
Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset .
Na začiatok strany
Skenovanie
Strana 21 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Skenovanie
Skenovanie
Naskenované údaje môžete uložiť v počítači a upraviť alebo spracovať pomocou dodanej softvérovej
aplikácie.
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
Prípravy na skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
Na začiatok strany
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
Strana 22 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Skenovanie > Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
Táto časť opisuje postup týkajúci sa skenovania originálov pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia a
ich ukladania v počítači podľa nastavení zadaných programom MP Navigator EX.
Informácie o skenovaní z počítača nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Dôležité
Spoločnosť Canon nenesie zodpovednosť za poškodenie ani stratu údajov z akéhokoľvek dôvodu,
a to ani počas záručnej doby zariadenia.
Prípravy na skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela
Pred skenovaním originálov skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti.
Sú nainštalované potrebné softvérové aplikácie (ovládače MP Drivers a program MP Navigator EX)?
Ak softvérové aplikácie nie sú nainštalovane, pozrite si tlačenú príručku Prvé spustenie .
Sú požadované nastavenia zadané programom MP Navigator EX?
Ak pomocou ovládacieho panela skenujete tak, aby sa originály ukladali v počítači, môžete v položke
Preferences programu MP Navigator EX zadať nastavenia na ukladanie naskenovaných údajov.
Podrobné informácie o týchto nastaveniach nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená
príručka .
Vyhovuje originál určený na skenovanie požiadavkám na originály ukladané na ploché predlohové
sklo?
Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Originály, ktoré možno použiť .
Je zariadenie správne pripojené k počítaču?
Zistite, či je pripojenie zariadenia k počítaču fyzicky bezpečné.
Dôležité
Počas skenovania originálov neodpájajte ani znova nepripájajte kábel USB.
Ak používate systém Mac OS X v.10.3.9
Program MP Navigator EX musíte nastaviť ako úvodnú softvérovú aplikáciu aplikácie Image Capture
v ponuke Aplikácie (Applications) systému Mac OS X.
(1) V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications) a potom dvakrát
kliknite na ikonu Image Capture.
(2) V ľavom dolnom rohu okna skenera kliknite na tlačidlo Možnosti (Options), v
zozname Aplikácia, ktorá sa spustí pri stlačení tlačidla skenera (Application to
launch when scanner button is pressed) vyberte možnosť MP Navigator EX 3 a
potom kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
Ak chcete ukončiť aplikáciu Image Capture, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte možnosť Ukončiť aplikáciu
Image Capture (Quit Image Capture).
Poznámka
Ak sa tlačidlo Možnosti (Options) nezobrazí, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte položku
Predvoľby (Preferences), kliknite na položku Skener (Scanner) a potom kliknutím na možnosť
Vždy, keď je to možné, použiť softvér TWAIN (Use TWAIN software whenever possible)
zrušte túto možnosť. Potom ukončite a reštartujte aplikáciu Image Capture.
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
1.
Pripravte skenovanie.
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači
Strana 23 z celkového počtu 684
(1) Zapnite zariadenie.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
(2) Položte originál na ploché predlohové sklo.
Pozrite si časť Umiestnenie originálov .
2.
Stlačením tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) spustite skenovanie.
Originál sa naskenuje a uloží v počítači podľa nastavení zadaných programom MP Navigator EX.
Po dokončení skenovania zoberte originál z plochého predlohového skla.
Dôležité
Kým je zariadenie v prevádzke, nevypínajte ho.
Kým sa skenovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položený
originál.
Poznámka
V závislosti od typu originálu sa nemusí správne naskenovať poloha a veľkosť originálu.
V takom prípade si pozrite príručku on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka a zmeňte
nastavenia Document Type a Document Size v programe MP Navigator EX, aby sa zhodovali
so skenovaným originálom, a naskenujte ho.
Ak používate systém Windows Vista
Po vykonaní kroku č. 2 sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V takom prípade
vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 a kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
Ak používate systém Windows XP
Po prvom vykonaní kroku č. 2 sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V takom prípade
vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 ako aplikačný softvér, ktorý chcete použiť. Potom
vyberte príkaz Pre túto akciu vždy použiť tento program (Always use this program for this
action) a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Odteraz sa bude program MP Navigator EX spúšťať
automaticky.
Na začiatok strany
Tlač z počítača
Strana 24 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Tlač z počítača
Tlač z počítača
Táto časť opisuje spôsob tlače fotografií alebo dokumentov pomocou počítača.
Pomocou programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX dodaného so zariadením môžete poľahky tlačiť fotografie
zhotovené pomocou digitálneho fotoaparátu.
Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Tlač dokumentov (Windows)
Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9
Na začiatok strany
Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Strana 25 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Pomocou programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX dodaného so zariadením môžete tlačiť obrazové údaje uložené
v počítači.
Táto časť opisuje postup pri tlači fotografií bez okrajov na fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm.
Podrobné informácie o programe Easy-PhotoPrint EX nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená
príručka .
Poznámka
Obrazovky použité v tejto časti opisujú tlač v systéme Windows. Úkony sú rovnaké ako pri tlači z
počítačov Macintosh.
Ak ste program Easy-PhotoPrint EX nenainštalovali alebo odinštalovali, nainštalujte ho z disku
Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM). Program Easy-PhotoPrint EX nainštalujete výberom
položky Easy-PhotoPrint EX počas inštalácie Custom Install.
1.
Pripravte tlač.
(1) Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
(2) Vložte papier.
Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera .
V tomto príklade sme vložili fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm.
(3) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
2.
Spustite program Easy-PhotoPrint EX a vyberte položku Photo Print.
(1) Spustite program Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu
(Easy-PhotoPrint EX) na pracovnej ploche.
Kliknite sem: Easy-PhotoPrint EX
V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položky Aplikácie (Applications), Canon Utilities, Easy-PhotoPrint
EX a dvakrát kliknite na položku Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Strana 26 z celkového počtu 684
Poznámka
Ak chcete program Easy-PhotoPrint EX spustiť z ponuky Solution Menu, na pracovnej
ploche dvakrát kliknite na ikonu
(Solution Menu) a potom na ikonu
(Print photos or
albums, etc.).
Pozrite si časť Solution Menu .
Ak chcete program Easy-PhotoPrint EX spustiť z ponuky Štart (Start), postupne vyberte
položky Všetky programy (All Programs) (alebo Programy (Programs)), Canon Utilities,
Easy-PhotoPrint EX a Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Ak chcete program Easy-PhotoPrint EX spustiť z ponuky Solution Menu, v Doku (Dock)
kliknite na ikonu
(Solution Menu) a potom na ikonu
Pozrite si časť Solution Menu .
(Print photos or albums, etc.).
(2) Kliknite na položku Photo Print.
Poznámka
Okrem položky Photo Print môžete vybrať aj položky Album, Calendar, Stickers atď.
Pozrite si časť Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX .
3.
Vyberte fotografiu, ktorú chcete vytlačiť.
(1) Vyberte priečinok, v ktorom sú fotografie uložené.
(2) Kliknite na fotografiu, ktorú chcete vytlačiť.
Ako počet kópií sa zobrazí číslo 1 a vybratá fotografia sa zobrazí v oblasti vybratých obrázkov (A). Naraz
môžete vybrať aj dve alebo viac fotografií.
Poznámka
Ak chcete vytlačiť dve alebo viac kópií, klikaním na tlačidlo
(šípka nahor) zmeňte počet
kópií.
Ak chcete svoj výber zrušiť, kliknutím na fotografiu zrušte jej výber v oblasti vybratých
(Delete Imported Image). Prípadne pomocou tlačidla
fotografií a potom kliknite na tlačidlo
(šípka nadol) môžete zmeniť počet kópií na nulu.
Vybratú fotografiu môžete tiež opraviť alebo vylepšiť.
Pozrite si časť Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX .
(3) Kliknite na tlačidlo Select Paper.
Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
4.
Strana 27 z celkového počtu 684
Vyberte typ vloženého papiera.
(1) Skontrolujte, či je v poli Printer vybratý názov vášho zariadenia.
(2) V ponukách Paper Size a Media Type vyberte veľkosť a typ vloženého papiera.
V tomto príklade sme v ponuke Paper Size vybrali veľkosť 4"x6" 10x15cm a v ponuke Media Type typ
vloženého fotografického papiera.
Poznámka
Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite.
(3) Kliknite na položku Layout/Print.
5.
Vyberte rozloženie a spustite tlač.
(1) Vyberte rozloženie fotografie.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Borderless (full).
Zobrazí sa ukážka s vybratým rozložením, na ktorej môžete skontrolovať požadovaný výsledok tlače.
Poznámka
Môžete zmeniť orientáciu fotografie alebo orezať fotografie, ktoré chcete vytlačiť.
Podrobné informácie o týchto úkonoch nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená
príručka .
(2) Kliknite na tlačidlo Print.
Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Strana 28 z celkového počtu 684
Poznámka
Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset na zariadení alebo
kliknite na možnosť Cancel Printing v monitore stavu tlačiarne.
Ak chcete zobraziť monitor stavu tlačiarne, na paneli úloh kliknite na položku Canon XXX
Printer (kde XXX označuje názov zariadenia).
Kliknutím na ikonu tlačiarne v Doku (Dock) zobrazíte zoznam prebiehajúcich tlačových úloh.
Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, v zozname Názov (Name) vyberte požadovanú
úlohu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Odstrániť (Delete).
Ak chcete prebiehajúcu úlohu dočasne zastaviť, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť (Hold). Ak
chcete dočasne zastaviť všetky úlohy v zozname, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť tlačiareň
(Pause Printer) (alebo Zastaviť úlohy (Stop Jobs)).
Na začiatok strany
Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Rozšírená príručka
Strana 29 z celkového počtu 684
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) > Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint
EX
Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Táto časť predstavuje niekoľko užitočných funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Vytváranie vlastných výtlačkov
Z fotografií si môžete vytvoriť album alebo kalendár.
Album
Calendar
Stickers
Layout Print
Korekcia fotografií
Na automatickú alebo manuálnu úpravu, korekciu alebo vylepšenie fotografií môžete použiť
napríklad funkciu Red-Eye Correction, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing, Brightness alebo
Contrast.
Brightness
Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 30 z celkového počtu 684
Na začiatok strany
Tlač dokumentov (Windows)
Strana 31 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač dokumentov (Windows)
Tlač dokumentov (Windows)
Táto časť opisuje postup pri tlači dokumentu veľkosti A4 na obyčajný papier.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Poznámka
V niektorých softvérových aplikáciách sa môžu jednotlivé úkony líšiť. Podrobné informácie o
úkonoch nájdete v príručke k aplikácii.
Obrazovky použité v tejto časti opisujú tlač v operačnom systéme Windows Vista Ultimate Edition (v
ďalšom texte označovaný ako Windows Vista).
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
2.
Vložte papier.
Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera .
V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4.
3.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
4.
Použitím vhodnej softvérovej aplikácie vytvorte (alebo otvorte) dokument, ktorý
chcete vytlačiť.
5.
Otvorte okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne.
(1) V ponuke Súbor (File) alebo na paneli príkazov softvérovej aplikácie vyberte
položku Tlačiť (Print).
Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print).
(2) Skontrolujte, či je vybratý názov zariadenia.
Poznámka
Ak je vybratý názov iného zariadenia, kliknutím vyberte názov svojho zariadenia.
(3) Kliknite na položku Predvoľby (Preferences) (alebo Vlastnosti (Properties)).
Tlač dokumentov (Windows)
6.
Strana 32 z celkového počtu 684
Určte požadované nastavenia tlače.
(1) V ponuke Commonly Used Settings vyberte položku Business Document.
Poznámka
Ak je v ponuke Commonly Used Settings vybratý objekt tlače, napríklad Business
Document alebo Photo Printing, automaticky sa vyberú položky ponuky Additional
Features. Zobrazia sa tiež nastavenia vhodné pre daný objekt tlače, napríklad typ média
alebo kvalita tlače.
Po zadaní minimálne dvoch kópií v ponuke Copies sa začiarkne políčko Collate.
(2) Skontrolujte zobrazené nastavenia.
V tomto príklade kontrolujeme, či je v ponuke Media Type vybratá možnosť Plain Paper, v ponuke Print
Quality možnosť Standard a v ponuke Printer Paper Size možnosť A4.
Poznámka
Nastavenia môžete zmeniť.
Po zmene položky Printer Paper Size však skontrolujte, či nastavenie Page Size na karte
Page Setup zodpovedá nastaveniu v softvérovej aplikácii.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite.
(3) Kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
Poznámka
Ak sa chcete dozvedieť podrobné informácie o funkciách ovládača tlačiarne, kliknutím na
položky Help alebo Instructions zobrazte Pomocníka online alebo príručku on-screen manual
Rozšírená príručka . Ak je príručka on-screen manual nainštalovaná v počítači, na kartách
Quick Setup, Main a Maintenance sa zobrazí tlačidlo Instructions.
Zmenené nastavenia môžete pomenovať a pridať do ponuky Commonly Used Settings.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Ak chcete pri najbližšom otvorení okna nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne zobraziť aktuálne
nastavenia, začiarknite políčko Always Print with Current Settings. Niektoré softvérové
aplikácie nemusia túto funkciu podporovať.
Ak chcete zobrazením ukážky skontrolovať výsledok tlače, začiarknite políčko Preview before
printing. Niektoré softvérové aplikácie nemusia mať funkciu ukážky.
Podrobné nastavenia tlače môžete určiť na karte Main alebo Page Setup.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
7.
Spustite tlač.
Kliknutím na tlačidlo Tlačiť (Print) (alebo OK) spustite tlač.
Tlač dokumentov (Windows)
Strana 33 z celkového počtu 684
Poznámka
Pri tlači na obálky sa zobrazí hlásenie informujúce o spôsobe ich vkladania. Ak začiarknete
políčko Do not show this message again., hlásenie sa nabudúce nezobrazí.
Bližšie informácie o nastaveniach tlače obálok nájdete v časti Vkladanie obálok.
Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset na zariadení alebo
kliknite na možnosť Cancel Printing v monitore stavu tlačiarne.
Ak chcete zobraziť monitor stavu tlačiarne, na paneli úloh kliknite na položku Canon XXX
Printer (kde XXX označuje názov zariadenia).
Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak sú výsledky tlače neuspokojivé, upravte
polohu tlačovej hlavy.
Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Na začiatok strany
Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
Strana 34 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
Táto časť opisuje postup pri tlači dokumentu veľkosti A4 na obyčajný papier.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Poznámka
V niektorých softvérových aplikáciách sa môžu jednotlivé úkony líšiť. Podrobné informácie o
úkonoch nájdete v príručke k aplikácii.
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
2.
Vložte papier.
Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera .
V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4.
3.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
4.
Použitím vhodnej softvérovej aplikácie vytvorte (alebo otvorte) dokument, ktorý
chcete vytlačiť.
5.
Otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print).
V ponuke Súbor (File) softvérovej aplikácie vyberte položku Tlačiť (Print).
Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print).
Poznámka
Ak sa zobrazí dialógové okno znázornené nižšie, kliknite na tlačidlo
6.
(šípka nadol).
Určte požadované nastavenia tlače.
(1) Skontrolujte, či je v poli Printer vybratý názov vášho zariadenia.
(2) V ponuke Paper Size vyberte veľkosť strany vloženého papiera.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali veľkosť A4.
(3) V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte položku Quality & Media.
Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
(4) V ponuke Media Type vyberte typ vloženého média.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Plain Paper.
Poznámka
Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite.
(5) V ponuke Print Quality vyberte kvalitu tlače.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Standard.
Poznámka
Podrobné informácie o kvalite tlače nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená
príručka .
Poznámka
Ak chcete zobraziť podrobné informácie o funkciách ovládača tlačiarne, kliknite na ikonu
(otázka) na obrazovke Quality & Media, Color Options, Borderless Printing alebo Margin.
Naľavo od dialógového okna sa zobrazí ukážka, na ktorej môžete skontrolovať výsledky tlače.
Niektoré softvérové aplikácie nemusia mať funkciu ukážky.
7.
Spustite tlač.
Kliknutím na tlačidlo Tlačiť (Print) spustite tlač.
Poznámka
Kliknutím na ikonu tlačiarne v Doku (Dock) zobrazíte zoznam prebiehajúcich tlačových úloh.
Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, v zozname Názov (Name) vyberte požadovanú
úlohu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Odstrániť (Delete).
Ak chcete prebiehajúcu úlohu dočasne zastaviť, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť (Hold). Ak
chcete dočasne zastaviť všetky úlohy v zozname, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť tlačiareň
(Pause Printer).
Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak sú výsledky tlače neuspokojivé, upravte
Strana 35 z celkového počtu 684
Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
Strana 36 z celkového počtu 684
polohu tlačovej hlavy.
Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9
Poznámka
Obrazovky použité v tejto časti opisujú tlač v systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x.
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel .
2.
Vložte papier.
Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera .
V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4.
3.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
4.
Použitím vhodnej softvérovej aplikácie vytvorte (alebo otvorte) dokument, ktorý
chcete vytlačiť.
5.
Zadajte veľkosť strany.
(1) V ponuke Súbor (File) softvérovej aplikácie vyberte položku Nastavenie strany
(Page Setup).
Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup).
(2) Skontrolujte, či je v položke Formátovať pre (Format for) vybratý názov vášho
zariadenia.
(3) V ponuke Veľkosť papiera (Paper Size) vyberte veľkosť strany vloženého
papiera.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali veľkosť A4.
(4) Kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
6.
Určte požadované nastavenia tlače.
(1) V ponuke Súbor (File) softvérovej aplikácie vyberte položku Tlačiť (Print).
Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print).
(2) Skontrolujte, či je v poli Printer vybratý názov vášho zariadenia.
Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh)
Strana 37 z celkového počtu 684
(3) V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte položku Quality & Media.
(4) V ponuke Media Type vyberte typ vloženého média.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Plain Paper.
Poznámka
Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite.
(5) V ponuke Print Quality vyberte kvalitu tlače.
V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Standard.
Poznámka
Podrobné informácie o kvalite tlače nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená
príručka .
Poznámka
Ak chcete zobraziť podrobné informácie o funkciách ovládača tlačiarne, kliknite na ikonu
(otázka) na obrazovke Quality & Media, Color Options, Special Effects, Borderless Printing
alebo Margin.
Ak chcete zobrazením ukážky skontrolovať výsledok tlače, kliknite na tlačidlo Preview. Niektoré
softvérové aplikácie nemusia mať funkciu ukážky.
7.
Spustite tlač.
Kliknutím na tlačidlo Tlačiť (Print) spustite tlač.
Poznámka
Kliknutím na ikonu tlačiarne v Doku (Dock) zobrazíte zoznam prebiehajúcich tlačových úloh.
Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, v zozname Názov (Name) vyberte požadovanú
úlohu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Odstrániť (Delete).
Ak chcete prebiehajúcu úlohu dočasne zastaviť, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť (Hold). Ak
chcete dočasne zastaviť všetky úlohy v zozname, kliknite na tlačidlo Zastaviť úlohy (Stop
Jobs).
Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak sú výsledky tlače neuspokojivé, upravte
polohu tlačovej hlavy.
Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Na začiatok strany
Ďalšie použitie
Strana 38 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Ďalšie použitie
Ďalšie použitie
Táto časť predstavuje funkciu tlače fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge,
napríklad z digitálneho fotoaparátu, pripojeného pomocou kábla USB (len pre zariadenie MP270 series).
Táto časť predstavuje aj užitočné softvérové aplikácie, ktoré možno použiť so zariadením.
Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre
zariadenie MP270 series)
Užitočné softvérové aplikácie
Solution Menu
My Printer
Easy-WebPrint EX
Na začiatok strany
Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridg... Strana 39 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Ďalšie použitie > Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie
MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom
PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Pomocou kábla USB odporúčaného výrobcom zariadenia môžete k multifunkčnému zariadeniu pripojiť
zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge a priamo tlačiť uložené snímky.
Podrobné informácie o spôsobe tlače uložených snímok po pripojení k zariadeniu kompatibilnému so
štandardom PictBridge nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Podrobné informácie o nastaveniach tlače v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge nájdete
v príručke dodanej s týmto zariadením.
Pripojiteľné zariadenia:
Bez ohľadu na výrobcu alebo model možno k multifunkčnému zariadeniu pripojiť ľubovoľné zariadenie
kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge.
Poznámka
PictBridge je štandard určený na priamu tlač fotografií bez použitia počítača z pripojených zariadení,
akými sú digitálny fotoaparát, digitálna videokamera alebo mobilný telefón vybavený fotoaparátom.
(PictBridge) Zariadenie označené touto značkou je kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge.
Formát tlačiteľných obrazových údajov:
Zariadenie podporuje snímky* zhotovené pomocou fotoaparátu kompatibilného so štandardom DCF
(Design rule for Camera File system – Tvorba systému súborov pre fotoaparáty) a súbory PNG.
* Kompatibilné so štandardom Exif, verzie 2.2 alebo 2.21
Na začiatok strany
Užitočné softvérové aplikácie
Strana 40 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Ďalšie použitie > Užitočné softvérové aplikácie
Užitočné softvérové aplikácie
Na obsluhu zariadenia môžete používať rôzne užitočné softvérové aplikácie, ako sú Solution Menu, My
Printer a Easy-WebPrint EX.
Solution Menu
Prostredníctvom ponuky Solution Menu môžete spúšťať softvérové aplikácie dodané so zariadením
alebo zobrazovať prevádzkové pokyny.
Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu
(Solution Menu) na pracovnej ploche.
Kliknite sem: Solution Menu
Kliknite na ikonu
(Solution Menu) v Doku (Dock).
* Nasledujúce obrazovky sú určené pre systém Windows Vista.
Kliknite na tlačidlo funkcie, ktorú chcete použiť.
Po spustení ponuky Solution Menu kliknite na tlačidlo na hlavnom paneli, čím zmenšíte veľkosť okna.
Poznámka
Ak ste ponuku Solution Menu nenainštalovali alebo odinštalovali, nainštalujte ju z disku Inštalačný
disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) . Ponuku Solution Menu nainštalujete výberom položky Solution
Menu počas inštalácie Custom Install.
Tlačidlá zobrazené na obrazovke sa môžu líšiť v závislosti od krajiny alebo oblasti zakúpenia.
Ak chcete ponuku Solution Menu spustiť z ponuky Štart (Start), postupne vyberte položky Všetky
programy (All Programs) (alebo Programy (Programs)), Canon Utilities, Solution Menu a Solution
Menu.
Ak chcete ponuku Solution Menu spustiť z panela ponúk, vyberte ponuku Prejsť (Go), položky
Aplikácie (Applications), Canon Utilities, Solution Menu a dvakrát kliknite na položku Solution Menu.
My Printer
Použitím aplikácie My Printer môžete zobraziť okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne. Poskytuje tiež
informácie o tom, aké kroky treba vykonať pri problémoch s prevádzkou.
Aplikácia My Printer nie je k dispozícii pre počítače Macintosh.
Užitočné softvérové aplikácie
Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu
Strana 41 z celkového počtu 684
(My Printer) na pracovnej ploche.
Poznámka
Aplikáciu My Printer môžete spustiť aj z ponuky Solution Menu alebo z panela úloh.
Ak ste aplikáciu My Printer nenainštalovali alebo odinštalovali, nainštalujte ju z disku Inštalačný disk
CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) . Aplikáciu My Printer nainštalujete výberom položky My Printer počas
inštalácie Custom Install.
Ak chcete aplikáciu My Printer spustiť z ponuky Štart (Start), postupne vyberte položky Všetky
programy (All Programs) (alebo Programy (Programs)), Canon Utilities, My Printer a My Printer.
Easy-WebPrint EX
Aplikácia Easy-WebPrint EX umožňuje rýchlu a jednoduchú tlač webových stránok z programu Internet
Explorer. Webové stránky môžete tlačiť s veľkosťou automaticky prispôsobenou šírke papiera, aby sa
neorezali okraje stránok. Môžete tiež zobraziť ukážku požadovaných webových stránok a vybrať tie, ktoré
chcete vytlačiť.
Aplikácia Easy-WebPrint EX nie je k dispozícii v systéme Windows 2000 a v počítačoch Macintosh.
Dôležité
Bez súhlasu vlastníka autorských práv je nezákonné reprodukovať alebo upravovať diela iných
osôb chránené autorskými právami s výnimkou osobného použitia, domáceho použitia alebo
použitia v rámci obmedzeného rozsahu definovaného autorskými právami. Navyše, reprodukovanie
alebo úpravy fotografií ľudí môžu porušovať práva na zobrazenie osôb.
Po nainštalovaní aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX sa na obrazovku programu Internet Explorer pridá panel s
nástrojmi. Tento panel s nástrojmi je k dispozícii pri každom spustení programu Internet Explorer.
Funkcia orezania napríklad umožňuje orezať požadované časti webových stránok a pred tlačou ich
upraviť.
Užitočné softvérové aplikácie
Strana 42 z celkového počtu 684
Ak sa chcete dozvedieť podrobnejšie informácie o tlači webových stránok, kliknutím na tlačidlo
(Pomocník) zobrazte Pomocníka online.
Poznámka
Poznámky k inštalácii aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX
Ak aplikácia Easy-WebPrint EX nie je nainštalovaná, na paneli úloh pracovnej plochy sa môže
zobraziť upozornenie na inštaláciu aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX.
Ak chcete aplikáciu Easy-WebPrint EX nainštalovať, kliknite na zobrazené upozornenie a postupujte
podľa pokynov na obrazovke.
Aplikáciu Easy-WebPrint EX môžete nainštalovať aj z disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CDROM) .
Aplikáciu Easy-WebPrint EX nainštalujete výberom položky Easy-WebPrint EX počas inštalácie
Custom Install.
Na inštaláciu aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX v počítači sa vyžaduje program Internet Explorer 7 alebo
novší a pripojenie počítača na internet.
Na začiatok strany
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Strana 43 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Táto časť opisuje typy papiera a originálov, ktoré môžete vkladať do zariadenia, spôsob vkladania
papiera do zadného zásobníka a spôsob vkladania originálov, ktoré chcete kopírovať alebo skenovať.
Vkladanie papiera
Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera
Vkladanie obálok
Použiteľné typy médií
Nevhodné typy médií
Umiestnenie originálov
Umiestnenie originálov
Originály, ktoré možno použiť
Na začiatok strany
Vkladanie papiera
Strana 44 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera
Vkladanie papiera
Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera
Vkladanie obálok
Použiteľné typy médií
Nevhodné typy médií
Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera
Dôležité
Ak na skúšobnú tlač nastriháte papier na malú veľkosť, napríklad 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm, 4" x 8"/101,6 x
203,2 mm, 5" x 7"/13 x 18 cm alebo 2,16" x 3,58"/55,0 x 91,0 mm (veľkosť kreditnej karty), môže
dôjsť k zaseknutiu papiera.
Poznámka
Pri tlači fotografií sa odporúča používať originálny fotografický papier od spoločnosti Canon.
Podrobnosti o originálnom fotografickom papieri od spoločnosti Canon nájdete v časti Použiteľné
typy médií .
Možno použiť univerzálny kopírovací papier.
Informácie o veľkosti strany a hmotnosti papiera použiteľného v tomto zariadení nájdete v časti
Použiteľné typy médií .
1.
Pripravte papier.
Zarovnajte okraje papiera. Ak je papier zvlnený, vyrovnajte ho.
Poznámka
Pred vložením úhľadne zarovnajte okraje papiera. Ak papier vložíte bez zarovnania okrajov,
môže sa zaseknúť.
Ak je papier zvlnený, chyťte skrútené rohy a jemne ich ohýbajte v opačnom smere, kým sa
papier úplne nevyrovná.
Podrobné informácie o spôsobe vyrovnávania zvlneného papiera nájdete v časti Riešenie
problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
2.
Vložte papier.
(1) Otvorte podperu papiera, zdvihnite ju a sklopte.
(2) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
Vkladanie papiera
Strana 45 z celkového počtu 684
(3) Posunutím roztvorte vodiace lišty papiera (A) a vložte papier do stredu zadného
zásobníka tak, aby STRANA URČENÁ NA TLAČ SMEROVALA K VÁM.
Dôležité
Papier vždy vkladajte v orientácii na výšku (B). Vloženie papiera v orientácii na šírku (C)
môže spôsobiť jeho zaseknutie.
(4) Posunutím zarovnajte vodiace lišty papiera (A) s bočnými hranami balíka
papiera.
Vodiace lišty papiera neposúvajte príliš veľkou silou. Papier by sa nemusel správne podávať.
Vkladanie papiera
Strana 46 z celkového počtu 684
Poznámka
Dajte pozor, aby hárky papiera výškou nepresahovali značku limitu vkladania papiera (D).
Poznámka
Zariadenie môže pri podávaní papiera vydávať prevádzkový hluk.
Po vložení papiera
Pri kopírovaní vyberte veľkosť a typ vloženého papiera pomocou ovládacieho panela
zariadenia.
Pozrite si časť Kopírovanie .
Pri tlači pomocou počítača vyberte veľkosť a typ vloženého papiera v ponukách Printer Paper
Size (alebo Paper Size) a Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne.
Pozrite si časť Tlač dokumentov (Windows) alebo Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) .
Na začiatok strany
Vkladanie obálok
Strana 47 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera > Vkladanie obálok
Vkladanie obálok
Môžete tlačiť na obálky veľkosti European DL a US Comm. Env. #10.
Pri správnom nastavení ovládača tlačiarne sa adresa automaticky otočí a vytlačí podľa orientácie obálky.
Dôležité
Tlač na obálky je možná len pomocou počítača.
Nemožno používať nasledujúce obálky:
- obálky s reliéfnym alebo upraveným povrchom,
- obálky s dvojitými chlopňami (alebo so samolepiacimi prúžkami),
- obálky, ktorých lepiace chlopne sú už navlhčené a lepivé.
Poznámka
Pri tlači na obálky v systéme Windows sa zobrazí hlásenie informujúce o spôsobe ich vkladania. Ak
začiarknete políčko Do not show this message again., hlásenie sa nabudúce nezobrazí.
1.
Pripravte obálky.
Zatlačte na všetky štyri rohy a okraje obálok a vyrovnajte ich.
Ak sú obálky zvlnené, chyťte ich za oba protiľahlé konce a jemne ich ohnite v
opačnom smere.
Ak je roh chlopne na obálke zložený, vyrovnajte ho.
Pomocou pera pritlačte vstupný okraj obálky a vyrovnajte ohyb.
Obrázky znázornené vyššie zobrazujú bočný pohľad na vstupný okraj obálky.
Dôležité
Ak nie sú obálky ploché alebo ak ich okraje nie sú zarovnané, môžu sa v zariadení zaseknúť.
Skontrolujte, či zvlnenia ani bubliny nepresahujú 0,1 palca/3 mm.
2.
Vložte obálky.
(1) Otvorte podperu papiera.
Nezdvíhajte podperu papiera.
Vkladanie obálok
Strana 48 z celkového počtu 684
(2) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
(3) Posunutím roztvorte vodiace lišty papiera (A) a vložte obálky do stredu zadného
zásobníka tak, aby STRANA S ADRESOU SMEROVALA K VÁM.
Prehnutá chlopňa obálky bude na ľavej strane smerovať nadol.
Naraz možno vložiť maximálne 10 obálok.
(4) Posunutím zarovnajte vodiace lišty papiera (A) s bočnými hranami obálok.
Vodiace lišty papiera neposúvajte príliš veľkou silou. Obálky by sa nemuseli správne podávať.
(B) Zadná strana
(C) Strana s adresou
3.
V ovládači tlačiarne zadajte nastavenia.
(1) V ponuke Commonly Used Settings na karte Quick Setup vyberte položku
Envelope.
(2) V okne Envelope Size Setting vyberte položku DL Env. alebo Comm. Env. #10.
(3) V ponuke Orientation vyberte položku Landscape.
(1) V ponuke Media Type vyberte položku Envelope.
(2) V ponuke Paper Size vyberte položku DL Envelope alebo #10 Envelope.
(3) V ponuke Orientation vyberte orientáciu na šírku.
Dôležité
Vkladanie obálok
Strana 49 z celkového počtu 684
Ak správne nenastavíte veľkosť obálky alebo orientáciu , adresa sa vytlačí hore nohami alebo
sa otočí o 90 stupňov.
Poznámka
Zariadenie môže pri podávaní obálok vydávať prevádzkový hluk.
Ak je v systéme Windows výsledok tlače obrátený hore nohami, otvorte okno nastavenia
ovládača tlačiarne a v ponuke Commonly Used Settings vyberte možnosť Envelope. Potom v
ponuke Additional Features začiarknite políčko Rotate 180 degrees.
Podrobné informácie o nastaveniach ovládača tlačiarne nájdete v časti Tlač dokumentov
(Windows) alebo Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) .
Na začiatok strany
Použiteľné typy médií
Strana 50 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera > Použiteľné typy médií
Použiteľné typy médií
Ak chcete dosiahnuť najlepšie výsledky tlače, vyberte papier vhodný na danú tlač. Spoločnosť Canon
ponúka rôzne typy papiera, ktoré umocňujú zábavu pri tlači (napríklad nálepky), ako aj papier na tlač
fotografií a dokumentov. Na tlač dôležitých fotografií odporúčame používať originálny papier od
spoločnosti Canon.
Typy médií
Komerčne dostupný papier
Názov papiera
<číslo
modelu> *1
Obyčajný papier
Limit vkladania pre
výstupný zásobník
papiera
Limit vkladania papiera
pre zadný zásobník
Nastavenia v ovládači
tlačiarne: Media Type
Približne 100 hárkov
Približne 50 hárkov
Plain Paper
10 obálok
*4
Envelope
(recyklovaný
papier)*2 *3
Obálky
Originálny papier od spoločnosti Canon
Názov papiera
<číslo modelu> *1
Limit vkladania papiera
pre zadný zásobník
Limit vkladania pre
výstupný zásobník
papiera
Nastavenia v ovládači
tlačiarne: Media Type
Na tlač fotografií:
Photo Paper Pro
Platinum
<PT-101>*5
Photo Paper Pro II
A4, Letter, 5" x 7"/13 x 18
cm a 8" x 10"/20 x 25 cm:
10 hárkov
4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm: 20
hárkov
*4
Photo Paper Pro
Platinum
Photo Paper Pro II
<PR-201>*5
Glossy Photo Paper „
na každodenné
použitie“
Glossy Photo Paper
<GP-501>*3 *5
Photo Paper Glossy
Glossy Photo Paper
<GP-502>*3 *5
Photo Paper Plus
Glossy II
Photo Paper Plus
Glossy II
<PP-201> *3 *5
Photo Paper Plus Semigloss
Photo Paper Plus Semigloss
<SG-201>*3 *5
Matte Photo Paper
<MP-101>
Na tlač obchodných dokumentov:
Matte Photo Paper
Použiteľné typy médií
High Resolution Paper
80 hárkov
Strana 51 z celkového počtu 684
50 hárkov
High Resolution Paper
*4
T-Shirt Transfers
<HR-101N>
Na vytváranie vlastných výtlačkov:
T-Shirt Transfers
1 hárok
<TR-301>
Photo Stickers
Glossy Photo Paper
<PS-101> *6
*1 Papier označený číslom modelu je originálny papier od spoločnosti Canon. Podrobné informácie o
strane určenej na tlač a poznámky k manipulácii s papierom nájdete v príručke dodanej s papierom.
Informácie o dostupných veľkostiach papiera pre každý originálny papier Canon nájdete na našej
webovej stránke. Niektoré originálne papiere spoločnosti Canon nemožno zakúpiť vo všetkých krajinách
alebo oblastiach. V USA sa papier nepredáva podľa čísla modelu. Papier kupujte podľa názvu.
*2 V závislosti od typu papiera či okolitých podmienok (vysoká, nízka teplota alebo vlhkosť) môže byť
vkladanie maximálneho množstva papiera problematické. V takých prípadoch znížte počet hárkov
vkladaného papiera na menej ako polovicu (možno použiť 100-percentne recyklovaný papier).
*3 Papier, ktorý môžete použiť na vytváranie kópií po výbere typu média pomocou tlačidla Papier (Paper) na
ovládacom paneli. Môžete vybrať iba obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter, fotografický papier veľkosti
A4 alebo Letter a fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm.
*4 Odporúča sa, aby ste pred nepretržitou tlačou odstránili z výstupného zásobníka papiera
predchádzajúci potlačený hárok, čím predídete rozmazaniu a strate farby.
*5 Pri vkladaní balíkov papiera sa počas podávania môže strana určená na tlač označiť alebo sa papier
nemusí správne podávať. V takom prípade vkladajte hárky jednotlivo.
*6 Pomocou softvéru Easy-PhotoPrint EX, ktorý sa dodáva na disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CDROM), môžete ľahko zadávať nastavenia tlače na papier s nálepkami. Nainštalujte ho v počítači.
Poznámka
Podrobné informácie o nastaveniach veľkosti strany a typu média pri tlači zo zariadenia
kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka
(len pre zariadenie MP270 series).
Veľkosti strán
Môžete používať nasledujúce veľkosti strán.
Poznámka
V počítačoch Macintosh nie sú k dispozícii veľkosti Choukei 3 a Choukei 4.
Štandardné veľkosti:
Letter (8,50 x 11,00 palca/215,9 x 279,4 mm)
Legal (8,50 x 14,00 palca/215,9 x 355,6 mm)
A5 (5,83 x 8,27 palca/148,0 x 210,0 mm)
A4 (8,27 x 11,69 palca/210,0 x 297,0 mm)
B5 (7,17 x 10,12 palca/182,0 x 257,0 mm)
4" x 6" (4,00 x 6,00 palca/10 x 15 cm)
4" x 8" (4,00 x 8,00 palca/101,6 x 203,2 mm)
5" x 7" (5,00 x 7,00 palca/13 x 18 cm)
8" x 10" (8,00 x 10,00 palca/20 x 25 cm)
Použiteľné typy médií
Strana 52 z celkového počtu 684
L (3,50 x 5,00 palca/89,0 x 127,0 mm)
2L (5,00 x 7,01 palca/127,0 x 178,0 mm)
Hagaki (3,94 x 5,83 palca/100,0 x 148,0 mm)
Hagaki 2 (7,87 x 5,83 palca/200,0 x 148,0 mm)
Comm. Env. #10 (4,12 x 9,50 palca/104,6 x 241,3 mm)
DL Env. (4,33 x 8,66 palca/110,0 x 220,0 mm)
Choukei 3 (4,72 x 9,25 palca/120,0 x 235,0 mm)
Choukei 4 (3,54 x 8,07 palca/90,0 x 205,0 mm)
Youkei 4 (4,13 x 9,25 palca/105,0 x 235,0 mm)
Youkei 6 (3,86 x 7,48 palca/98,0 x 190,0 mm)
Card (2,16 x 3,58 palca/55,0 x 91,0 mm)
Wide (4,00 x 7,10 palca/101,6 x 180,6 mm)
Neštandardné veľkosti:
Môžete tiež zadať vlastnú veľkosť z nasledujúceho rozsahu.
Minimálna veľkosť:
2,17 x 3,58 palca/55,0 x 91,0 mm
Maximálna veľkosť:
8,50 x 26,61 palca/215,9 x 676,0 mm
Hmotnosť papiera
17 až 28 lb/64 až 105 g/m2 (okrem originálneho papiera od spoločnosti Canon)
Nepoužívajte ťažší ani ľahší papier (s výnimkou originálneho papiera od spoločnosti Canon), pretože sa
môže zaseknúť v zariadení.
Poznámky ku skladovaniu papiera
Tesne pred tlačou vyberte z balenia len potrebný počet hárkov papiera.
Pokiaľ netlačíte, vložte nepoužitý papier späť do balenia a skladujte ho na rovnom povrchu, aby sa
nezvlnil. Skladujte ho na mieste, ktoré je chránené pred teplom, vlhkosťou a priamym slnečným
svetlom.
Poznámky k papieru určenému na tlač na celú stranu bez okrajov
Na tlač na celú stranu bez okrajov nemôžete použiť papier veľkosti A5, B5 a Legal ani obálky.
Tlačiť na celú stranu bez okrajov na obyčajný papier môžete len pri tlači z počítača. Môže to však
viesť k zníženej kvalite tlače. Pri skúšobnej tlači sa odporúča používať obyčajný papier.
Na začiatok strany
Nevhodné typy médií
Strana 53 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera > Nevhodné typy médií
Nevhodné typy médií
Nepoužívajte nasledujúce typy papiera. Používanie týchto typov papiera môže spôsobiť nielen
nedostatočnú kvalitu tlače, ale aj zaseknutie papiera alebo poruchu zariadenia.
Poskladaný, zvlnený alebo pokrčený papier,
vlhký papier,
príliš tenký papier (s hmotnosťou do 17 lb/64 g/m 2),
príliš hrubý papier (s hmotnosťou viac ako 28 lb/105 g/m 2, okrem originálneho papiera od
spoločnosti Canon),
papier tenší ako pohľadnica vrátane obyčajného papiera alebo poznámkového papiera orezaného
na malú veľkosť (pri tlači na papier menšej veľkosti ako A5),
obrázkové pohľadnice,
pohľadnice s prilepenými fotografiami alebo nálepkami,
obálky s dvojitými chlopňami (alebo so samolepiacimi prúžkami),
obálky s reliéfnym alebo upraveným povrchom,
obálky, ktorých lepiace chlopne sú už navlhčené a lepivé.
akýkoľvek typ papiera s otvormi,
papier, ktorý nie je obdĺžnikového tvaru,
papier spojený svorkami alebo lepidlom,
papier s lepivými látkami,
papier zdobený leskom atď.
Na začiatok strany
Umiestnenie originálov
Strana 54 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Umiestnenie originálov
Umiestnenie originálov
Umiestnenie originálov
Originály, ktoré možno použiť
Umiestnenie originálov
Originály na kopírovanie alebo skenovanie vkladajte na ploché predlohové sklo.
Dôležité
Po položení originálu a pred začatím kopírovania alebo skenovania zatvorte kryt dokumentov.
Pri skenovaní z počítača pomocou softvérovej aplikácie musíte originál umiestniť iným spôsobom.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
1.
Položte originál na ploché predlohové sklo.
(1) Otvorte kryt dokumentov.
Dôležité
Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte žiadne predmety. Po otvorení krytu dokumentov spadnú do
zadného zásobníka a spôsobia poruchu zariadenia.
(2) Na ploché predlohové sklo položte originál tak, ABY STRANA URČENÁ NA
KOPÍROVANIE ALEBO SKENOVANIE SMEROVALA NADOL.
Roh originálu zarovnajte so značkou zarovnania
.
Dôležité
Na ploché predlohové sklo neumiestňujte predmety, ktorých hmotnosť presahuje 4,4 lb/2,0 kg.
Na originál netlačte silou ani naň neukladajte záťaž, ktorá prevyšuje 4,4 lb/2,0 kg. Mohlo by to
spôsobiť poruchu skenera alebo prasknutie plochého predlohového skla.
Zariadenie nedokáže skenovať šrafovanú oblasť (A) (0,04 palca/1 mm od okrajov plochého
predlohového skla).
Umiestnenie originálov
2.
Strana 55 z celkového počtu 684
Opatrne zatvorte kryt dokumentov.
Na začiatok strany
Originály, ktoré možno použiť
Strana 56 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Umiestnenie originálov > Originály, ktoré možno použiť
Originály, ktoré možno použiť
Kopírovať alebo skenovať možno nasledujúce originály.
Typy originálov:
Textový dokument, časopis alebo noviny
Vytlačená fotografia, pohľadnica, vizitka alebo disk DVD/CD
Veľkosť (š x d):
Max. 8,5 x 11,7 palca/216 x 297 mm
Poznámka
Hrubé originály, napríklad knihy, môžete na ploché predlohové sklo vložiť po odobratí krytu
dokumentov zo zariadenia.
Podrobné informácie o spôsobe odobratia a nasadenia krytu dokumentov nájdete v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Na začiatok strany
Bežná údržba
Strana 57 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba
Bežná údržba
Táto časť opisuje, ako čistiť zariadenie pri nejasných výsledkoch tlače, ako vymieňať kazety FINE, v
ktorých sa minul atrament, alebo aké opatrenia treba vykonať, keď sa papier nepodáva správne.
Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby
Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Výmena kazety FINE
Postup výmeny
Kontrola stavu atramentu
Čistenie zariadenia
Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera
Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne)
Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia
Na začiatok strany
Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby
Strana 58 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby
Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby
Ak sú výsledky tlače rozmazané alebo sa farby netlačia správne, pravdepodobne budú upchaté dýzy
tlačovej hlavy (kazety FINE). Podľa nasledujúceho postupu vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz, skontrolujte
stav dýz tlačovej hlavy a potom vyčistite tlačovú hlavu.
Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak je výsledok tlače neuspokojivý, zarovnaním tlačovej hlavy
môžete zlepšiť kvalitu tlače.
Dôležité
Kazety FINE nevyplachujte ani neutierajte. Môžete tým spôsobiť problémy s kazetami FINE.
Poznámka
Pred vykonaním údržby
Skontrolujte, či v kazete FINE ostal atrament.
Pozrite si časť Kontrola stavu atramentu .
Skontrolujte, či sú kazety FINE správne vložené.
Pozrite si časť Postup výmeny .
Skontrolujte, či je zo spodnej časti kazety FINE odstránená oranžová ochranná páska.
Pozrite si časť Postup výmeny .
Ak indikátor Alarm svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo, pozrite si časť Riešenie problémov v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Zvýšením kvality tlače v nastaveniach ovládača tlačiarne môžete zlepšiť výsledky tlače.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Ak sú výsledky tlače rozmazané alebo nerovnomerné:
Krok č. 1
Pozrite si časť Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz .
Pozrite si časť Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz .
Ak na vzorke chýbajú čiary alebo vzorka obsahuje
vodorovné biele pruhy:
Krok č. 2
Pozrite si časť Čistenie tlačovej hlavy .
Ak sa problém nevyriešil ani po dvojnásobnom čistení
tlačovej hlavy:
Krok č. 3
Pozrite si časť Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy .
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, vypnite zariadenie a po 24
hodinách vykonajte nové hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa problém stále nevyriešil:
Krok č. 4
Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE.
Poznámka
Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte
a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu
dýz.
Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby
Strana 59 z celkového počtu 684
Ak sa problém nevyriešil ani po výmene kazety FINE, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Ak výsledky tlače nie sú rovnomerné, napríklad rovné čiary nie sú
zarovnané:
Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Poznámka
Operácie údržby môžete vykonávať aj z počítača.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Na začiatok strany
Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Strana 60 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament.
Poznámka
Ak je v kazete nedostatok atramentu, vzorka na kontrolu dýz sa nevytlačí správne. Vymeňte kazety
FINE, v ktorých je nedostatok atramentu.
Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE.
Musíte si pripraviť: hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2.
Do zadného zásobníka vložte obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter.
3.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
4.
Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz.
(1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
(Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno A.
(2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Vytlačí sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz.
5.
Prezrite vzorku na kontrolu dýz.
Pozrite si časť Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz .
Na začiatok strany
Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Strana 61 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz
Prezrite si vzorku na kontrolu dýz a v prípade potreby vyčistite tlačovú hlavu.
1.
Skontrolujte, či na vzorke (1) nechýbajú čiary alebo či vzorka (2) neobsahuje
vodorovné biele pruhy.
(1) Skontrolujte, či na vzorke nechýbajú čiary.
Ak áno, vyžaduje sa čistenie.
Pozrite si časť Čistenie tlačovej hlavy .
(A) Správne
(B) Nesprávne (chýbajú čiary)
(2) Skontrolujte, či vzorka neobsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy.
Ak áno, vyžaduje sa čistenie.
Pozrite si časť Čistenie tlačovej hlavy .
(A) Správne
(B) Nesprávne (obsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy)
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Strana 62 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Ak na vytlačenej vzorke na kontrolu dýz chýbajú čiary alebo ak obsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy, vyčistite
tlačovú hlavu. Vyčistením tlačovej hlavy odstránite upchatie dýz a obnovíte stav tlačovej hlavy. Pri čistení
tlačovej hlavy sa míňa atrament, preto ju čistite iba v prípade potreby.
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2.
Vyčistite tlačovú hlavu.
(1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
(Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno H.
(2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Zariadenie začne čistiť tlačovú hlavu.
Kým zariadenie neskončí čistenie tlačovej hlavy, nevykonávajte iné činnosti. Potrvá to približne 1 až 2
minúty.
3.
Skontrolujte stav tlačovej hlavy.
Po dokončení čistenia sa displej LED prepne do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania.
Stav tlačovej hlavy skontrolujte vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz.
Pozrite si časť Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz .
Poznámka
Ak sa problém nevyrieši ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy, vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie
tlačovej hlavy.
Pozrite si časť Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy .
Na začiatok strany
Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Strana 63 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy
Ak sa kvalita tlače nezlepší po bežnom čistení tlačovej hlavy, vykonajte jej hĺbkové čistenie. Pri hĺbkovom
čistení tlačovej hlavy sa spotrebúva viac atramentu než pri bežnom čistení tlačovej hlavy, preto hĺbkové
čistenie používajte len v nevyhnutnom prípade.
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2.
Hĺbkovo vyčistite tlačovú hlavu.
(1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
(Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno y.
(2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Zariadenie začne hĺbkovo čistiť tlačovú hlavu.
Kým zariadenie neskončí hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy, nevykonávajte iné činnosti. Potrvá to približne 2
minúty.
3.
Skontrolujte stav tlačovej hlavy.
Po dokončení hĺbkového čistenia sa displej LED prepne do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania.
Stav tlačovej hlavy skontrolujte vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz.
Pozrite si časť Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz .
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách vykonajte nové hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, vymeňte kazetu FINE za novú.
Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE.
Ak sa problém nevyriešil ani po výmene kazety FINE, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Na začiatok strany
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Strana 64 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak je výsledok tlače neuspokojivý, upravte polohu tlačovej
hlavy.
Poznámka
Ak je v kazete nedostatok atramentu, hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nevytlačí správne.
Vymeňte kazety FINE, v ktorých je nedostatok atramentu.
Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE.
Musíte si pripraviť: hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter*
* Použite biely papier, ktorý je čistý na obidvoch stranách.
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2.
Do zadného zásobníka vložte obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter.
3.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
4.
Vytlačte hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
(1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
(Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí malé písmeno u.
(2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Vytlačí sa hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Dôležité
Na hárku na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nedotýkajte vytlačených častí.
Dajte pozor, aby ste nezašpinili hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa hárok zašpiní
alebo pokrčí, nemusí sa správne naskenovať.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
5.
Strana 65 z celkového počtu 684
Naskenovaním hárka na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy upravte polohu tlačovej hlavy.
(1) Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy položte na ploché predlohové sklo.
Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy položte VYTLAČENOU STRANOU SMEROM NADOL a značku
ľavom hornom rohu zarovnajte so značkou zarovnania
v jeho
.
(2) Opatrne zatvorte kryt dokumentov a skontrolujte, či sa na displeji LED zobrazilo
veľké písmeno U. Potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne
(Color) .
Zariadenie začne skenovať hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy a automaticky upraví polohu tlačovej hlavy.
Po úprave polohy tlačovej hlavy sa displej LED prepne do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania. Odstráňte
hárok z plochého predlohového skla.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Strana 66 z celkového počtu 684
Dôležité
Kým sa úprava polohy tlačovej hlavy nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani
nepremiestňujte vložený hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa úprava polohy tlačovej hlavy nepodarila, na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód chyby.
Chybu zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset a skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti.
- Ploché predlohové sklo a hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy nie sú znečistené.
- Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy je položený správne, vytlačenou stranou smerom nadol.
Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená
príručka .
Poznámka
Ak ani po nastavení polohy tlačovej hlavy podľa uvedeného postupu nie sú výsledky tlače
uspokojivé, nastavte polohu tlačovej hlavy manuálne prostredníctvom počítača.
Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Ak chcete vytlačiť a skontrolovať hodnoty aktuálneho nastavenia polohy tlačovej hlavy, na
displeji LED zobrazte písmeno L a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne
(Color) .
Na začiatok strany
Výmena kazety FINE
Strana 67 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Výmena kazety FINE
Výmena kazety FINE
Ak sa počas tlače minie atrament, na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód chyby E, 1, 6. Rozsvieti sa indikátor
Alarm a začne blikať indikátor Atrament (Ink) .
Skontrolujte, v ktorej kazete FINE sa minul atrament, a vymeňte ju za novú.
Poznámka
Informácie o kompatibilných kazetách FINE nájdete v tlačenej príručke Prvé spustenie .
Postup výmeny
Pokiaľ sa v kazetách FINE minie atrament, vymeňte ich podľa nasledujúceho postupu.
Dôležité
Manipulácia s kazetami FINE
Nedotýkajte sa elektrických kontaktov (A) ani dýz tlačovej hlavy (B) na kazete FINE. Ak sa jej
dotknete, zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť.
Na zabezpečenie optimálnej kvality tlače odporúčame používať kazety FINE od spoločnosti Canon.
Neodporúča sa dopĺňanie atramentu.
Vybratú kazetu FINE okamžite vymeňte za novú. Nenechávajte zariadenie bez kaziet FINE.
Kazety FINE vymieňajte len za nové kazety. Po vložení použitej kazety FINE sa môžu upchať dýzy.
Okrem toho pri použití takýchto kaziet nebude zariadenie schopné správne informovať, kedy ich
treba vymeniť.
Kazetu FINE po vložení nevyberajte zo zariadenia a nenechávajte ju vonku. Spôsobí to vyschnutie
kazety FINE a pri jej opätovnom vložení nemusí zariadenie správne fungovať. Ak chcete zabezpečiť
optimálnu kvalitu tlače, spotrebujte kazetu FINE do šiestich mesiacov odo dňa prvého použitia.
Poznámka
Ak sa v kazete FINE minie atrament, určitý čas môžete tlačiť s farebnou alebo čiernou kazetou FINE,
v ktorej ostal atrament. V porovnaní s tlačou s oboma kazetami sa však môže znížiť kvalita tlače. Na
dosiahnutie optimálnej kvality odporúčame používať nové kazety FINE.
Aj pri tlači len použitím jedného atramentu nechajte prázdnu kazetu FINE vloženú. Ak farebná alebo
čierna kazeta FINE nebude vložená, dôjde k chybe a zariadenie nebude môcť tlačiť.
Informácie o konfigurácii tohto nastavenia nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Farebný atrament sa môže spotrebúvať aj pri tlači čiernobielych dokumentov alebo pri zadaní
čiernobielej tlače.
Farebný aj čierny atrament sa spotrebúvajú aj pri bežnom a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy, ktoré
sa môžu vyžadovať na zachovanie výkonu zariadenia. Keď sa v kazete FINE minie atrament,
okamžite ju vymeňte za novú.
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté, a otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera.
Výmena kazety FINE
2.
Strana 68 z celkového počtu 684
Zdvihnite skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a pomocou podpery skenovacej jednotky (C) ju
pridržte otvorenú.
Držiak kazety FINE sa posunie na miesto vyhradené na výmenu.
Upozornenie
Násilne nezastavujte ani neposúvajte držiak kazety FINE. Nedotýkajte sa držiaka kazety FINE,
kým sa úplne nezastaví.
Dôležité
Vnútro zariadenia môže byť znečistené atramentom. Pri výmene kaziet FINE dávajte pozor, aby
ste si nezašpinili ruky ani oblečenie. Atrament môžete z vnútra zariadenia poľahky zotrieť
pomocou toaletného papiera alebo podobného materiálu.
Podrobné informácie o čistení nájdete v tlačenej príručke Prvé spustenie .
Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte žiadne predmety. Po otvorení krytu dokumentov spadnú do
zadného zásobníka a spôsobia poruchu zariadenia.
Pri otváraní skenovacej jednotky (krytu) nechajte kryt dokumentov zatvorený.
Nedotýkajte sa kovových ani iných častí vnútri zariadenia.
Ak skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) necháte otvorenú, držiak kazety FINE sa posunie doprava. V
takom prípade zatvorte a znovu otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt).
3.
Vyberte prázdnu kazetu FINE.
(1) Stlačte úchytky a otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom.
(2) Vyberte kazetu FINE.
Dôležité
S kazetami FINE zaobchádzajte opatrne, aby ste predišli zašpineniu oblečenia alebo okolia.
Prázdne kazety FINE znehodnoťte v súlade s miestnymi zákonmi a predpismi týkajúcimi sa
znehodnocovania spotrebného materiálu.
Výmena kazety FINE
4.
Strana 69 z celkového počtu 684
Pripravte novú kazetu FINE.
(1) Vyberte kazetu FINE z obalu a opatrne odstráňte oranžovú ochrannú pásku (D).
Dôležité
Ak budete kazetou FINE triasť, môže sa z nej vyliať atrament a zašpiniť vaše ruky a okolie. S
kazetou FINE zaobchádzajte opatrne.
Dávajte pozor, aby ste svoje ruky a okolie nezašpinili atramentom nachádzajúcim sa na
odstránenej ochrannej páske.
Ochrannú pásku po odstránení opätovne nenasadzujte. Znehodnoťte ju v súlade s miestnymi
zákonmi a predpismi týkajúcimi sa znehodnocovania spotrebného materiálu.
Nedotýkajte sa elektrických kontaktov ani dýz tlačovej hlavy na kazete FINE. Ak sa jej dotknete,
zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť.
5.
Vložte kazetu FINE.
(1) Do držiaka na kazetu FINE vložte novú kazetu FINE.
Farebná kazeta FINE sa vkladá do ľavej zásuvky a čierna kazeta FINE do pravej zásuvky.
(2) Zatvorením zaisťovacieho krytu kazety s atramentom zaistite kazetu FINE na
mieste.
Stláčajte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto.
(3) Skontrolujte, či je zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom správne zatvorený.
Poznámka
Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je správne zatvorený, tlačte naň, kým s
kliknutím nezapadne na miesto.
Výmena kazety FINE
Strana 70 z celkového počtu 684
(E) Správne zatvorený
(F) Nesprávne zatvorený (kryt je naklonený)
Dôležité
Zariadenie nemôže tlačiť, ak nie sú vložené farebná aj čierna kazeta FINE. Vždy vložte obe
kazety FINE.
6.
Čiastočne nadvihnite skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), aby sa podpera skenovacej
jednotky vrátila do pôvodnej polohy, a potom jemne zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku
(kryt).
Upozornenie
Pri nastavovaní podpery skenovacej jednotky do pôvodnej polohy dbajte na to, aby ste
skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) držali pevne, a dávajte pozor, aby ste si neprivreli prsty.
Poznámka
Ak po zatvorení skenovacej jednotky (krytu) indikátor Alarm svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo,
pozrite si časť Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Keď po výmene kazety FINE začnete tlačiť, zariadenie automaticky spustí čistenie tlačovej
hlavy. Kým zariadenie neskončí čistenie tlačovej hlavy, nevykonávajte iné činnosti.
Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo nie je zarovnaná poloha tlačovej hlavy, upravte
polohu tlačovej hlavy.
Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Na začiatok strany
Kontrola stavu atramentu
Strana 71 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Výmena kazety FINE > Kontrola stavu atramentu
Kontrola stavu atramentu
Stav atramentu môžete skontrolovať pomocou indikátorov Atrament (Ink) na ovládacom paneli alebo
pomocou obrazovky počítača.
Poznámka
V zariadení je namontovaný detektor hladiny atramentu, ktorý zisťuje zvyšnú hladinu atramentu. Pri
vložení novej kazety FINE považuje zariadenie túto kazetu za plnú atramentu a na základe toho
začne zisťovať zvyšnú hladinu atramentu. Ak vložíte použitú kazetu FINE, nemusí sa indikovať
správna hladina atramentu. V takom prípade považujte informácie o hladine atramentu len za
pomocné.
Pomocou indikátorov na ovládacom paneli
Skontrolujte, či je displej LED v pohotovostnom režime kopírovania. Stav atramentu môžete
skontrolovať pomocou indikátorov Ink (Atrament) .
(1) Indikátor Alarm
(2) Indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink)
(3) Indikátor Čierny atrament (Black Ink)
Svieti indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink) alebo Čierny atrament (Black
Ink)
Hladina atramentu je nízka. Môžete ešte chvíľu pokračovať v tlači, no odporúčame, aby ste mali k
dispozícii novú kazetu FINE.
Bliká indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink) alebo Čierny atrament (Black Ink)
a svieti indikátor Alarm
Ak sa na displeji LED zobrazuje kód E, 1, 6, minul sa atrament.
Informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Ak sa na displeji LED zobrazuje kód E, 1, 3, možno sa minul atrament.
Informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Bliká indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink) alebo Čierny atrament (Black Ink)
a nesvieti indikátor Alarm
Funkcia zisťovania zostávajúcej hladiny atramentu je vypnutá.
Pomocou obrazovky počítača
Stav atramentu môžete skontrolovať v monitore stavu tlačiarne (Windows) alebo v aplikácii Canon IJ
Printer Utility (Macintosh).
Kontrola stavu atramentu
Strana 72 z celkového počtu 684
(A) Skontrolujte, či sa na obrazovke nezobrazil nejaký symbol.
(nízka hladina atramentu) sa míňa. Môžete ešte chvíľu
Atrament označený symbolom
pokračovať v tlači, no odporúčame, aby ste mali k dispozícii novú kazetu FINE.
Poznámka
Počas tlače sa môže zobraziť chybové hlásenie. Skontrolujte hlásenie a vykonajte príslušné
opatrenia.
Podľa nasledujúceho postupu otvorte jednotlivé obrazovky s potvrdením.
1.
Z ponuky Ovládací panel (Control Panel) otvorte okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne.
Informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
2.
Na karte Maintenance kliknite na možnosť View Printer Status.
Kliknutím na ponuku Ink Details skontrolujte informácie o kazete FINE.
Poznámka
Monitor stavu tlačiarne môžete zobraziť aj kliknutím na položku Canon XXX Printer (kde XXX
označuje názov zariadenia), ktorá sa počas tlače zobrazí na paneli úloh.
1.
Otvorte aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility.
Informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
2.
V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte položku Ink Level Information.
Kliknutím na ponuku Ink Details skontrolujte informácie o kazete FINE.
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie zariadenia
Strana 73 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia
Čistenie zariadenia
Táto časť opisuje postup pri čistení vnútra zariadenia.
Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera
Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne)
Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera
Strana 74 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera
Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera
Ak je valček podávača papiera znečistený alebo sa naň prilepí prach z papiera, papier sa nemusí
správne podávať.
V takom prípade valček podávača papiera vyčistite. Čistením sa valček podávača papiera opotrebúva,
preto ho čistite len v prípade potreby.
Musíte si pripraviť: tri hárky obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté, a potom zo zadného zásobníka vyberte všetok
papier.
2.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
3.
Vyčistite valček podávača papiera.
(1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
(Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno b.
(2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Valček podávača papiera sa bude pri čistení otáčať.
4.
Pomocou papiera vyčistite valček podávača papiera.
(1) Skontrolujte, či sa valček podávača papiera prestal točiť, a potom do zadného
zásobníka vložte tri hárky obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter.
(2) Skontrolujte, či sa na displeji LED zobrazilo písmeno b, a potom stlačte tlačidlo
Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Zariadenie spustí čistenie. Čistenie sa dokončí po vysunutí papiera.
Ak sa po čistení valčeka podávača papiera problém nevyrieši, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Poznámka
Po dokončení čistenia stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset , čím displej LED prepnete do pohotovostného
režimu kopírovania.
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne)
Strana 75 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne)
Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne)
Odstráňte škvrny zvnútra zariadenia. Ak sa zašpiní vnútro zariadenia, môže sa zašpiniť aj vytlačený
papier, preto sa odporúča pravidelné čistenie.
Dôležité
Počas čistenia spodnej platne nevykonávajte iné činnosti.
Musíte si pripraviť: hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter
1.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté, a potom zo zadného zásobníka vyberte všetok
papier.
2.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
3.
Preložte hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter po šírke na polovicu a
potom ho znovu rozložte.
4.
Vložte iba tento hárok papiera do zadného zásobníka otvorenou stranou smerom k
vám.
5.
Vyčistite vnútro zariadenia.
(1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo
(Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno J.
Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne)
Strana 76 z celkového počtu 684
(2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Papier pri prechádzaní zariadením vyčistí jeho vnútro.
Skontrolujte zloženú oblasť vysunutého papiera. Ak je špinavá od atramentu, opätovne vykonajte čistenie
spodnej platne.
Ak sa ani po dvojnásobnom čistení spodnej platne problém nevyrieši, môžu byť znečistené výčnelky vnútri
zariadenia.
Vyčistite ich podľa pokynov v časti Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia .
Poznámka
Pri opätovnom čistení spodnej platne použite nový hárok papiera.
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia
Strana 77 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia
Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia
Upozornenie
Pred čistením vždy vypnite zariadenie a vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z elektrickej siete.
Ak sú výčnelky vnútri zariadenia znečistené, vatovým tampónom alebo podobným materiálom z nich
zotrite atrament.
Na začiatok strany
Príloha
Strana 78 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Príloha
Príloha
Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov
Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Na začiatok strany
Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov
Rozšírená príručka
Strana 79 z celkového počtu 684
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Príloha > Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov
Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a
obrázkov
Kopírovanie, skenovanie, tlač alebo používanie reprodukcií nasledujúcich dokumentov môže byť
protizákonné.
Uvedený zoznam nie je úplný. Ak máte akékoľvek pochybnosti, obráťte sa na právneho zástupcu vo
vašom súdnom obvode.
Bankovky
Príkazy na úhradu
Vkladové certifikáty
Poštové známky (znehodnotené
alebo nepoužité)
Identifikačné symboly a insígnie
Vojenské alebo povolávacie
dokumenty
Šeky alebo platobné príkazy
vydané orgánmi štátnej správy
Technické preukazy pre motorové
vozidlá a vlastnícke certifikáty
Cestovné šeky
Stravné lístky
Pasy
Imigračné doklady
Interné kolky (znehodnotené alebo
nepoužité)
Obligácie alebo iné krátkodobé dlžobné úpisy
Akciové certifikáty
Práce alebo diela chránené autorskými
právami bez súhlasu majiteľa autorských
práv
Na začiatok strany
Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Strana 80 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka
Riešenie problémov
Obsah > Príloha > Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Táto časť obsahuje rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia a tlače v optimálnej kvalite.
Atrament sa používa na rôzne účely.
Na aké rôzne účely okrem tlače sa atrament používa?
Atrament sa môže používať na iné účely než tlač. Atrament sa nepoužíva len na tlač, ale aj na
čistenie tlačovej hlavy, čím sa zachováva optimálna kvalita tlače.
Zariadenie je vybavené funkciou automatického čistenia atramentových dýz, aby sa zabránilo ich
upchatiu. Pri čistení sa z dýz pumpuje atrament. Pri čistení dýz sa spotrebuje iba malé množstvo
atramentu.
Používa sa pri čiernobielej tlači farebný atrament?
V závislosti od typu papiera určeného na tlač alebo nastavení ovládača tlačiarne sa pri čiernobielej
tlači môže spotrebovávať farebný atrament. Farebný atrament sa teda spotrebúva aj vtedy, keď
tlačíte čiernobielo.
Tlač na špeciálny papier: Ako tlačiť v optimálnej kvalite?
Tip: Pred tlačou skontrolujte stav zariadenia.
Je tlačová hlava v poriadku?
Ak sú dýzy tlačovej hlavy upchaté, tlač bude nejasná a papier sa znehodnotí. Podľa vzorky
vytlačenej na kontrolu dýz skontrolujte tlačovú hlavu.
Pozrite si časť Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby .
Neznečistilo sa vnútro zariadenia atramentom?
Po tlači na veľké množstvo papiera alebo tlači bez okrajov sa oblasť, cez ktorú sa podáva papier,
môže znečistiť atramentom. Vyčistite vnútro zariadenia použitím funkcie čistenia spodnej platne.
Pozrite si časť Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) .
Tip: Overte si spôsob správneho vkladania papiera.
Je vložený papier správne otočený?
Do zadného zásobníka vkladajte papier tak, aby strana určená na tlač smerovala k vám.
Nie je papier zvlnený?
Zvlnenie spôsobí zaseknutie papiera. Zvlnený papier vyrovnajte a potom ho znova vložte.
Informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka .
Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Strana 81 z celkového počtu 684
Tip: Po vložení papiera nezabudnite zadať nastavenia papiera.
Po vložení papiera vyberte jeho typ v ponuke Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne alebo pomocou tlačidla
Papier (Paper) na ovládacom paneli. Ak nevyberiete typ papiera, nemusíte dosiahnuť uspokojivý
výsledok tlače.
Pozrite si časti Kopírovanie , Tlač z počítača a Použiteľné typy médií .
Existujú rôzne typy papiera: papier so špeciálnou vrstvou na povrchu určený na tlač fotografií v
optimálnej kvalite alebo papier vhodný na tlač dokumentov. Ponuka Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne
obsahuje odlišné predvolené nastavenia pre každý typ papiera (napríklad používanie atramentu,
vystrekovanie atramentu alebo vzdialenosť od dýz), takže optimálnu kvalitu obrazu môžete
dosiahnuť pri tlači na všetky typy papiera. Tlačidlo Papier (Paper) na ovládacom paneli
používané na vytváranie kópií umožňuje vybrať podobné nastavenia ako pomocou ponuky Media
Type v ovládači tlačiarne. Pomocou ponuky Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne alebo tlačidla Papier
(Paper) na ovládacom paneli môžete tlačiť pri rôznych nastaveniach, ktoré sú vhodné pre každý typ
vloženého papiera.
Na zrušenie tlače používajte tlačidlo Stop/Reset.
Tip: Nikdy nestláčajte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON).
Ak práve prebieha tlač a stlačíte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON), tlačové údaje odoslané z počítača sa zaradia do
frontu v zariadení a možno nebudete môcť pokračovať v tlači.
Ak chcete zrušiť tlač, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset.
Poznámka
Ak pri tlači z počítača nemožno tlač zrušiť stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset , otvorte okno
nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne a odstráňte nepotrebné tlačové úlohy z monitora stavu tlačiarne
(Windows).
Musí sa s používaným alebo prenášaným zariadením
zaobchádzať opatrne?
Tip: Zariadenie nepoužívajte ani neprenášajte vo vertikálnej ani
naklonenej polohe.
Ak budete zariadenie používať alebo prenášať vo vertikálnej alebo naklonenej polohe, môže sa
poškodiť a môže z neho vytiecť atrament.
Dbajte na to, aby ste zariadenie nepoužívali ani neprenášali vo vertikálnej ani naklonenej polohe.
Tip: Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte predmety.
Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte žiadne predmety. Po otvorení krytu dokumentov spadnú do zadného
zásobníka a spôsobia poruchu zariadenia.
Navyše, zariadenie umiestnite na miesto, kde naň nebudú padať predmety.
Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Strana 82 z celkového počtu 684
Tip: Miesto na umiestnenie zariadenia si dôkladne vyberte.
Zariadenie umiestnite minimálne 5,91 palca/15 cm od iných elektrických spotrebičov, napríklad
žiariviek. Ak sa zariadenie umiestni bližšie k týmto spotrebičom, z dôvodu rušenia žiarivkami nemusí
správne fungovať.
Ako zabezpečiť optimálnu kvalitu tlače?
Kľúčom pri tlači v optimálnej kvalite je zabránenie vyschnutiu a upchatiu tlačovej hlavy. Na zabezpečenie
optimálnej kvality tlače vždy postupujte podľa nasledujúcich krokov.
Zástrčku napájacieho kábla vytiahnite podľa nasledujúceho postupu.
1. Stlačením tlačidla ZAP. (ON) na zariadení vypnite zariadenie.
2. Presvedčte sa, že nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) .
3. Vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z nástennej zásuvky alebo vypnite konektor
predlžovacieho kábla.
Ak zariadenie vypnete pomocou tlačidla ZAP. (ON), zariadenie automaticky nasadí na tlačovú
hlavu (dýzy) ochranné viečko, aby ju chránilo pred vyschnutím. Ak vytiahnete zástrčku
napájacieho kábla z nástennej zásuvky alebo vypnete konektor predlžovacieho kábla ešte pred
zhasnutím indikátora Napájanie (Power) , na tlačovú hlavu sa ochranné viečko nenasadí
správne, čo spôsobí jej vyschnutie alebo upchatie.
Pri vyťahovaní zástrčky napájacieho kábla vždy dodržiavajte tento postup.
Tlačte pravidelne.
Tak ako vyschne a znehodnotí sa hrot zvýrazňovača, ktorý sa dlhší čas nepoužíva, dokonca aj keď
je zakrytý, rovnako môže vyschnúť alebo sa upchať tlačová hlava, ak sa zariadenie dlhší čas
nepoužíva.
Odporúčame, aby ste zariadenie používali aspoň raz za mesiac.
Poznámka
Ak sa s vytlačenou oblasťou dostane do kontaktu voda alebo pot, alebo potriete vytlačenú oblasť
zvýrazňovačom alebo farbou, v závislosti od typu papiera sa atrament môže rozmazať.
Farby sú nerovnomerné a výsledky tlače rozmazané.
Tip: Podľa vytlačenej vzorky na kontrolu dýz skontrolujte, či nie sú
upchaté dýzy.
Ak sú dýzy upchaté, farby môžu byť nerovnomerné alebo sa môžu rozmazať výsledky tlače.
Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia
Strana 83 z celkového počtu 684
V takom prípade
Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz.
Na vytlačenej vzorke na kontrolu dýz skontrolujte, či nie sú dýzy upchaté.
Pozrite si časť Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby .
Na začiatok strany
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 84 z celkového počtu 684
MC-3809-V1.00
Základná príručka
Tlač
Skenovanie
Kopírovanie
Tlač
Tlač z počítača
Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Čo je program Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Riešenie problémov
Ako používať túto príručku
Tlač fotografií
Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Výber fotografie
Tlač tejto príručky
Výber papiera
Údržba
Tlač
Zmena nastavení zariadenia
Príloha
Keď zobrazíte túto príručku on-
screen manual v inom ako
anglickom jazykovom prostredí,
niektoré opisy sa môžu zobraziť v
angličtine.
Vytvorenie albumu
Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Výber papiera a rozloženia
Výber fotografie
Úpravy
Tlač
Tlač kalendárov
Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Výber papiera a rozloženia
Výber fotografie
Úpravy
Tlač
Tlač nálepiek
Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Výber papiera a rozloženia
Výber fotografie
Úpravy
Tlač
Rozloženie tlače
Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Výber papiera a rozloženia
Výber fotografie
Úpravy
Tlač
Oprava a zlepšenie fotografií
Používanie funkcie Automatická oprava fotografií
Používanie funkcie Korekcia efektu červených očí
Používanie funkcie Zjasnenie tváre
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 85 z celkového počtu 684
Používanie funkcie Zaostrenie tváre
Používanie funkcie Digitálne vyhladenie tváre
Používanie funkcie Odstránenie znamienok
Úprava obrázkov
Oprava/zlepšenie obrázkov (Correct/Enhance
Images)
Otázky a odpovede
Ako možno presunúť (alebo skopírovať) uložený
súbor?
Z ktorej strany zobrazeného obrázka začína tlač?
Ako možno tlačiť s rovnakými okrajmi?
Čo znamená označenie „C1“ alebo „C4“?
Nastavenia tlače fotografií
Tlač živých fotografií
Redukcia šumu na fotografiách
Orezanie fotografií (funkcia Tlač fotografií)
Tlač dátumov na fotografie (funkcia Tlač fotografií)
Tlač viacerých fotografií na jednu stranu
Tlač zoznamu
Tlač fotografií na doklady (funkcia ID Photo Print)
Tlač informácií o fotografiách
Ukladanie fotografií
Otvorenie uložených súborov
Ďalšie nastavenia
Zmena rozloženia
Zmena pozadia
Pridanie fotografií
Zámena polohy fotografií
Nahradenie fotografií
Zmena polohy, otočenia a veľkosti fotografií
Orezanie fotografií
Orámovanie fotografií
Tlač dátumov na fotografiách
Pridanie poznámok k fotografiám
Pridanie textu k fotografiám
Ukladanie
Nastavenie sviatkov
Nastavenie zobrazenia kalendára
Otvorenie uložených súborov
Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Rôzne spôsoby tlače
Tlač pomocou inštalačného letáka
Nastavenie veľkosti a orientácie strany
Nastavenie počtu kópií a poradia tlače
Nastavenie okraja na zošitie
Tlač bez okrajov
Tlač s prispôsobením na stranu
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 86 z celkového počtu 684
Tlač so zmenou rozmeru
Tlač rozloženia strany
Tlač plagátov
Tlač brožúr
Obojstranná tlač
Tlač pečiatky alebo pozadia
Uloženie pečiatky
Uloženie obrazových údajov, ktoré sa majú použiť
ako pozadie
Tlač obálok
Zobrazenie výsledkov tlače ešte pred tlačou
Nastavenie rozmerov papiera (vlastná veľkosť)
Zmena kvality tlače a korekcia obrazových údajov
Výber kombinácie úrovne kvality tlače a spôsobu
poltónovania
Tlač farebného dokumentu v monochromatickom
režime
Nastavenie korekcie farieb
Optimálna tlač obrazových údajov fotografií
Úprava farieb pomocou ovládača tlačiarne
Tlač pomocou profilov ICC
Úprava vyváženia farieb
Úprava jasu
Úprava intenzity
Úprava kontrastu
Simulácia ilustrácie
Zobrazenie obrazových údajov pomocou jednej farby
Zobrazenie obrazových údajov v živých farbách
Vyhladenie zúbkovaných obrysov
Zmena vlastností farieb na vylepšenie sfarbenia
Redukcia šumu na fotografiách
Prehľad ovládača tlačiarne
Používanie ovládača tlačiarne
Ovládač tlačiarne Canon IJ
Ako otvoriť okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne
Karta Údržba (Maintenance)
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Preview
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre
zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre
zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len
pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu
PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Nastavenia v zariadení kompatibilnom so
štandardom PictBridge
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 87 z celkového počtu 684
Skenovanie
Skenovanie
Skenovanie obrázkov
Skenovanie obrázkov
Pred skenovaním
Umiestnenie dokumentov
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou
ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou
ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Príloha: Rôzne nastavenia skenovania
Výber odpovede na príkazy z ovládacieho panela
použitím programu MP Navigator EX
Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Čo je to MP Navigator EX (dodaný softvér skenera)?
Skúsme skenovať
Spustenie programu MP Navigator EX
Skenovanie fotografií a dokumentov
Skenovanie viacerých dokumentov naraz
Skenovanie obrázkov väčších ako ploché predlohové
sklo (funkcia Pomoc pri spájaní (Stitch Assist))
Jednoduché skenovanie jedným kliknutím
Užitočné funkcie programu MP Navigator EX
Automatická oprava a vylepšenie obrázkov
Manuálna oprava a vylepšenie obrázkov
Úprava obrázkov
Vyhľadávanie obrázkov
Triedenie obrázkov do kategórií
Používanie obrázkov v programe MP Navigator EX
Ukladanie
Ukladanie súborov PDF
Vytváranie a úprava súborov PDF
Tlač dokumentov
Tlač fotografií
Odosielanie prostredníctvom e-mailu
Úprava súborov
Nastavenie hesiel pre súbory PDF
Otváranie a úprava súborov PDF chránených heslom
Obrazovky programu MP Navigator EX
Obrazovka Navigačný režim (Navigation Mode)
Karta Naskenovať alebo importovať dokumenty
alebo obrázky (Scan/Import Documents or Images)
Karta Zobraziť a použiť obrázky v počítači (View &
Use Images on your Computer)
Karta Vlastné skenovanie jedným kliknutím (Custom
Scan with One-click)
Obrazovka Fotografie alebo dokumenty (sklo)
(Photos/Documents (Platen)) (okno Naskenovať
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 88 z celkového počtu 684
alebo importovať (Scan/Import))
Dialógové okno Nastavenie skenovania (Scan
Settings) (Fotografie alebo dokumenty (Photos/
Documents))
Dialógové okno Uložiť (Save)
Dialógové okno Uložiť ako súbor PDF (Save as PDF
file)
Dialógové okno Nastavenia súborov PDF (PDF
Settings)
Okno Zobraziť a použiť (View & Use)
Okno Vytvoriť alebo upraviť súbor PDF (Create/Edit
PDF file)
Dialógové okno Tlač dokumentu (Print Document)
Dialógové okno Tlač fotografie (Print Photo)
Dialógové okno Odoslať prostredníctvom e-mailu
(Send via E-mail)
Oprava/zlepšenie obrázkov (Correct/Enhance
Images)
Obrazovka Režim jedného kliknutia (One-click Mode)
Dialógové okno Automatické skenovanie (Auto Scan)
Dialógové okno Uložiť (Save) (obrazovka Režim
jedného kliknutia (One-click Mode))
Dialógové okno Nastavenia skenovania (Scan
Settings)
Dialógové okno Uložiť (Save)
Dialógové okno Nastavenie normy Exif (Exif Settings)
Dialógové okno PDF
Dialógové okno Uložiť ako súbor PDF (Save as PDF
file)
Dialógové okno Pošta (Mail)
Dialógové okno OCR
Dialógové okno Vlastné (Custom)
Dialógové okno Predvoľby (Preferences)
Karta Všeobecné (General)
Karta Nastavenia tlačidla skenera (Scanner Button
Settings) (okno Uložiť (Save))
Príloha: Otváranie iných súborov než naskenovaných
obrázkov
Otváranie obrázkov uložených v počítači
Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Čo je to ScanGear (ovládač skenera)?
Skenovanie s rozšírenými nastaveniami pomocou
programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Spustenie programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Skenovanie v základnom režime
Skenovanie v rozšírenom režime
Skenovanie v režime automatického skenovania
Skenovanie viacerých dokumentov naraz pomocou
programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Oprava obrázkov a úprava farieb pomocou programu
ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 89 z celkového počtu 684
Oprava obrázkov (funkcie Neostrá maska (Unsharp
Mask), Zníženie množstva prachu a škrabancov
(Reduce Dust and Scratches), Úprava vyblednutia
(Fading Correction) a pod.)
Úprava farieb pomocou vzorky farieb
Úprava sýtosti a vyváženia farieb
Úprava jasu a kontrastu
Úprava histogramu
Úprava krivky odtieňov
Nastavenie hraničnej hodnoty
Obrazovky programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Karta Základný režim (Basic Mode)
Karta Rozšírený režim (Advanced Mode)
Nastavenia vstupu
Nastavenia výstupu
Nastavenia obrázkov
Tlačidlá úpravy farieb
Karta Režim automatického skenovania (Auto Scan
Mode)
Dialógové okno Predvoľby (Preferences)
Karta Skener (Scanner)
Karta Ukážka (Preview)
Karta Skenovanie (Scan)
Karta Nastavenia farieb (Color Settings)
Príloha: Užitočné informácie o skenovaní
Úprava rámov orezania
Rozlíšenie
Formáty súborov
Farebná zhoda
Ďalšie skenovacie postupy
Skenovanie pomocou ovládača WIA
Skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela (iba pre
systém Windows XP)
Kopírovanie
Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Kopírovanie
Vytváranie kópií
Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie
Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania
Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter
Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy)
Riešenie problémov
Riešenie problémov
Ak sa objaví chyba
Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 90 z celkového počtu 684
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Indikátor Alarm svieti na oranžovo
Indikátory tlačiarne striedavo blikajú – indikátor Napájanie
(Power) na zeleno a indikátor Alarm na oranžovo
Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené
Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy
Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú
skreslené/Biele pruhy
Farby sú nejasné
Čiary nie sú zarovnané
Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové
škvrny
Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný
Na rube papiera sú šmuhy
Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary
Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy
Tlač sa nespustí
Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením
Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje
Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo
Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na
výmenu
Papier sa správne nepodáva
Zaseknutý papier
Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v
zadnom zásobníku
V iných prípadoch
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Zobrazuje sa chyba č. B200 – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne.
Vypnite tlačiareň a odpojte jej napájací kábel od
napájacieho zdroja. Potom sa obráťte na servisné
stredisko. (B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the
printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from
the power supply. Then contact the service center.)
Zobrazuje sa chyba č. **** – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne.
Vypnite a znovu zapnite tlačiareň. Ak sa tým chyba
neodstráni, pozrite si bližšie informácie v užívateľskej
príručke. (**** A printer error has occurred. Turn the
printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error,
see the user's guide for more detail.)
Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 300
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 1700
Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1688
Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1686
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2001 (len pre zariadenie MP270
series)
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2002 (len pre zariadenie MP270
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Strana 91 z celkového počtu 684
series)
Iné chybové hlásenia
Zobrazuje sa obrazovka Program rozšíreného prieskumu
používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov
(Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program)
Zobrazuje sa ikona Program rozšíreného prieskumu
používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov
(Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program)
Pre používateľov systému Windows
Nezobrazuje sa monitor stavu tlačiarne
Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa
zobrazuje chybové hlásenie (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Problémy pri skenovaní
Nefunguje skener
Nespúšťa sa program ScanGear (ovládač skenera)
Zobrazuje sa chybové hlásenie a nezobrazuje sa
obrazovka programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Kvalita skenovania (obrázka zobrazeného na monitore) je
slabá
Okolo naskenovaného obrázka sa nachádzajú
nadbytočné biele oblasti
Nemožno skenovať viacero dokumentov naraz
Nedá sa správne skenovať v režime automatického
skenovania
Nízka rýchlosť skenovania
Zobrazuje sa hlásenie Nedostatok pamäte. (There is not
enough memory.)
Počítač prestáva počas skenovania pracovať
Po aktualizácii systému Windows nefunguje skener
Problémy so softvérom
E-mailový softvérový program, ktorý chcete používať, sa
nezobrazuje na obrazovke výberu e-mailového
softvérového programu
Naskenovaný obrázok sa tlačí zväčšený alebo zmenšený
Naskenovaný obrázok je zväčšený alebo zmenšený na
monitore počítača
Naskenovaný obrázok sa nedá otvoriť
Problémy s programom MP Navigator EX
Nedá sa skenovať so správnou veľkosťou
Pri skenovaní pomocou ovládacieho panela sa nedá
správne zistiť umiestnenie alebo veľkosť obrázka
Dokument je umiestnený správne, no naskenovaný
obrázok je zošikmený
Dokument je umiestnený správne, no mení sa orientácia
naskenovaného obrázka
Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť
Často kladené otázky
Pokyny na používanie (ovládač tlačiarne)
Všeobecné poznámky (ovládač skenera)
Používanie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Používanie programu MP Navigator EX
MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka
Informácie o ponuke Solution Menu
Strana 92 z celkového počtu 684
Ako používať túto príručku
Strana 93 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku
Ako používať túto príručku
Používanie tably Obsah (Contents)
Používanie okna Vysvetlenie
Tlač tejto príručky
Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov
Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke
Symboly použité v tomto dokumente
Ochranné známky
Na začiatok strany
Používanie tably Obsah (Contents)
Strana 94 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Používanie tably Obsah (Contents)
Používanie tably Obsah (Contents)
Keď kliknete na názov dokumentu zobrazený na table s obsahom v ľavej časti príručky on-screen
manual, v okne s vysvetlením na pravej strane sa zobrazia dokumenty s týmto názvom.
Keď kliknete na ikonu
úrovniach.
, ktorá sa nachádza naľavo od ikony
, zobrazia sa názvy dokumentov na nižších
Poznámka
Kliknutím na tlačidlo
zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte tablu s obsahom.
Na začiatok strany
Používanie okna Vysvetlenie
Strana 95 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Používanie okna Vysvetlenie
Používanie okna Vysvetlenie
(1) Kliknutím na zelené znaky prejdete na príslušný dokument.
(2) Kurzor sa presunie na začiatok tohto dokumentu.
Poznámka
Schémy a obrazovky počítača použité v tejto príručke sa týkajú zariadenia MP270 series.
Ak nie je uvedené inak, úkony sú úplne rovnaké ako pre zariadenie MP250 series.
Niektoré modely nemožno zakúpiť vo všetkých oblastiach.
Na začiatok strany
Tlač tejto príručky
Strana 96 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Tlač tejto príručky
Tlač tejto príručky
Kliknutím na tlačidlo
zobrazíte panel tlače na ľavej strane príručky on-screen manual.
Poznámka
Kliknutím na tlačidlo
zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte panel tlače.
Po kliknutí na tlačidlo a následnom kliknutí na položku Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) sa zobrazí
dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup). Potom môžete jednoducho nastaviť papier, ktorý
sa použije na tlač.
Kliknutím na tlačidlo a následným kliknutím na položku Nastavenia tlače (Print Settings) zobrazíte
dialógové okno Tlačiť (Print). Po zobrazení dialógového okna vyberte tlačiareň, ktorá sa použije na
tlač. Tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, môžete vybrať aj na karte Nastav. tlače (Print Setup).
Po výbere tlačiarne, ktorú chcete použiť, kliknite na tlačidlo Vlastnosti... (Properties...) a zadajte
nastavenia tlače.
Kliknite na tlačidlo a následným kliknutím na položku Nastavenia možností (Option Settings)
zobrazte dialógové okno Nastavenia možností (Option Settings). Potom môžete nastaviť operáciu
tlače.
Vytlačiť názov dokumentu a číslo strany (Print document title and page number)
Ak je začiarknuté toto políčko, v hlavičke (vo vrchnej časti dokumentu) sa vytlačí názov príručky a
číslo strany.
Vytlačiť farbu pozadia a obrázky (Print background color and images)
Ak je začiarknuté toto políčko, vytlačí sa farba pozadia a obrázky. Niektoré obrázky sa vytlačia bez
ohľadu na stav začiarknutia tohto políčka.
Pred tlačou skontrolovať počet strán na tlač (Check number of pages to be printed before
printing)
Ak je začiarknuté toto políčko, pred začatím tlače sa zobrazí dialógové okno Počet strán na tlač –
potvrdenie (Print Page Count Confirmation). V tomto dialógovom okne môžete zistiť, koľko strán
sa vytlačí.
Na karte Výber dokumentu (Document Selection) vyberte spôsob tlače dokumentu. K dispozícii sú
nasledujúce štyri spôsoby tlače:
Tlač tejto príručky
Strana 97 z celkového počtu 684
Tlač aktuálneho dokumentu
Tlač vybratých dokumentov
Tlač Príručky
Tlač všetkých dokumentov
Poznámka
Môžete vybrať typ tlače a potom na karte Nastav. tlače (Print Setup) jednoducho zadať nastavenia
tlače.
Tlač aktuálneho dokumentu
Môžete vytlačiť aktuálne zobrazený dokument.
1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť
Aktuálny dokument (Current Document).
Názov aktuálne zobrazeného dokumentu sa zobrazí v zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be
Printed).
Poznámka
Výberom možnosti Vytlačiť prepojené dokumenty (Print linked documents) môžete vytlačiť aj
dokumenty, ktoré sú prepojené s aktuálnym dokumentom. Prepojené dokumenty sa pridajú do
zoznamu Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed).
Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad
výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu.
2. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup).
Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby
zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače.
3. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing).
Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač.
4. Spustite tlač.
Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes).
Vytlačia sa aktuálne zobrazené dokumenty.
Tlač vybratých dokumentov
Môžete vybrať a vytlačiť požadované dokumenty.
1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť Vybraté
dokumenty (Selected Documents).
Názvy všetkých dokumentov sa zobrazia v zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed).
2. Vyberte dokumenty, ktoré chcete vytlačiť.
V zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed) začiarknite políčka vedľa názvov
dokumentov, ktoré chcete vytlačiť.
Poznámka
Ak začiarknete políčko Automaticky vybrať dokumenty v nižších hierarchiách (Automatically
select documents in lower hierarchies), začiarknu sa všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov v
nižších hierarchiách.
Ak chcete začiarknuť všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vybrať
všetky (Select All).
Tlač tejto príručky
Strana 98 z celkového počtu 684
Ak chcete zrušiť začiarknutie všetkých políčok vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť
Vymazať všetky (Clear All).
Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad
výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu.
3. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup).
Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby
zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače.
4. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing).
Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač.
5. Spustite tlač.
Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes).
Vytlačia sa všetky dokumenty so začiarknutými políčkami.
Tlač Príručky
Môžete vybrať a vytlačiť dokumenty zaregistrované v Príručke.
Podrobnosti o Príručke nájdete v časti Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke .
1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť
Príručka (My Manual).
Názvy dokumentov zaregistrovaných v Príručke sa zobrazia v zozname Dokumenty na tlač
(Documents to Be Printed).
2. Vyberte dokumenty, ktoré chcete vytlačiť.
V zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed) začiarknite políčka vedľa názvov
dokumentov, ktoré chcete vytlačiť.
Poznámka
Ak chcete začiarknuť všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vybrať
všetky (Select All).
Ak chcete zrušiť začiarknutie všetkých políčok vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť
Vymazať všetky (Clear All).
Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad
výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu.
3. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup).
Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby
zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače.
4. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing).
Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač.
5. Spustite tlač.
Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes).
Vytlačia sa všetky dokumenty so začiarknutými políčkami.
Tlač všetkých dokumentov
Môžete vytlačiť všetky dokumenty príručky on-screen manual.
1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť Všetky
Tlač tejto príručky
Strana 99 z celkového počtu 684
dokumenty (All Documents).
Názvy všetkých dokumentov sa zobrazia v zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed) a
ich políčka sa automaticky začiarknu.
Poznámka
Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka vedľa názvu dokumentu, daný dokument sa nevytlačí.
Ak chcete začiarknuť všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vybrať
všetky (Select All).
Ak chcete zrušiť začiarknutie všetkých políčok vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť
Vymazať všetky (Clear All).
Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad
výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu.
2. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup).
Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby
zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače.
3. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing).
Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač.
4. Spustite tlač.
Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes).
Vytlačia sa všetky dokumenty.
Dôležité
Na vytlačenie všetkých dokumentov budete potrebovať veľké množstvo papiera. Pred tlačou
potvrďte počet strán určených na tlač zobrazený v dialógovom okne Počet strán na tlač –
potvrdenie (Print Page Count Confirmation).
V dialógovom okne Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete tlač zmenšiť podľa šírky papiera
alebo nastaviť pomer zväčšenia. Ak však z dôvodu nového pomeru zväčšenia tlačové údaje
presiahnu papier, časť dokumentu sa na papier nevytlačí.
Na začiatok strany
Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov
Strana 100 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov
Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov
Cieľový dokument môžete vyhľadať zadaním kľúčového slova.
Prehľadajú sa všetky dokumenty aktuálne zobrazenej príručky on-screen manual.
1. Kliknite na tlačidlo
.
Na ľavej strane príručky on-screen manual sa zobrazí tabla hľadania.
Poznámka
Kliknutím na tlačidlo
zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte tablu hľadania.
2. Zadajte kľúčové slovo.
Do poľa Kľúčové slovo (Keyword) zadajte kľúčové slovo pre položku, ktorú chcete skontrolovať.
Ak chcete zadať viac kľúčových slov, oddeľte ich medzerou.
Poznámka
Môžete zadať najviac 10 kľúčových slov alebo 255 znakov určených na vyhľadanie.
Nerozlišujú sa veľké a malé písmená.
Program dokáže vyhľadávať aj kľúčové slová, ktoré obsahujú medzery.
Ak chcete pohodlne a rýchlo vyhľadávať dokumenty, ktoré si chcete prečítať, zadávajte kľúčové
slová podľa nasledujúcich pokynov.
Ak sa chcete dozvedieť, ako pracuje funkcia, ktorú používate:
Zadajte názov ponuky zobrazený na ovládacom paneli zariadenia alebo v počítači (napríklad
kopírovanie s vymazaním rámu).
Ak chcete nájsť vysvetlenie postupu s konkrétnym účelom:
Zadajte funkciu a objekt, ktorý chcete vytlačiť (napríklad tlačiť kalendár).
3. Kliknite na položku Spustiť hľadanie (Start Searching).
Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov
Strana 101 z celkového počtu 684
Spustí sa vyhľadávanie a v zozname s výsledkami vyhľadávania sa zobrazia názvy dokumentov, ktoré
obsahujú kľúčové slovo.
Pri vyhľadávaní pomocou viacerých kľúčových slov sa výsledky vyhľadávania zobrazia nasledujúcim
spôsobom.
[Dokumenty s dokonalou zhodou] ([Documents Containing Perfect Match])
Dokumenty obsahujúce celý vyhľadávaný reťazec (vrátane medzier) presne v podobe, ako bol
zadaný (dokonalá zhoda).
[Dokumenty so všetkými kľúčovými slovami] ([Documents Containing All Keywords])
Dokumenty, ktoré obsahujú všetky zadané kľúčové slová.
[Dokumenty obsahujúce ľubovoľné kľúčové slovo] ([Documents Containing Any Keyword])
Dokumenty, ktoré obsahujú aspoň jedno zo zadaných kľúčových slov.
4. Zobrazte dokument, ktorý si chcete prečítať.
V zozname výsledkov vyhľadávania dvakrát kliknite na názov dokumentu, ktorý si chcete prečítať
(alebo ho vyberte a stlačte kláves Enter).
Keď sa zobrazia dokumenty zodpovedajúce tomuto názvu, nájdené kľúčové slová v týchto
dokumentoch sa zvýraznia.
Poznámka
Aj keď zadáte iné kľúčové slová a spustíte ďalšie vyhľadávania, história vyhľadávania sa zachová. Ak
napravo od poľa Kľúčové slovo
chcete históriu vyhľadávania vymazať, kliknite na tlačidlo
(Keyword) a po zobrazení vyberte položku Vymazať históriu (Clear History).
Na začiatok strany
Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke
Strana 102 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke
Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke
Ako dokumenty Príručky si zaregistrujte dokumenty, ktoré často čítate, aby ste ich mohli kedykoľvek
jednoducho vyhľadať.
1. Zobrazte dokument.
Zobrazte dokument, ktorý chcete pridať do Príručky.
2. Kliknite na tlačidlo
.
Na ľavej strane príručky on-screen manual sa zobrazí tabla Príručka (My Manual).
Poznámka
Kliknutím na tlačidlo
zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte tablu Príručka (My Manual).
3. Zaregistrujte dokument v Príručke.
Kliknite na tlačidlo Pridať (Add).
Názov aktuálne zobrazeného dokumentu sa pridá do zoznamu Zoznam Príručky (List of My Manual).
Poznámka
Dokumenty môžete do Príručky pridať aj nasledujúcimi spôsobmi. Ak dokument pridáte do
Príručky, na table s obsahom sa na ikone dokumentu zobrazí značka .
V zozname Naposledy zobrazené dokumenty (Recently Displayed Documents) dvakrát
kliknite na názov dokumentu, ktorý chcete pridať do Príručky (alebo vyberte požadovaný
dokument a stlačte kláves Enter), čím ho zobrazíte. Potom kliknite na tlačidlo Pridať (Add).
Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na názov dokumentu zobrazený na table s obsahom alebo
pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na okno s vysvetlením a v zobrazenej ponuke vyberte položku
Pridať do Príručky (Add to My Manual).
Na table s obsahom vyberte názov dokumentu, ktorý chcete pridať do Príručky, a potom v
pravej dolnej časti tably kliknite na tlačidlo Pridať do Príručky (Add to My Manual).
Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke
Strana 103 z celkového počtu 684
4. Zobrazte Príručku.
Keď dvakrát kliknete na názov dokumentu zobrazený v zozname Zoznam Príručky (List of My Manual)
(alebo dokument vyberiete a stlačíte kláves Enter), daný dokument sa zobrazí v okne s vysvetlením.
Poznámka
Ak chcete dokument odstrániť zo zoznamu Zoznam Príručky (List of My Manual), vyberte jeho
názov v zozname a kliknite na tlačidlo Vymazať (Delete) (alebo stlačte kláves Delete).
Na začiatok strany
Symboly použité v tomto dokumente
Strana 104 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Symboly použité v tomto dokumente
Symboly použité v tomto dokumente
Varovanie
Nedodržanie týchto pokynov môže spôsobiť smrť alebo vážne poranenie spôsobené nesprávnou
prevádzkou zariadenia. Tieto pokyny musíte dodržiavať kvôli bezpečnej prevádzke.
Upozornenie
Nedodržanie týchto pokynov môže spôsobiť poranenie alebo materiálne škody spôsobené nesprávnou
prevádzkou zariadenia. Tieto pokyny musíte dodržiavať kvôli bezpečnej prevádzke.
Dôležité
Pokyny obsahujúce dôležité informácie.
Tieto informácie si určite prečítajte.
Poznámka
Pokyny v podobe poznámok k obsluhe alebo dodatočné vysvetlenia.
Označuje pracovné postupy v systéme Windows.
Označuje pracovné postupy v počítačoch Macintosh.
Na začiatok strany
Ochranné známky
Strana 105 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Ochranné známky
Ochranné známky
„Microsoft“ je registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft Corporation.
„Windows“ je ochranná známka alebo registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft
Corporation v USA a iných krajinách.
„Windows Vista“ je ochranná známka alebo registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft
Corporation v USA a iných krajinách.
„Internet Explorer“ je ochranná známka alebo registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft
Corporation v USA a iných krajinách.
„Macintosh“ a „Mac“ sú ochranné známky spoločnosti Apple Inc., registrované v USA a iných
krajinách.
„Bonjour“ je ochranná známka spoločnosti Apple Inc., registrovaná v USA a iných krajinách.
„Adobe“, „Adobe Photoshop“, „Adobe RGB“ a „Adobe RGB (1998)“ sú registrované ochranné známky
alebo ochranné známky spoločnosti Adobe Systems Incorporated v USA a iných krajinách.
Exif Print
Toto zariadenie podporuje štandard Exif Print.
Exif Print je štandard na vylepšenie komunikácie medzi digitálnymi fotoaparátmi a tlačiarňami. Po
pripojení digitálneho fotoaparátu kompatibilného so štandardom Exif Print sa použijú a optimalizujú
obrazové údaje uložené vo fotoaparáte v čase snímania, výsledkom čoho sú výtlačky s veľmi vysokou
kvalitou.
Na začiatok strany
Tlač z počítača
Strana 106 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač z počítača
Tlač z počítača
Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Na začiatok strany
Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Strana 107 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač z počítača > Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Čo je program Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Tlač fotografií
Vytvorenie albumu
Tlač kalendárov
Tlač nálepiek
Rozloženie tlače
Oprava a zlepšenie fotografií
Otázky a odpovede
Nastavenia tlače fotografií
Ďalšie nastavenia
Na začiatok strany
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Strana 108 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > What Is Easy-PhotoPrint
EX?
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with
digital cameras.
You can also print borderless photos easily.
Important
Easy-PhotoPrint EX does not support Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT4.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers. It does not support some printers,
including Canon compact printers (SELPHY CP series).
If a printer that supports Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, you cannot print items you create.
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy-LayoutPrint installed, EasyLayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Note
Printing on paper larger than A4 is available with supported printers only. See your printer manual
for details.
See Help of Easy-PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX screens.
Click Help in a screen or dialog box, or select Easy-PhotoPrint EX Help... from the Help menu. Help
appears.
About Exif Print
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports "Exif Print." Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication
between digital cameras and printers.
By connecting to an Exif Print-compliant digital camera, the image data at the time of shooting is used
and optimized, yielding extremely high quality prints.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Strana 109 z celkového počtu 684
Easy-PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications.
See the application's manual for details on the procedure for starting.
The Photo Print function is available with the following applications:
MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later
ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.0 or later
Digital Photo Professional Ver.3.2 or later
Important
Easy-PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo
Professional:
- Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen.
- Images cannot be corrected/enhanced.
- Image display order cannot be changed.
- Edited images cannot be saved.
- Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on
the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. Therefore, you cannot use the Vivid Photo and
Photo Noise Reduction functions.
The Album function is available with the following applications:
MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later
ZoomBrowser EX Ver.5.8 or later
Supported Image File Formats (Extensions)
BMP (.bmp)
JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg)
TIFF (.tif, .tiff)
PICT (.pict, .pct)
Easy-PhotoPrint image files (.epp)
Important
When selecting an image, if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder, the image may not be
displayed correctly or Easy-PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format. In such
cases, move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different file format, and then
select the folder again.
Note
(Question Mark).
The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as
When Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional, all image files supported by
Digital Photo Professional will be displayed.
File Formats (Extensions) Supported by Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5)
Page top
Printing Photos
Strana 110 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos
Printing Photos
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts.
You can also create borderless photos easily.
Corrections suitable for photos will be applied automatically when printing.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting a Photo
3. Selecting the Paper
4. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing an Index
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing Photo Information
Saving Photos
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Printing Photos
Strana 111 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 112 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Starting
Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Strana 113 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Photo Print from Menu.
The Select Images screen appears.
Important
The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows:
- A black line appears along an edge of the image.
- An edge of the image appears cropped.
However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print
results will not be affected.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Important
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX, ZoomBrowser EX
or Digital Photo Professional), the folder tree area will not be displayed.
The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails.
3. Click the image you want to print.
The number of copies appears as "1" below the clicked image, while the selected image itself will
appear in the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
Selecting a Photo
Strana 114 z celkového počtu 684
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
To print two or more copies of an image, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
(Up arrow) until the number of copies you
want is reached. To reduce the number of copies shown in the box, click
(Down arrow).
You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen.
You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name.
Note
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Selecting the Paper
Strana 115 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos >
Selecting the Paper
Selecting the Paper
1. Click Select Paper.
The Select Paper screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Paper Source
Paper Size
Media Type
Note
The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer. See Help for details.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
Note
You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise.
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
See Help for details on the Select Paper screen.
Page top
Printing
Strana 116 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Printing
Printing
1. Click Layout/Print.
The Layout/Print screen appears.
Important
The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows:
- A black line appears along an edge of the image.
- An edge of the image appears cropped.
However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print
results will not be affected.
2. Select a layout you want to use.
Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer, paper size, and media
type.
3. Click Print.
Important
When you print on large size paper such as A3/A3+, some computers cannot print properly if you
print more than one page or copy at a time. It is recommended that you print page by page when
you print on such paper.
While printing on paper larger than A4 or printing high-resolution images, data may be printed only
to the middle if many images are printed at one time. In such cases, select the Spool print job page
by page checkbox in the Preferences dialog box, and then print again.
Printing
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
Strana 117 z celkového počtu 684
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings.
It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again.
Saving Photos
When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may
become wider than the other.
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Note
You can crop images or print dates on photos.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
You can specify advanced Photo Print settings (number of copies, print quality, etc.) in the
Preferences dialog box.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
See Help for details on the Layout/Print screen.
Page top
Creating an Album
Strana 118 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album
Creating an Album
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
Creating an Album
Strana 119 z celkového počtu 684
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 120 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Strana 121 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Album from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Cover
Double page album
Page number
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the
Cover Options dialog box. To display the Cover Options dialog box, select Front or Front & Back
for Cover and click Options....
Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout (consisting of twopage master). In a double-page album, you can arrange an image across the left and right
pages.
You can customize the page numbers (position, font size, etc.) in the Page Number Settings
dialog box. To display the Page Number Settings dialog box, select the Page number checkbox
and click Settings....
You can customize the margins of the front cover, inside pages and back cover in the Margin
Settings dialog box. To display the Margin Settings dialog box, click Margins....
3. Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout.
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Strana 122 z celkového počtu 684
4. If you want to change the layout, click Layout....
The Change Layout dialog box appears.
In the Change Layout dialog box, you can change the layout or select whether to print the date (on
which the picture was taken) on the photo.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, Double
page album, or the type of page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout
dialog box and click Date Settings....
5. If you want to change the background, click Background....
The Change Background dialog box appears.
In the Change Background dialog box, you can paint the background in a single color or paste an
image file to it.
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Strana 123 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Important
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser
EX), the folder tree area will not be displayed.
The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails.
3. Select the image(s) you want to print, and click one of the buttons below.
To print on the front cover, click
To print on the inside pages, click
To print on the back cover, click
(Import to Front Cover).
(Import to Inside Pages).
(Import to Back Cover).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
Selecting a Photo
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
Strana 124 z celkového počtu 684
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Strana 125 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit your album if necessary.
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
album. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows:
C1: Front cover
C2: Inside the front cover
C3: Inside the back cover
Editing
Strana 126 z celkového počtu 684
C4: Back cover
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Strana 127 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos.
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
Printing
Strana 128 z celkového počtu 684
3. Click Print.
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Printing Calendars
Strana 129 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars
Printing Calendars
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Setting Calendar Display
Setting Holidays
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Printing Calendars
Strana 130 z celkového počtu 684
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 131 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Strana 132 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Calendar from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Start from
Period
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can add holidays to your calendar.
Setting Holidays
3. Select a layout for Design.
If necessary, make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background.
Note
You can customize the calendar display (font colors of the dates and days of the week, position
and size of the calendar, etc.).
Setting Calendar Display
You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change
Background dialog box. To display the Change Background dialog box, click Background....
Note
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Strana 133 z celkového počtu 684
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Strana 134 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Strana 135 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the calendar if necessary.
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Setting Calendar Display
Setting Holidays
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
calendar. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
Editing
Strana 136 z celkového počtu 684
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Strana 137 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
3. Click Print.
Printing
Strana 138 z celkového počtu 684
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Printing Stickers
Strana 139 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers
Printing Stickers
You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 140 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Strana 141 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Stickers from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Print date
Use the same image in all frames
Note
Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected.
Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the
frames on the page.
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings....
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Strana 142 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Strana 143 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the stickers if necessary.
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
stickers. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Strana 144 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box. To display the Adjust
Print Position dialog box, click Print Position....
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
3. Click Print.
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing
Strana 145 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Printing Layout
Strana 146 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout
Printing Layout
You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Changing Layout
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 147 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Starting
Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Strana 148 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Layout Print from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Print date
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings....
3. Select a layout from Layouts.
Note
The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation.
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Strana 149 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Strana 150 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the layout if necessary.
Changing Layout
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout.
It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Strana 151 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos.
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
3. Click Print.
Printing
Strana 152 z celkového počtu 684
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Strana 153 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
You can correct and enhance images.
Click
(Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of
Photo Print. You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct/Enhance Images
window.
Important
For Photo Print, if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box,
you cannot correct/enhance images.
Note
See "Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Auto Photo Fix
This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Red-Eye Correction Function
You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Face Brightener Function
You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background.
Using the Face Brightener Function
Face Sharpener Function
You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Digital Face Smoothing Function
You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Blemish Remover Function
You can remove moles.
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Image Adjustment
You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image.
You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Strana 154 z celkového počtu 684
Adjusting Images
Page top
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Strana 155 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Apply optimum corrections automatically to the photos used for an album, calendar, etc.
Important
The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to automatically
apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing, by selecting Auto Photo Fix in Color correction
for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog
box, click
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select Preferences... from the File menu.
Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto
Photo Fix.
Also, Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital camera,
etc. manufactured by other companies.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
Images).
(Correct/Enhance
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Strana 156 z celkového počtu 684
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
4. Click Auto Photo Fix, then click OK.
The entire photo is corrected automatically and the
the upper left of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings
made at the time of shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
6. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Strana 157 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash.
You can perform the Red-Eye Correction function either automatically or manually.
Note
Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing. To correct automatically,
select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences
dialog box and select the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Strana 158 z celkového počtu 684
Auto Correction
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
4. Click Red-Eye Correction.
5. Click OK.
Red eyes are corrected and the
the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of
Important
Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image.
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Correction
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Red-Eye Correction.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red-Eye Correction.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Paintbrush).
5. Drag to select the red area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Red eye is corrected and the
Strana 159 z celkového počtu 684
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the
image.
Note
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Face Brightener Function
Strana 160 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Brightener Function
Using the Face Brightener Function
You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background.
Note
You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo
Fix.
If the correction had not been made sufficiently, applying Face Brightener function is recommended.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
Images).
(Correct/Enhance
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
Using the Face Brightener Function
Strana 161 z celkového počtu 684
4. Click Face Brightener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter, and
the
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Strana 162 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Sharpener Function
Using the Face Sharpener Function
You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo.
You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
Images).
(Correct/Enhance
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
Auto Correction
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Strana 163 z celkového počtu 684
4. Click Face Sharpener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener.
5. Click OK.
The face is sharpened and the
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the
image.
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Correction
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Face Sharpener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the
Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Strana 164 z celkového počtu 684
(Correction/
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Strana 165 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
Images).
(Correct/Enhance
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
Auto Enhancement
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Strana 166 z celkového počtu 684
4. Click Digital Face Smoothing.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing.
5. Click OK.
Skin is enhanced beautifully and the
of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so
Click
that you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation.
If you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Enhancement
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Digital Face Smoothing.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the
mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Strana 167 z celkového počtu 684
(Correction/Enhancement)
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for enhanced images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images.
Page top
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Strana 168 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Blemish Remover Function
Using the Blemish Remover Function
You can remove moles.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
Images).
(Correct/Enhance
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Blemish Remover.
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Strana 169 z celkového počtu 684
Note
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Moles in and around the selected area are removed and the
appears on the upper left of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark
Note
Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for enhanced images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images.
Page top
Adjusting Images
Strana 170 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Adjusting Images
Adjusting Images
You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
Images).
(Correct/Enhance
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to adjust from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Adjust.
4. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level.
The following adjustments are available:
Brightness
Contrast
Adjusting Images
Strana 171 z celkového počtu 684
Sharpness
Blur
Show-through Removal
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments.
5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save adjusted images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for adjusted images.
6. Click Exit.
Important
The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 172 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Correct/Enhance Images Window
Correct/Enhance Images Window
You can correct/enhance images in this window.
To display the Correct/Enhance Images window, click
(Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select
Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print.
(1)Toolbar
Toolbar
(Zoom In/Zoom Out)
Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the page.
(Full Screen)
Displays the entire image in Preview.
(Compare)
Displays the Compare Images window. You can compare the images before and after the correction/
enhancement side by side.
The image before the correction/enhancement is displayed on the left, and the image after the
correction/enhancement is displayed on the right.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 173 z celkového počtu 684
(2)Task Area
Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs.
Click Auto or Manual to display the corresponding tab.
Auto Tab
Select to correct automatically.
Auto Photo Fix
Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos.
Important
The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to
automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing. Select this option in Color
correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the
Preferences dialog box, click
from the File menu.
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select Preferences...
Prioritize Exif Info
Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 174 z celkového počtu 684
shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note
Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images
(JPEG).
For Photo Print, you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically
by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox.
Red-Eye Correction
Corrects red eyes.
Note
For Photo Print, you can also correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color
correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the
Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox.
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Apply to all images
Automatically corrects all the images displayed in the list.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list.
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Manual Tab
Select to correct manually.
Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image.
Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas.
Adjust
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 175 z celkového počtu 684
Brightness
Adjusts the overall image brightness.
Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast.
Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Sharpness
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the photo
is out of focus or text is blurred.
Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image.
Blur
Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image.
Move the slider to the right to soften the image.
Show-through Removal
Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document
from appearing on the image.
Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect.
Defaults
Resets each adjustment (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal).
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the selected image in the list that applied adjustments.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the images that applied adjustments displayed in the list.
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correct/Enhance
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 176 z celkového počtu 684
Red-Eye Correction
Corrects red eyes.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the
slider.
Note
For Photo Print, red eyes are automatically corrected when Enable Auto Photo Fix is selected in
Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and the Enable
Red-Eye Correction checkbox is selected. To disable the automatic correction, deselect the
checkbox.
Face Brightener
Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the
slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the
slider.
Blemish Remover
Removes moles.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the specified area.
Undo
Cancels the latest correction/enhancement.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 177 z celkového počtu 684
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Page top
Questions and Answers
Strana 178 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Page top
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Strana 179 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
If you want to move (or copy) a file created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another,
you need to move (or copy) the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as
well.
For example, when you save a file named "MyAlbum.el1," a folder named "MyAlbum.el1.Data" is
automatically created in the same folder that contains the "MyAlbum.el1" file. If you want to move (or copy)
the "MyAlbum.el1" file to another folder, move (or copy) the "MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder as well. The
"MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder contains the photos used in the album.
Note
The icons may vary depending on the items.
Important
Do not change the Data folder name; otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited
with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Page top
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
Strana 180 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start
from?
As shown below, printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout/Print screen.
Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates.
See your printer manual for details on how to load paper (to print on the front/back, etc.).
Page top
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Strana 181 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> How Do I Print with Even Margins?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become
wider than the other, depending on the image and printer.
To always print with even margins, select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins
checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
Preferences... from the File menu.
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select
Crop the photo to apply even margins individually.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Note
This setting is available for Photo Print only.
Page top
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Strana 182 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> What Is "C1" or "C4"?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
When an album is printed, labels such as "C1" and "C4" are printed as page numbers.
The "C1" and "C4" represent the front cover and back cover, respectively.
C1: Front cover
C2: Inside the front cover
C3: Inside the back cover
C4: Back cover
Page top
Photo Print Settings
Strana 183 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings
Photo Print Settings
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing an Index
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing Photo Information
Saving Photos
Opening Saved Files
Page top
Printing Vivid Photos
Strana 184 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Vivid Photos
Printing Vivid Photos
Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing.
Important
This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo.
This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox, this effect applies only to the print result. The original
image or preview image will not be affected.
Page top
Reducing Photo Noise
Strana 185 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Reducing Photo Noise
Reducing Photo Noise
When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera, noise may appear in
the image.
Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and
make the printed photos more vivid.
Important
This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
When the noise is severe, change Normal to Strong.
The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result. The original image or preview image will
not be affected.
Page top
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Strana 186 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the
necessary portions.
Click
(Crop Image) in the Layout/Print screen or double-click the preview image.
Move the white frame to the portion to print and click OK.
Note
To move the cropping area, place the cursor within the white frame and drag it. Drag the white lines
to enlarge/reduce the cropping area.
Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines. To create a balanced
composition, drag any of the intersecting points (white squares) or white broken lines over the main
subject of the photo.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Strana 187 z celkového počtu 684
The cropping effect applies only to the print result. The original image will not be cropped.
See Help for details on the Crop window.
Page top
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Strana 188 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
To print the date the photo was taken on the photo, click
(Date Settings) in the Layout/Print screen,
then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box.
Note
The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system.
See Help for details on setting dates.
Page top
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Strana 189 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple-photo layout in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type.
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: Borderless (x4)
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
Page top
Printing an Index
Strana 190 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing an Index
Printing an Index
You can print an index of selected photos. An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one
page. It is convenient for managing your photos.
To print an index, select Index from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Important
Index print will be disabled if you select any of the following paper sizes.
- Credit Card
You can print up to 80 images on one page.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: Index (x20)
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
menu.
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
Printing an Index
Strana 191 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Strana 192 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
You can print a variety of ID photos.
Important
The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use.
For details, contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo.
To print ID photos, select 4"x6" 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select a layout of
the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: ID Photo 3.5x4.5cm
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
ID photos can only be printed on 4"x6" 10x15cm paper.
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Strana 193 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Printing Photo Information
Strana 194 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Photo Information
Printing Photo Information
You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side.
To print them, select Letter 8.5"x11" or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select Captured
Info from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8.5"x11" and A4.
Page top
Saving Photos
Strana 195 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Saving Photos
Saving Photos
You can save edited photos. The information of cropping and layout can be saved.
Click Save in the Layout/Print screen.
When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Important
If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu
and save.
Note
Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen.
Page top
Opening Saved Files
Strana 196 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Opening Saved Files
Opening Saved Files
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
1. Click Library from Menu.
The Open dialog box appears.
You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows Vista)
or thumbnail view.
Important
When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP, the contents of files cannot be
displayed on Explorer.
2. Select the file you want to open and click Open.
The Layout/Print screen appears.
Note
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format (extension).
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6)
3. Edit the file if necessary.
Note
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from
Library in Menu.
- Double-click or click the file.
- From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit.
Opening Saved Files
Strana 197 z celkového počtu 684
You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
Page top
Other Settings
Strana 198 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings
Other Settings
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Setting Holidays
Setting Calendar Display
Opening Saved Files
Page top
Changing Layout
Strana 199 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Layout
Changing Layout
You can change the layout of each page separately.
Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen, then click
(Change Layout).
Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK.
Album
Important
If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will
happen:
: Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames
If the number of layout
in the new layout.
frames is increased
: Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the
If the number of layout
pages with the current layout can be fitted.
frames is decreased
If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames, any
image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted, starting with the last image that was added
to the former layout page.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, or the type of
page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly
selected.
Calendar
Changing Layout
Strana 200 z celkového počtu 684
Important
The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout.
All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Layout Print
Important
If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will
happen:
: Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames
If the number of layout
in the new layout.
frames is increased
If the number of layout
frames is decreased
: Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the
pages with the current layout can be fitted.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly
selected.
Page top
Changing Background
Strana 201 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Background
Changing Background
You can change the background of each page.
Important
You cannot change the background of the Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Click Background... in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in
the Edit screen, then click
(Change Background).
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box.
When Select from samples is Selected
Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK.
Note
Select from samples will be displayed only if Album has been selected.
Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in the application.
Changing Background
Strana 202 z celkového počtu 684
Click Search backgrounds... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional
materials for free.
Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply.
This function may not be available in some regions.
Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds.
When Single color is Selected
Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK.
When Image file is Selected
Set Image File Path and Image Layout, then click OK.
Changing Background
Strana 203 z celkového počtu 684
Note
See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box.
Page top
Adding Photos
Strana 204 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding
Photos
Adding Photos
You can add images to pages.
Select the page you want to add photos in the Edit screen, then click
(Add Image).
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add
Image dialog box, and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right.
Note
Click an image to select it (background turns blue) or deselect it (background turns white). You can
also select multiple images.
Select an option for Add to and click OK.
Important
You can add up to 20 images at one time to a single page.
Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined.
You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time. Add it one at a time.
When the number of pages increases due to added images, you cannot add images beyond page
400.
Note
In the Add Image dialog box, you can select all images at one time or change the display size and
order of the thumbnails. See Help for details.
Page top
Swapping Positions of Photos
Strana 205 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Swapping Positions of Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
You can swap the positions of images.
Click
(Swap Image Positions) in the Edit screen.
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the target and source images you want to swap, then click Swap.
When you finish swapping all images you want to swap, click Back to Edit.
Page top
Replacing Photos
Strana 206 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Replacing Photos
Replacing Photos
You can replace an image with another image.
Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen, then click
(Replace Selected Image).
Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the
Replace Image dialog box.
Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click
OK.
If you want to select from the images already imported, click the Imported Images tab and select the
image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK.
Important
You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box.
Note
If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function, all the images
selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog
box.
When images are replaced, the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image.
- Position
- Size
- Frame
- Position and size of the date
The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited.
In the Replace Image dialog box, you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails. See
Help for details.
Page top
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Strana 207 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
You can adjust the position, angle and size of images.
Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click
Image) or double-click the image.
(Edit
Set the Center Position, Rotation and Size, then click OK.
Note
You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen.
Select an image in the Edit screen, then click
(Free Rotate) and drag a corner of the image to
rotate it.
See Help for details on the position and size of images.
Page top
Cropping Photos
Strana 208 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Cropping Photos
Cropping Photos
Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the
necessary portions.
Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click
image.
(Edit Image) or double-click the
Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Drag the white squares on the image to change the area to be cropped and click OK.
Note
See Help for details on cropping.
Page top
Framing Photos
Strana 209 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Framing
Photos
Framing Photos
You can add frames to images.
Important
You cannot add frames to images in Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click
image.
(Edit Image) or double-click the
Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK.
Important
You cannot print dates on framed photos.
Note
Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images on a
Framing Photos
Strana 210 z celkového počtu 684
selected page at one time.
Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application.
Click Search frames... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional
materials for free.
Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply.
This function may not be available in some regions.
Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing frames.
Search frames... will be displayed only if Album has been selected.
See Help for details on frames.
Page top
Printing Dates on Photos
Strana 211 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Printing
Dates on Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
You can print dates on images.
Select the image you want to print the date in the Edit screen and click
the image.
(Edit Image) or double-click
Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Select the Show date checkbox.
Set the Text Orientation, Position, Font Size and Color, then click OK.
Important
You cannot print dates on framed images.
Note
The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system.
See Help for details on setting dates.
Printing Dates on Photos
Strana 212 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Attaching Comments to Photos
Strana 213 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Attaching Comments to Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
You can attach comments to images and display them in your album. The photo name, shooting date
and comments are displayed (from top to bottom) in a comment box.
Important
You cannot attach comments to Photo Print, Calendar, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click
double-click the image.
Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
(Edit Image) or
Attaching Comments to Photos
Strana 214 z celkového počtu 684
Select the Show comment box checkbox.
Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display, and enter comments.
Set the size and color of font, and position of the comments, etc., then click OK.
Note
See Help for details on comments.
Page top
Adding Text to Photos
Strana 215 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding
Text to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
You can add text to photos.
Click
(Add Text) in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text.
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text.
Note
In the Edit Text Box dialog box, you can change the position, angle and size of the text. You can also
set the color and line of the text box. See Help for details.
To change the entered text, select it and click
appears. You can change the text.
(Edit Text Box). The Edit Text Box dialog box
Page top
Saving
Strana 216 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Saving
Saving
You can save edited items.
Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen.
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Important
If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu
and save.
Note
Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen.
Page top
Setting Holidays
Strana 217 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting
Holidays
Setting Holidays
You can add holidays to your calendar.
(Setup Period/Holiday) in the
Click Set Holidays... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or click
Edit screen and click Set Holidays... in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday
Settings dialog box.
To add a holiday, click Add.... The Add/Edit Holiday dialog box appears. To edit a saved holiday, select it
and click Edit....
To delete a holiday, select it and click Delete. To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar
period, click Clear.
Setting Holidays
Strana 218 z celkového počtu 684
Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date.
Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar.
Note
See Help for details on each dialog box.
Page top
Setting Calendar Display
Strana 219 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting
Calendar Display
Setting Calendar Display
You can customize the calendar display (fonts, lines, colors, position, size, etc.).
Click Settings... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click
(Setup Calendar) to display the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Important
The Position & Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from
the Edit screen.
Note
See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Page top
Opening Saved Files
Strana 220 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Opening
Saved Files
Opening Saved Files
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
1. Click Library from Menu.
The Open dialog box appears.
You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows Vista)
or thumbnail view.
Important
When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP, the contents of files cannot be
displayed on Explorer.
2. Select the file you want to open and click Open.
The Edit screen appears.
Note
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats (extensions).
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5)
3. Edit the file if necessary.
Note
See the following sections for details on the editing procedures.
Opening Saved Files
Strana 221 z celkového počtu 684
Editing Album
Editing Calendar
Editing Stickers
Editing Layout Print
Note
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from
Library in Menu.
- Double-click or click the file.
- From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit.
You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
Page top
Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Strana 222 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač z počítača > Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Rôzne spôsoby tlače
Zmena kvality tlače a korekcia obrazových údajov
Prehľad ovládača tlačiarne
Na začiatok strany
Various Printing Methods
Strana 223 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods
Various Printing Methods
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Setting the Stapling Margin
Borderless Printing
Fit-to-Page Printing
Scaled Printing
Page Layout Printing
Poster Printing
Booklet Printing
Duplex Printing
Stamp/Background Printing
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Printing an Envelope
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Page top
Printing with Easy Setup
Strana 224 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Printing with Easy Setup
Printing with Easy Setup
The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this machine, is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select a frequently used profile
In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose.
When you select a printing profile, the Additional Features, Media Type, and Printer Paper Size
settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset.
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose.
Important
When you check the Always Print with Current Settings check box, all settings on the Quick Setup,
Main, Page Setup, and Effects tabs are saved, and you can print with the same settings from the
next time as well.
Click Save... to register the specified settings. For instructions on registering settings, see "
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile."
Page top
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Strana 225 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application. When the page size and
orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the
application, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.
When you are not able to specify them with the application, the procedure for selecting a page size and
orientation is as follows:
You can also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the paper size
Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Set Orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation. Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to
perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation.
Page top
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Strana 226 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Default Setting
Print from Last Page
Collate
Print from Last Page + Collate
The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows:
You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Specify the number of copies to be printed
For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed.
3. Specify the print order
Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order. When
you do this, you do not need to sort pages into their correct order after printing.
4. Set up collated printing when you specify multiple copies in the Copies box
Check the Collate check box when you are specifying multiple copy together.
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Strana 227 z celkového počtu 684
Uncheck this check box to print all pages with the same page number together.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order.
Important
When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give
priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the
function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the
printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be
multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected
for Page Layout.
Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page
Layout.
Note
By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate, you can perform printing so that papers are
collated one by one starting from the last page.
These settings can be used in combination with Borderless, Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled,
Page Layout, and Duplex Printing.
Page top
Setting the Stapling Margin
Strana 228 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting the Stapling Margin
Setting the Stapling Margin
The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Specify the side to be stapled
Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab.
The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
staple position. When you want to change the setting, select from the list.
3. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
Setting the Stapling Margin
Strana 229 z celkového počtu 684
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width.
Important
Staple Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when:
Borderless, Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout.
Scaled is selected for Page Layout (When Duplex Printing is also selected, only Staple Side is
selectable).
Page top
Borderless Printing
Strana 230 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing
The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that
it extends slightly off the paper. Without the borderless printing function, a margin is provided around the
printed data. When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it, select
borderless printing.
The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows:
You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
Setting Borderless Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set borderless printing
Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
When a message prompting you to change the media type appears, select a media type from the
list and click OK.
3. Check the paper size
Borderless Printing
Strana 231 z celkového počtu 684
Check the Page Size list. When you want to change, select another page size from the list. The list
displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing.
4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper
If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider.
Moving the slider to the right makes the amount larger and moving the slider to the left makes the
amount smaller.
It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases.
Important
When you set the slider at the rightmost position, the back side of the paper may become
smudged.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The data will be printed without any margins on the paper.
Important
When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected, the size is automatically
changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing.
When High Resolution Paper, T-Shirt Transfers, or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on
the Main tab, you cannot perform borderless printing.
When Borderless is selected, the Printer Paper Size, Staple Side (when Duplex Printing is not
selected) settings, and the Stamp/Background... button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out
and are unavailable.
Print quality may deteriorate or the sheet may be stained at the top and bottom depending on the
type of the media used.
When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data, a portion of the image may not
be printed depending on the size of the media used.
In this case, crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size.
Note
When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab, borderless printing is not
recommended, and therefore the dialog box for media selection appears.
When you are using plain paper for test printing, select Plain Paper, and click OK.
Expanding the Range of the Document to Print
Specifying a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems.
However, the portion of the document that extends off the paper range will not be printed. Subjects
around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed.
Try borderless printing once. If you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing, reduce the
amount of extension. The extension amount becomes shorter as the Amount of Extension slider is
moved to the left.
Important
When the amount of extension is shortened, an unexpected margin may be produced on the print,
depending on the size of the paper.
Note
When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position, image data will be printed in the
full size.
When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm before printing whether
there will be no border.
Borderless Printing
Strana 232 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Fit-to-Page Printing
Strana 233 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Fitto-Page Printing
Fit-to-Page Printing
The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be
used is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set fit-to-page printing
Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the paper size for the data
Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application.
4. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When
the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
Fit-to-Page Printing
Strana 234 z celkového počtu 684
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.
Page top
Scaled Printing
Strana 235 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Scaled Printing
Scaled Printing
The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set scaled printing
Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the paper size for the data
Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application.
4. Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods:
Select a Printer Paper Size
When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced.
When the printer paper size is larger than the page size, the page image will be enlarged.
Scaled Printing
Strana 236 z celkového počtu 684
Specify a scaling factor
Directly type in a value into the Scaling box.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale.
Important
When the application software with which you created the original has the scaled printing function,
configure the settings on your application software. You do not need to configure the same setting
in the printer driver.
When Scaled is selected, the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable (when
Duplex Printing is not selected).
Note
Scaled Printing
Strana 237 z celkového počtu 684
Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
Page top
Page Layout Printing
Strana 238 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Page Layout Printing
Page Layout Printing
The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of
paper.
The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set page layout printing
Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete.
4. Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and
click OK.
Page Layout Printing
Strana 239 z celkového počtu 684
Pages
To increase the number of pages to be included on a single sheet of paper, select a desired
number of pages from the list.
You can also set 2-Page Print or 4-Page Print on the Quick Setup tab.
Page Order
To change the page arrangement order, select an icon from the list to change the page placement
order.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check this check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in
the specified order.
Page top
Poster Printing
Strana 240 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Poster Printing
Poster Printing
The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print
these pages on separate sheets of paper. When the pages are pasted together, they form a large print
like a poster.
The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows:
Setting Poster Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set poster printing
Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
Setting 2 by 2-page poster printing is complete.
Poster Printing
Strana 241 z celkového počtu 684
4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box, and then
click OK.
Image Divisions
Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the
number of sheets used for printing increases, allowing you to create a larger poster.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.
Important
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins
To leave out cut lines, uncheck this check box.
Pages
To reprint only specific pages, enter the page number you want to print. To print multiple pages,
specify by separating the pages with commas or entering a hyphen between the page numbers.
Note
You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be divided into several pages during printing.
After all poster pages have been printed, paste the pages together to create a poster.
Printing Only Specific Pages
If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing, you can reprint specific pages by following the procedure
below:
1. Set the print range
In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab, click the pages that do not need to be
printed.
The pages that were clicked are deleted, and only the pages to be printed are displayed.
Poster Printing
Strana 242 z celkového počtu 684
Note
Click the deleted pages to display them again.
Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages.
2. Complete the setup
After completing the page selection, click OK.
When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed.
Important
When Poster is selected, the Duplex Printing, Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed
out and are unavailable.
Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse.
Page top
Booklet Printing
Strana 243 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Booklet Printing
Booklet Printing
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the
paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the
printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set booklet printing
Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
4. Set the margin for stapling and the margin width
Click Specify... and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box, and then click
OK.
Booklet Printing
Strana 244 z celkového počtu 684
Margin for stapling
Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed.
Insert blank page
To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank.
Margin
Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width
for one page.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check the check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper. When the
printing of one side is complete, set the paper correctly by following the message and click OK.
When the printing of the other side is complete, fold the paper at the center of the margin and make
a booklet.
Important
Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type.
When Booklet is selected, Duplex Printing, Staple Side, Print from Last Page, and Collate appear
grayed out and are unavailable.
Note
The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page
function of Booklet Printing.
Page top
Duplex Printing
Strana 245 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Duplex Printing
Duplex Printing
The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows:
You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set duplex printing
Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the layout
Select Normal-size (or Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout) from the Page Layout list.
4. Specify the side to be stapled
The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
Staple Side. When you want to change the setting, select another value from the list.
5. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
6. Complete the setup
Duplex Printing
Strana 246 z celkového počtu 684
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper. When the
printing of one side is complete, load the paper correctly by following the message and click OK.
The document will be printed on the opposite side.
Important
Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable when:
A media type other than Plain Paper is selected from the Media Type list.
Poster is selected from the Page Layout list.
When Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list, Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed
out and are unavailable.
Note
When you select borderless printing during duplex printing, a dialog box for media type selection
may appear. If that happens, select Plain Paper.
If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing, perform Bottom Plate
Cleaning in the Maintenance tab.
Page top
Stamp/Background Printing
Strana 247 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing
Stamp/Background Printing
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also
allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light
illustration behind the document data.
The procedure for performing stamp/background printing is as follows:
Printing a Stamp
"CONFIDENTIAL," "IMPORTANT," and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre-registered.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Select a stamp
Check the Stamp check box, and select a desired stamp from the list.
Stamp/Background Printing
Strana 248 z celkového počtu 684
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.
4. Set the stamp details
If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK.
Place stamp over text
To print the stamp on the front of the document, check this check box.
Note
The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the
sections where the stamp and the document data overlap. When this check box is unchecked,
the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections
depending on the application used.
Stamp first page only
To print the stamp only on the first page, check this check box.
Define Stamp... button
To change the stamp text, bitmap, or position, click this (refer to Registering a Stamp ).
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified stamp.
Printing a Background
Two bitmap files are pre-registered as samples.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Select the background
Check the Background check box, and select a desired background from the list.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.
4. Set the background details
If necessary, complete the following settings, and then click OK.
Background first page only
To print the background only on the first page, check this check box.
Select Background... button
To use another background or change the layout or density of a background, click this (refer to
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background ).
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background.
Important
When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... button appears grayed out and is
unavailable.
Note
The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page
Stamp/Background Printing
Strana 249 z celkového počtu 684
function of Booklet Printing.
Related Topics
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Page top
Registering a Stamp
Strana 250 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing > Registering a Stamp
Registering a Stamp
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and register some of the settings of an
existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time.
The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows:
Registering a New Stamp
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Click Define Stamp...
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
Registering a Stamp
Strana 251 z celkového počtu 684
4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window
Stamp tab
Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type.
For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary,
change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the
stamp by clicking Select Color....
For Bitmap, click Select File... and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used. If necessary,
change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area.
For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are
displayed in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the settings of TrueType Font, Style, Size, and
Outline. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color....
Important
Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date/Time/User Name is selected.
Placement tab
Select the stamp position from the Position list. You can also select Custom from the Position
list and specify coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window.
To change the stamp position angle, type a value in the Orientation box directly.
5. Save the stamp
Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
6. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Stamp list.
Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings
1. Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed
Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box, and then select the title of the
stamp to be changed from the Stamp list.
Registering a Stamp
Strana 252 z celkového počtu 684
2. Click Define Stamp...
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window
4. Overwrite save the stamp
Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab.
When you want to save the stamp with a different title, type a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Stamp list.
Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp
1. Click Define Stamp... in the Stamp/Background dialog box
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select the stamp to be deleted
Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab. Then
click Delete.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
Page top
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Strana 253 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing > Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background. You can also change and
register some of the settings of an existing background. An unnecessary background can be deleted at
any time.
The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows:
Registering New Background
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Click Select Background...
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Strana 254 z celkového počtu 684
4. Select the image data to be registered to the background
Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open.
5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window
Layout Method
Select how the background image data is to be placed.
When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window.
Intensity
Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider. To lighten the background,
move the slider to the left. To darken the background, move the slider to the right. To print the
background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position.
6. Save the background
Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Background list.
Changing and Registering Some Background Settings
1. Select the background for which the settings are to be changed
Check the Background check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box, and then select the title of
the background you want to change from the Background list.
2. Click Select Background...
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
3. Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window.
4. Save the background
Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the background with a different
title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Strana 255 z celkového počtu 684
5. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Background list.
Deleting an Unnecessary Background
1. Click Select Background... in the Stamp/Background dialog box
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select the background to be deleted
Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings
tab, and then click Delete.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
Page top
Printing an Envelope
Strana 256 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Printing an Envelope
Printing an Envelope
For details on how to load an envelope into the machine, refer to "Loading Paper in the Rear Tray" in the
manual: Basic Guide.
The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows:
1. Fold down the paper support
2. Load an envelope into the machine
Fold down the envelope flap.
Orient the envelope so that the flap is on the left and the folded surface is facing down, and load in
the rear tray.
3. Open the printer driver setup window
4. Select the media type
Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
Printing an Envelope
Strana 257 z celkového počtu 684
5. Select the paper size
Select Youkei 4, Youkei 6, Comm.Env. #10, or DL Env. in the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, and
then click OK.
6. Set the orientation
To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation.
7. Select the print quality
Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
8. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope.
Page top
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Strana 258 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
You can display and check the print result before printing.
The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows:
You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the preview
Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The Canon IJ Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing.
Related Topic
Canon IJ Preview
Page top
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Strana 259 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such
a paper size is called a custom size.
The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows:
You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Set the custom size in the application software
On your application's paper size feature, specify the custom size.
Important
When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the
height and width values, use the application software to set the values. When the application
software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly, use the
printer driver to set the values.
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Select the paper size
Select Custom... for Page Size on the Page Setup tab.
The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Strana 260 z celkového počtu 684
4. Set the custom paper size
Specify Units, and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used. Then click OK.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified paper size.
Page top
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Strana 261 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Simulating an Illustration
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Reducing Photo Noise
Page top
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning... Strana 262 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a
Halftoning Method
You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning
method.
The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the print quality
Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab, and click Set....
The Custom dialog box opens.
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning... Strana 263 z celkového počtu 684
3. Setting the print quality and halftone expression method
Move the Quality slider to select the quality level.
Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK.
Note
Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color.
The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones.
Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones. Diffusion places the
dots randomly to express the halftones. When you select Auto, the data is printed with the
optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified quality level and halftoning method.
Important
Certain print quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of
Media Type.
Note
When the part of the object is not printed, selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem.
Related Topics
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Strana 264 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows:
You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set grayscale printing
Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document is converted to grayscale data. It allows you to print the color
document in monochrome.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked, the printer driver processes image data as
sRGB data. In this case, actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data.
When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data, convert the data to sRGB data
using an application software.
Note
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Strana 265 z celkového počtu 684
During Grayscale Printing, color inks may be used as well as black ink.
Page top
Specifying Color Correction
Strana 266 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction
Specifying Color Correction
You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed.
Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed
with color tints that most people prefer. This method is suitable for printing sRGB data.
When you want to print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively,
select ICM. When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile, select None.
The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows:
You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following,
and click OK.
Specifying Color Correction
Strana 267 z celkového počtu 684
Driver Matching
By using Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
Driver Matching is the default setting for Color Correction.
ICM
You can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively.
None
The printer driver does not perform color correction. Select this value when you are specifying an
individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for special Canon paper in an
application software to print data.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified color correction method.
Important
When ICM is disabled in the application software, ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the
printer may not be able to print the image data properly.
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Color Correction appears
grayed out and is unavailable.
Related Topics
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Page top
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Strana 268 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones
differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor.
To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones, you must select a printing
method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose.
Color Management
Devices such as digital cameras, scanners, monitors, and printers handle color differently. Color
management (color matching) is a method that manages device-dependent "colors" as a common color
space. For Windows, a color management system called "ICM" is built into the operating system.
Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces. Adobe RGB has a wider color
space than sRGB.
ICC profiles convert device-dependent "colors" into a common color space. By using an ICC profile and
carrying out color management, you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color
reproduction area that the printer can express.
Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data
The recommended printing method depends on the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image
data or the application software to be used. There are two typical printing methods. Check the color
space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data and the application software to be used, and then select
the printing method suited to your purpose.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver.
To print using Canon Digital Photo Color
The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer, reproducing colors of the original image
data and producing three-dimensional effects and high, sharp contrasts.
To print by directly applying editing and touch-up results of an application software
When printing the data, the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas,
while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact.
When printing the data, the printer applies fine adjustment results, such as brightness adjustments
made with an application software.
Printing with ICC Profiles
Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively.
You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so
that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data.
The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used.
Page top
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Strana 269 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that
most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color.
When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them,
use a printing ICC profile in the application software, and select settings for color management.
The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, and select Driver Matching for Color Correction.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Strana 270 z celkového počtu 684
6. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Printing with ICC Profiles
Strana 271 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Printing with ICC Profiles
Printing with ICC Profiles
When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe
RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively.
The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print.
Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data
When you print the editing and touch-up results of Adobe Photoshop, Canon Digital Photo Professional,
or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles, you print by
effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data.
To use this printing method, use your application software to select color management items and
specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data.
Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper from
your application software, be sure to select color management items from your application software.
For instructions, refer to the manual of the application software you are using.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Printing with ICC Profiles
Strana 272 z celkového počtu 684
Click Matching tab, and select None for Color Correction.
6. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.
Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver, and then Print
Print from a program that cannot identity input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by specifying
input ICC profiles from printer profiles of the printer driver. When printing Adobe RGB data, you can print
the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
Printing with ICC Profiles
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, and select ICM for Color Correction.
6. Select the input profile
Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data.
For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile:
Select Standard.
For Adobe RGB data:
Strana 273 z celkového počtu 684
Printing with ICC Profiles
Strana 274 z celkového počtu 684
Select Adobe RGB (1998).
Important
When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer
driver becomes invalid.
When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) is not displayed.
You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine.
7. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
8. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the color space of the selected image data.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Color Balance
Strana 275 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance
You can adjust the color tints when printing.
Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes
the total color balance of the document. Use the application software if you want to change the color
balance significantly. Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly.
The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish
yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform.
No adjustment
Adjust Color Balance
The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows:
You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust color balance
There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the
corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is
Adjusting Color Balance
Strana 276 z celkového počtu 684
moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the document is printed with the adjusted color balance.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow
appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Brightness
Strana 277 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Brightness
You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing.
This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate
colors.
The following sample shows the print result when the brightness specification is changed.
Light is selected
Normal is selected
Dark is selected
The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows:
You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Specify the brightness
Select Light, Normal, or Dark for Brightness, and click OK.
Adjusting Brightness
Strana 278 z celkového počtu 684
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Intensity
Strana 279 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Intensity
You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing.
When you want to sharpen the print results, you should intensify the colors.
The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more
intense when the image data is printed.
No adjustment
Higher Intensity
The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows:
You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity on the Main tab, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust intensity
Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies (darkens) the colors. Moving the slider to the left
dilutes (brightens) the colors.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Adjusting Intensity
Strana 280 z celkového počtu 684
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Contrast
Strana 281 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Contrast
You can adjust the image contrast during printing.
To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct,
increase the contrast. On the other hand, to make the differences between the light and dark portions of
images smaller and less distinct, reduce the contrast.
No adjustment
Adjust the contrast
The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows:
You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust the contrast
Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast, and moving it to the left decreases the
contrast.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Adjusting Contrast
Strana 282 z celkového počtu 684
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Page top
Simulating an Illustration
Strana 283 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Simulating an Illustration
Simulating an Illustration
With the Simulate Illustration function, you can print full-color or 256-color image data so that it looks like
a hand-drawn illustration. This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors.
The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the Simulate Illustration
If necessary, check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab, and adjust the Contrast.
Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the
image data.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed so that it looks hand-drawn.
Page top
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Strana 284 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
With the Monochrome Effects function, you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a
photograph to a sepia tone image.
The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Monochrome Effects
Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color.
When you use Select Color, move the Color slider to specify the color you want.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with a single color.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Monochrome Effects appears
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Strana 285 z celkového počtu 684
grayed out and is unavailable.
Page top
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Strana 286 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors.
The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human
skin color natural. By using this function, you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid.
The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows:
You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Vivid Photo
Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with vivid colors.
Page top
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Strana 287 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
The Image Optimizer function allows you to smooth jagged outlines in photos and graphics that have
been enlarged with your application. This feature is especially useful when printing low-resolution
images from Web pages.
The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Image Optimizer
Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The photos and graphics will be printed with jagged outlines smoothed.
Note
Depending on application software or resolution of image data, the Image Optimizer may have no
discernible effects.
It may take longer to complete printing when the Image Optimizer is used.
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Strana 288 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Strana 289 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images. It is
specially designed to compensate for color shift, overexposure, and underexposure.
The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Photo Optimizer PRO
Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab.
Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box.
Images within each page are optimized on an image-by-image basis.
Note
Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been
processed, such as being cropped or rotated. In this case the entire page will be treated as a
single image to be optimized.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the images will be printed with color compensation.
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Strana 290 z celkového počtu 684
Important
Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when:
Background is set in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab.
Define Stamp... is selected in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab, and the
bitmapped stamp is configured.
Note
Depending on images, the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect.
Page top
Reducing Photo Noise
Strana 291 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Reducing Photo Noise
Reducing Photo Noise
With the Photo Noise Reduction function, you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the
image quality of the digital print.
The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Photo Noise Reduction
Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the
level.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced.
Note
It is recommended to select Normal for most cases. Select Strong if you have selected Normal and
the noise still bothers you.
Reducing Photo Noise
Strana 292 z celkového počtu 684
Depending on application software or resolution of image data, effects of digital camera noise
reduction may not be obvious.
When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras, image may be distorted.
Page top
Overview of the Printer Driver
Strana 293 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
Overview of the Printer Driver
Printer Driver Operations
Canon IJ Printer Driver
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Maintenance Tab
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Preview
Page top
Printer Driver Operations
Strana 294 z celkového počtu 684
MA-5385-V1.00
| Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) | How to Use This Manual | Printing This Manual |
Various Printing Methods
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing
Order
Changing Machine Settings from Your
Computer
Changing the Print Options
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Setting the Ink Cartridge
Setting the Stapling Margin
Managing the Machine Power
Borderless Printing
Reducing the Machine Noise
Fit-to-Page Printing
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Scaled Printing
Page Layout Printing
Poster Printing
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Cleaning the Print Heads
Booklet Printing
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Duplex Printing
Aligning the Print Head Position
Stamp/Background Printing
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Printing an Envelope
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Overview of the Printer Driver
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Canon IJ Printer Driver
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting
Image Data
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality
Level and a Halftoning Method
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Maintenance Tab
Canon IJ Preview
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Updating the MP Drivers
Adjusting Color Balance
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Adjusting Brightness
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Adjusting Intensity
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Adjusting Contrast
Installing the MP Drivers
Simulating an Illustration
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Changing Color Properties to Improve
Coloration
Reducing Photo Noise
Appendix
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Sharing the Printer on a Network
Canon IJ Printer Driver
Strana 295 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver
Canon IJ Printer Driver
The Canon IJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this
machine.
The Canon IJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your
printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer.
Because different models support different print data formats, you need a Canon IJ printer driver for the
specific model you are using.
How to Use Printer Driver Help
You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of
the Canon IJ printer driver.
To view all descriptions of a tab...
Click the Help button on each tab. A dialog box opens, displaying a description of each item on the
tab.
You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked
dialog box.
To see a description for each item...
Right-click the item you want to learn about and then click Help.
Alternatively, when the
Help button is found at the right end of the title bar, click that button, and
then click the item you want to learn about.
A description of the item is displayed.
Related Topic
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Page top
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Strana 296 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver > How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start
menu of the Windows.
Note
This guide mainly describes operations on the Windows Vista. Operations may differ depending on
versions of the Windows.
Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software
Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing.
1. Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use
In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box.
2. Select your model name and click Preferences (or Properties)
The printer driver setup window appears.
Note
Depending on application software you use, command names or menu names may vary and
there may be more steps. For details, refer to the user's manual of your application software.
Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu
Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or to
configure printing profile that are common for all application software.
1. Select items from the Start menu as shown below:
In Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers.
In Windows XP, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware ->
Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Settings -> Printers.
2. Right-click your model name icon, and then select Printing Preferences... from the
displayed menu
The printer driver setup window appears.
Important
Opening the printer driver setup window through Properties displays such tabs regarding the
Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening
through Printing Preferences... or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions,
refer to the user's manual for the Windows.
Page top
Maintenance Tab
Strana 297 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver > Maintenance Tab
Maintenance Tab
The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the
machine.
Features
Cleaning the Print Heads
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Aligning the Print Head Position
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Setting the Ink Cartridge
Managing the Machine Power
Related Features
Reducing the Machine Noise
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Page top
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Strana 298 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the
progress of printing on the Windows screen. You will know the status of the printer with graphics, icons,
and messages.
Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer. When launched, the
Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar.
Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
Note
To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing, open the printer driver setup
window and click View Printer Status... on the Maintenance tab.
When Errors Occur
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs (e.g., if the printer runs out of
paper or if the ink is low).
In such cases, take the appropriate action as described.
Page top
Canon IJ Preview
Strana 299 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Preview
Canon IJ Preview
The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a
document is actually printed.
The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the
document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type settings.
When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window , click the Quick
Setup tab or the Main tab, and check the Preview before printing check box.
When you do not want to display a preview before printing, uncheck the check box.
Related Topic
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Page top
Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Strana 300 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Kopírovanie
Na začiatok strany
Kopírovanie
Strana 301 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie
Kopírovanie
Vytváranie kópií
Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania
Na začiatok strany
Vytváranie kópií
Strana 302 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Vytváranie kópií
Vytváranie kópií
Základný postup vytvárania kópií nájdete v časti Kopírovanie .
Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie
Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania
Na začiatok strany
Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie
Strana 303 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Vytváranie kópií > Zmenšenie alebo
zväčšenie kópie
Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie
1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2. Vložte obyčajný papier do zadného zásobníka.
3. Umiestnite originál na ploché predlohové sklo.
4. Stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte typ Plain Paper a veľkosť A4 alebo 8,5" x
11".
Poznámka
Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku.
Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter
5. Stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) .
Rozsvieti sa indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie s
prispôsobením strane, znovu stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) .
Poznámka
Tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) sa môže používať len s funkciou kopírovania.
Kopírované obrázky sa automaticky zväčšia alebo zmenšia po dĺžke alebo po šírke tak, aby sa
prispôsobili vybratej veľkosti strany.
6. Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla + zadajte počet kópií.
Poznámka
Pri opakovanom stláčaní tlačidla + sa na displeji LED zobrazí písmeno F. Počet kópií sa
nastaví na hodnotu 20.
Ak chcete urobiť 10 až 19 kópií, nastavte požadovaný počet kópií a potom vložte rovnaký počet
hárkov papiera. V takomto prípade zariadenie zastaví kopírovanie so stavom chyby. Chybu
zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset .
Stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset obnovíte počet kópií na hodnotu 1.
7. Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla
Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie.
Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane.
Po dokončení kopírovania odstráňte originál z plochého predlohového skla.
Rýchle kopírovanie
1.
Stlačte a minimálne dve sekundy podržte tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black).
Displej LED raz zabliká.
2.
Uvoľnite tlačidlo.
Zariadenie spustí rýchle kopírovanie.
Dôležité
Neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani neodstraňujte originál z predlohového skla, kým sa
Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie
Strana 304 z celkového počtu 684
kopírovanie nedokončí.
Poznámka
Rýchle kopírovanie je vhodné na tlač dokumentov, ktoré obsahujú iba text, na obyčajný papier.
Ak sa nedosiahne očakávaná kvalita, skúste normálne kopírovanie.
Ak chcete urobiť 10 až 19 kópií, nastavte požadovaný počet kópií a potom vložte rovnaký počet
hárkov papiera. V takomto prípade zariadenie zastaví kopírovanie so stavom chyby. Chybu
zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset .
Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset .
Na začiatok strany
Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania
Strana 305 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Používanie užitočných funkcií
kopírovania
Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania
Borderless copy
Obrázky môžete kopírovať tak, že vyplnia celú stranu bez okrajov.
Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy)
Na začiatok strany
Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter
Strana 306 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Používanie užitočných funkcií
kopírovania > Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter
Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter
Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku.
1. Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance) , kým sa nezobrazí písmeno d.
2. Stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) vyberte veľkosť A4, stlačením tlačidla
Farebne (Color) vyberte veľkosť Letter.
Poznámka
Keď je zariadenie zapnuté, môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v
zadnom zásobníku.
Na začiatok strany
Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy)
Strana 307 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Používanie užitočných funkcií
kopírovania > Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy)
Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy)
Obrázky môžete kopírovať tak, že vyplnia celú stranu bez okrajov.
1. Vložte fotografický papier do zadného zásobníka.
2. Stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany papiera vloženého v
zadnom zásobníku.
Poznámka
Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku.
Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter
Ak je vybratý typ Plain Paper a veľkosť A4 alebo 8,5" x 11", kopírovanie bez okrajov nie je k
dispozícii.
3. Stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) .
Rozsvieti sa indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie bez okrajov,
znovu stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) .
Poznámka
Tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) sa môže používať len s funkciou kopírovania.
Kopírované obrázky sa automaticky zväčšia alebo zmenšia, aby sa prispôsobili veľkosti strany
vybratej na kopírovanie bez okrajov.
4. Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla + zadajte počet kópií.
Poznámka
Pri opakovanom stláčaní tlačidla + sa na displeji LED zobrazí písmeno F. Počet kópií sa
nastaví na hodnotu 20.
Ak chcete urobiť 10 až 19 kópií, nastavte požadovaný počet kópií a potom vložte rovnaký počet
hárkov papiera. V takomto prípade zariadenie zastaví kopírovanie so stavom chyby. Chybu
zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset .
Stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset obnovíte počet kópií na hodnotu 1.
5. Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla
Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie.
Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie bez okrajov.
Dôležité
Neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani neodstraňujte originál z predlohového skla, kým sa kopírovanie
nedokončí.
Poznámka
Keďže sa kopírovaný obrázok zväčší tak, aby vyplnil celú stranu, na okrajoch môže dôjsť k jemnému
Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy)
Strana 308 z celkového počtu 684
orezaniu.
Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset .
Na začiatok strany
Skenovanie
Strana 309 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie
Skenovanie
Skenovanie obrázkov
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Ďalšie skenovacie postupy
Na začiatok strany
Skenovanie obrázkov
Strana 310 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie obrázkov
Skenovanie obrázkov
Skenovanie obrázkov
Pred skenovaním
Umiestnenie dokumentov
Na začiatok strany
Skenovanie obrázkov
Strana 311 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie obrázkov > Skenovanie obrázkov
Skenovanie obrázkov
Obrázky môžete naskenovať zo zariadenia do počítača bez ich tlače a uložiť ich v obľúbených formátoch
súborov, akými sú JPEG, TIFF, bitová mapa alebo PDF.
Vyberte si vhodný skenovací postup.
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Na začiatok strany
Pred skenovaním
Strana 312 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie obrázkov > Pred skenovaním
Pred skenovaním
Pred skenovaním obrázkov skontrolujte, či je splnená nasledujúca podmienka:
Vyhovuje originál určený na skenovanie požiadavkám na originály
ukladané na ploché predlohové sklo?
Požiadavky a informácie o umiestňovaní originálov na ploché predlohové sklo nájdete v časti
Umiestnenie dokumentov .
Na začiatok strany
Placing Documents
Strana 313 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Placing Documents
Placing Documents
Learn how to place documents on the machine's Platen. Place documents correctly according to the type
of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly.
Important
Do not place objects on the Document Cover. The objects may fall into the machine when the
Document Cover is opened. This may damage the machine.
Placing Documents
Place documents as described below to allow the machine to detect the document type or size
automatically.
Important
When scanning by specifying the document type or size in MP Navigator EX or ScanGear (scanner
driver), align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the
Platen.
Photos that have been cut to various shapes and documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm)
square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Close the Document Cover when scanning.
When Scanning Photos, Postcards, Business
Cards or CD/DVD
When Scanning Magazines, Newspapers or Text
Documents
Placing a Single Document
Place the document face-down on the Platen and
align an upper corner of the document with the
corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Portions placed on the diagonally striped area
cannot be scanned.
Place the document face-down on the Platen, with
3/8 inches (1 cm) or more space between the
edges of the Platen and the document. Portions
placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be
scanned.
Important
Large documents (such as A4 size photos)
Placing Documents
Strana 314 z celkového počtu 684
that cannot be placed away from the edges/
arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may be
saved as PDF files. To save in a format other
than PDF, scan by specifying the file format.
Placing Multiple Documents
Allow 3/8 inches (1 cm) or more space between
the edges of the Platen and documents, and
between documents. Portions placed on the
diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Note
You can place up to 12 documents.
Positions of slanted documents (10 degrees
or less) are corrected automatically.
Page top
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho ...
Strana 315 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou
ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Príloha: Rôzne nastavenia skenovania
Na začiatok strany
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho ...
Strana 316 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
> Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou
ovládacieho panela zariadenia
Naskenované údaje môžete ukladať v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia.
Pred ukladaním naskenovaných údajov v počítači skontrolujte, či sú splnené nasledujúce podmienky:
Nainštalovaný je potrebný aplikačný softvér (ovládače MP Drivers a
program MP Navigator EX).
Ak ste ešte aplikačný softvér (ovládače MP Drivers a program MP Navigator EX) nenainštalovali, do
diskovej jednotky počítača vložte Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) , spustite inštaláciu
Custom Install a vyberte položky MP Drivers a MP Navigator EX.
Zariadenie je správne pripojené k počítaču.
Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie správne pripojené k počítaču.
Pri skenovaní obrázkov pomocou zariadenia, alebo keď je počítač v režime spánku alebo
pohotovostnom režime, nezapájajte ani neodpájajte kábel USB.
Postup po naskenovaní originálu je nastavený v programe MP
Navigator EX.
V programe MP Navigator EX možno nastaviť odpoveď na stlačenie tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) na
zariadení. Môžete nastaviť odpoveď pre každú udalosť zvlášť. Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti
Výber odpovede na príkazy z ovládacieho panela použitím programu MP Navigator EX .
1.
Nastavte úvodnú aplikáciu.
Ak používate systém Mac OS X v.10.5.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.4.x:
Toto nastavenie nie je potrebné.
Ak používate systém Mac OS X v.10.3.9:
Program MP Navigator EX musíte nastaviť ako úvodnú softvérovú aplikáciu aplikácie Image Capture
v ponuke Aplikácie (Applications) systému Mac OS X.
V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications) a potom dvakrát kliknite na ikonu
Image Capture. V ľavom dolnom rohu okna skenera kliknite na tlačidlo Možnosti (Options), v
zozname Aplikácia, ktorá sa spustí pri stlačení tlačidla skenera: (Application to launch when the
scanner button is pressed:) vyberte možnosť MP Navigator EX 3 a potom kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Ak
chcete ukončiť aplikáciu Image Capture, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte možnosť Ukončiť
aplikáciu Image Capture (Quit Image Capture).
Dôležité
Ak sa tlačidlo Možnosti (Options) nezobrazí, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte položku Predvoľby
(Preferences), kliknite na položku Skener (Scanner) a potom kliknutím na možnosť Vždy, keď je
to možné, použiť softvér TWAIN (Use TWAIN software whenever possible) zrušte túto možnosť.
Potom ukončite a reštartujte aplikáciu Image Capture.
2. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
3. Umiestnite originál na ploché predlohové sklo.
Poznámka
Informácie o vkladaní originálov na ploché predlohové sklo nájdete v časti Umiestnenie
dokumentov .
Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho ...
Strana 317 z celkového počtu 684
4. Stlačte tlačidlo SKENOVAŤ (SCAN).
Pri skenovaní sa použijú nastavenia nakonfigurované programom MP Navigator EX.
5.
Nastavenie programu MP Navigator EX 3.0
Ak používate systém Windows Vista:
Po stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V takom
prípade vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 a kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
Program MP Navigator EX môžete nastaviť, aby sa spúšťal po každom stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ
(SCAN). Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti Pre používateľov systému Windows .
Ak používate systém Windows XP:
Po prvom stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V
takom prípade vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 ako aplikačný softvér, ktorý chcete použiť.
Potom vyberte príkaz Pre túto akciu vždy použiť tento program (Always use this program for this
action) a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Odteraz sa bude program MP Navigator EX spúšťať automaticky.
Dôležité
Ak sa poloha alebo veľkosť obrázka pre niektoré typy pôvodných dokumentov nenaskenuje
správne, postupujte podľa časti Skenovanie fotografií a dokumentov a v programe MP
Navigator EX zmeňte nastavenia Document Type a Document Size tak, aby sa zhodovali so
skenovaným pôvodným dokumentom.
Úprava alebo tlač naskenovaných obrázkov
Program MP Navigator EX umožňuje upravovať naskenované obrázky, umožňuje ich napríklad
optimalizovať alebo orezať.
Na úpravu a tlač naskenovaných obrázkov môžete v programe MP Navigator EX spustiť aj niektorú zo
softvérových aplikácií.
Skúsme skenovať
Skenovanie pôvodných dokumentov s použitím rozšírených nastavení
Program ScanGear umožňuje skenovať pôvodné dokumenty s použitím rozšírených nastavení, ako
je napríklad rozlíšenie.
Skenovanie s rozšírenými nastaveniami pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Poznámka
Na skenovanie pôvodných dokumentov v zariadení môžete použiť aj softvérové aplikácie
kompatibilné so štandardmi TWAIN alebo WIA (iba systémy Windows Vista a Windows XP) a s
Ovládacím panelom (Control Panel) (iba systémy Windows Vista a Windows XP).
Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti Ďalšie skenovacie postupy .
Na začiatok strany
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
Strana 318 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix:
Various Scan Settings
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Page top
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Usin...
Strana 319 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix:
Various Scan Settings > Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel
Using MP Navigator EX
MP Navigator EX enables you to specify the response resulting from pressing a button for scanning on
the Operation Panel of the machine. You can specify the response individually for each event.
1. Start MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Click Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box opens.
Note
The Preferences dialog box can also be opened by clicking Preferences in the One-click Mode
screen.
3. On the Scanner Button Settings tab, specify Actions.
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Usin...
Strana 320 z celkového počtu 684
Note
See the section below for details.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
4. Click OK.
The operation will be performed according to the settings when you press the SCAN button on the
machine.
Page top
Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Strana 321 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru
Čo je to MP Navigator EX (dodaný softvér skenera)?
Skúsme skenovať
Užitočné funkcie programu MP Navigator EX
Používanie obrázkov v programe MP Navigator EX
Obrazovky programu MP Navigator EX
Príloha: Otváranie iných súborov než naskenovaných obrázkov
Na začiatok strany
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
Strana 322 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied
Scanner Software)?
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable
even for beginners.
Important
MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the
computer.
Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly.
What You Can Do with This Software
This software allows you to scan multiple documents at one time, or scan images larger than the Platen.
You can also save scanned images, attach them to e-mail or print them using the supplied applications.
Screens
Main Menus
There are two types of MP Navigator EX Main Menu: Navigation Mode screen and One-click Mode screen.
Navigation Mode Screen
You can start various tasks from the Navigation Mode screen, including simple scanning, scanning
using ScanGear (scanner driver), and enhancing/correcting images.
One-click Mode Screen
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in
the One-click Mode screen.
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
Strana 323 z celkového počtu 684
Scan/Import Window
Use the Scan/Import window to scan photos and documents.
View & Use Window
Use the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images.
Page top
Let's Try Scanning
Strana 324 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning
Let's Try Scanning
Try scanning using MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Starting MP Navigator EX
Scanning documents, photos, magazines, etc. from the Platen
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scanning two or more photos (small documents) at one time
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Scanning images larger than the Platen
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Scanning easily according to purpose (scan and save, attach to e-mail, etc.)
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Starting MP Navigator EX
Strana 325 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Starting MP
Navigator EX
Starting MP Navigator EX
Starting MP Navigator EX
1. Double-click
Canon MP Navigator EX 3.0 icon on the desktop.
MP Navigator EX starts.
Note
Alternatively, from the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 3.0
> MP Navigator EX 3.0.
Starting One-click Mode
1. Click
(Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the screen.
The One-click Mode screen appears.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Strana 326 z celkového počtu 684
Note
Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open
the Navigation Mode screen at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen
appears at startup.
Page top
Scanning Photos and Documents
Strana 327 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Photos
and Documents
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
3. Place the document on the Platen, then select Document Type.
Placing Documents
Note
When you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes
longer than usual. To disable the Descreen function, deselect the Descreen checkbox in the
Scanning Photos and Documents
Strana 328 z celkového počtu 684
Scan Settings dialog box.
Select Text(OCR) to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP
Navigator EX.
Color scanning is not available for Text(OCR). To scan in color, use OCR in One-click and scan
with Color Mode set to Color.
4. Click Specify... to set the document size and scanning resolution as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Important
When scanning a large document (such as an A4 size photo), align its corner with the corner at
the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen and specify the document size in the Scan Settings
dialog box.
5. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
Scanning Photos and Documents
Strana 329 z celkového počtu 684
6. Edit the scanned images as required.
Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details.
Note
First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use
Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images.
7. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Page top
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Strana 330 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning
Multiple Documents at One Time
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) at one time by setting Document Size to Auto
Detect (Multiple Documents) in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, start ScanGear
(scanner driver), then adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan
again.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
3. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
4. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
5. Click Specify....
Select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) for Document Size.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
6. Click Scan.
Strana 331 z celkového počtu 684
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Strana 332 z celkového počtu 684
Multiple documents are scanned at one time.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
7. Edit the scanned images as required.
Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details.
Note
First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use
Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images.
8. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Note
If you want to preview the images before scanning, use ScanGear (scanner driver).
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page top
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Strana 333 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Images
Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right halves of a large document separately and combine the
scanned images back into one image. You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the
Platen.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Note
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the
corresponding icon in the One-click Mode screen. Stitch Assist is available from the One-click
Mode screen as well, by changing the document size. Click the corresponding icon and select
Stitch Assist for Document Size. Then skip ahead to Step 5.
2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
3. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Strana 334 z celkového počtu 684
4. Click Specify....
Select Stitch Assist for Document Size, then specify the scanning resolution as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
5. Click Scan.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Strana 335 z celkového počtu 684
The Stitch-assist window opens.
6. Place the left half of the document face-down on the Platen.
7. Click Scan.
The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch-assist window.
8. Place the right half of the document face-down on the Platen.
9. Click Scan.
The right half of the document is scanned.
10. Adjust the scanned image as required.
Use the icons to swap the left and right halves, rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge/reduce the
image.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Strana 336 z celkového počtu 684
(Swap Left & Right)
Swaps the left and right halves.
Important
This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
Rotate 180°
Rotates right half of the image 180 degrees.
Important
This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the displayed image.
(Reduce)
Reduces the displayed image.
(Full-screen)
Enlarges/reduces the image to display it full-screen.
Note
Enlarge/Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image.
When the document is scanned upside down, the image displayed in the Stitch-assist window
will also be upside down. Click Rotate 180° to rotate the image to the correct orientation.
You can drag the right half of the image from right to left or up and down to adjust the position.
If the left and right halves do not match due to a slanted document, place the document
correctly and click Back, then scan again.
11. Click Next.
12. Drag the mouse to specify the area to be saved, then click OK.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Strana 337 z celkového počtu 684
The combined image appears in the Thumbnail window.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
13. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Page top
Easy Scanning with One-click
Strana 338 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning
with One-click
Easy Scanning with One-click
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One-click Mode screen appears.
Navigation Mode Screen
One-click Mode Screen
Note
Skip ahead to Step 4 if One-click Mode screen is open.
3. Point to One-click.
Easy Scanning with One-click
Strana 339 z celkového počtu 684
4. Click the corresponding icon.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
One-click Mode Screen
5. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
6. Set the document size and scanning resolution as required.
7. Start scanning.
Scanning starts.
Page top
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
Strana 340 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
With MP Navigator EX, you can correct/enhance scanned images beautifully, and search saved images
quickly.
Correcting/enhancing images automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/enhancing images manually
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Adjusting color characteristics such as brightness and contrast
Adjusting Images
Searching for lost images
Searching Images
Classifying and sorting images
Classifying Images into Categories
Page top
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Strana 341 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct/enhance scanned images automatically.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/
enhance.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Strana 342 z celkového počtu 684
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Make sure that Auto is selected.
5. Click Auto Photo Fix, Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing.
Important
Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto
Photo Fix. Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital
camera, etc. manufactured by other companies.
Note
The Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider
that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons.
When you apply Auto Photo Fix, dark backlit photos will be corrected automatically. If the image
is not corrected enough using Auto Photo Fix, it is recommended that you apply Face
Brightener on the Manual tab.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Strana 343 z celkového počtu 684
6. Click OK.
The entire image is corrected/enhanced automatically and
upper left of the thumbnail and preview image.
(Correct/Enhance) appears on the
Note
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction/enhancement.
Select the Apply to all images checkbox to correct/enhance all selected images.
7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif.
Adobe RGB images are saved as sRGB images.
8. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced
images.
Page top
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Strana 344 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
You can correct/enhance scanned images manually.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/
enhance.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Strana 345 z celkového počtu 684
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
5. Click Face Brightener, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish
Remover.
Note
The Face Brightener, Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be
changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
6. Drag to select the area you want to correct/enhance, then click OK that appears
over the image.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
The portion in and around the selected area is corrected/enhanced and
appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image.
Strana 346 z celkového počtu 684
(Correct/Enhance)
Note
You can also drag to rotate the rectangle.
Click Undo to undo the latest correction/enhancement.
Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied
to the selected image.
7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif.
8. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced
images.
Page top
Adjusting Images
Strana 347 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Adjusting Images
Adjusting Images
You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
Adjusting Images
Strana 348 z celkového počtu 684
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Click Manual, then click Adjust.
5. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level.
When you move a slider,
preview image.
(Correct/Enhance) appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments.
Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied
to the selected image.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save adjusted images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
Adjusting Images
Strana 349 z celkového počtu 684
The file format of adjusted images is JPEG/Exif.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Page top
Searching Images
Strana 350 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Searching Images
Searching Images
In the View & Use window of the Navigation Mode screen, you can search images saved on your
computer and open them in MP Navigator EX. Opened images can be printed, edited, etc.
Note
Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a selected folder
and its subfolders. You can also specify folder and search in Specify Folder.
See "Starting MP Navigator EX" to start MP Navigator EX.
Quick Search
In
(Text box) on the Toolbar, enter a word or phrase included in the file
name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you want to search for, then click
(Search button).
For Exif information, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched.
Advanced Search
Click Search on the left of the screen to open search options. Enter information of the image you want to
search for, then click Start Search.
Searching Images
Strana 351 z celkového počtu 684
Search in
If you know where to look for, select the drive, folder or network from Specify Folder.
File Name
If you know the file name, enter it.
A word or phrase in the file
Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options.
Important
For PDF files, you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot search
PDF files created or edited in other applications. Also, searching PDF files is available only
when keyword search is set.
For details of creating PDF files that enables keyword search, see " PDF Settings Dialog Box ."
Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched.
Category
You can search for images by category.
Modified Date
To search for images that have been updated in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates
of the period.
Shooting Date
To search for images captured in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates of the period.
Note
Captured date is the date and time of data creation, which are included in the document's Exif
information.
More Advanced Options
A word or phrase in the file
In A word or phrase in the file, select the items to search. If you select the Exif information
Searching Images
Strana 352 z celkového počtu 684
checkbox, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched. If you select the
PDF text checkbox, text in PDF files is searched.
Important
Text in password-protected PDF files cannot be searched.
Search subfolders
Select this checkbox to search subfolders.
Case sensitive
Select this checkbox to match case.
Match all criteria
Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria.
Match any criteria
Searches for files that meet any of the specified criteria.
Start Search
Starts search.
Related Topic
View & Use Window
Page top
Classifying Images into Categories
Strana 353 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Classifying Images into Categories
Classifying Images into Categories
Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category. You can classify unclassified images
automatically, and also create custom categories. You can drag and drop an image to move it from one
category to another.
Note
If you have classified the images in MP Navigator EX 2.0 or later and then upgrade MP Navigator EX
to the latest version, the classification information on the second latest version is transferred upon
initial startup. After the initial startup, the classification information cannot be transferred.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2.
In
(Sort by), select Categories.
Images are automatically sorted by category and appear in the Thumbnail window.
Classifying Images into Categories
Strana 354 z celkového počtu 684
Images are sorted into the following categories.
Photos: Portrait, Others
Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others
Custom categories: Displays your custom categories.
To create custom categories, see " Creating Custom Categories ."
Unclassified: Displays images that have not yet been classified.
Note
Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically. Click Cancel
to stop.
Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Important
Even if you classify images saved in removable media such as USB flash drive and external hard
disk, the classification information will be deleted once you remove the media. From the next time,
the images are classified to Unclassified.
Images cannot be classified when Recently Saved Images is selected in the View & Use window.
Note
Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories. In
that case, drag and drop the image to the correct category.
Images saved in network folders may not be classified.
You can search for images by category. See " Searching Images " for details.
Creating Custom Categories
1. In the View & Use window, sort images by category and click Edit Custom
Categories.
The Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens.
2. Click Add to List.
The Add Category dialog box opens.
3. Enter Category name and click OK.
Note
You can create up to 20 custom categories.
Up to 50 single-byte characters can be used for a category name.
Double-click a created category to open the Change Category Name dialog box in which you
can change the category name.
Select a custom category and click Delete to delete it.
Classifying Images into Categories
Strana 355 z celkového počtu 684
Related Topic
View & Use Window
Page top
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
Strana 356 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images.
See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images.
Saving scanned images to computer
Saving
Saving scanned image as PDF Files
Saving as PDF Files
See the corresponding sections below for details on using images/files.
Creating/editing PDF files from scanned images
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing multiple scanned images at one time or printing at specific size, quality, etc.
Printing Documents
Printing scanned photos
Printing Photos
Sending scanned images via e-mail
Sending via E-mail
Correcting/enhancing scanned images or converting them to text
Editing Files
Setting passwords for created PDF files
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page top
Saving
Strana 357 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Saving
Saving
Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer.
1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save.
2. In the Save dialog box, specify the save settings.
Specify the destination folder, file name and file type.
Save Dialog Box
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Note
By default, the following folders are specified as the destination folders.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Saving
Strana 358 z celkového počtu 684
3. Click Save.
Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save
Complete dialog box.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Saving as PDF Files
Strana 359 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Saving as PDF Files
Saving as PDF Files
Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files.
1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save as PDF file.
2. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, specify the save settings.
Specify the file type, file name and destination folder.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Select from the following PDF file types:
PDF
Saving as PDF Files
Strana 360 z celkového počtu 684
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Note
By default, the following folders are specified as the destination folders.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
You can set passwords for PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
3. Click Save.
Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save
Complete dialog box.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Strana 361 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Create/edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View
& Use window to create PDF files and add/delete pages, rearrange the page order, etc.
Important
You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Creating/Editing PDF Files with MP Navigator EX
1. Select images and click PDF.
Note
You can select PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files.
2. Click Create/Edit PDF file on the list.
Important
For PDF files, you can only edit those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot edit PDF files
created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be edited as well.
Note
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Strana 362 z celkového počtu 684
If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
3. Add/delete pages as required.
To add an existing file, click Add Page and select the file. To delete a page, select it and click Delete
Selected Pages.
Note
You can add PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files.
When adding a password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the password.
4. Rearrange the page order as required.
Use the icons to rearrange the order. Alternatively, drag and drop the thumbnail to the target location.
Note
See " Create/Edit PDF file Window " for details on the Create/Edit PDF file window.
5. Click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages.
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal
directions.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
6. Specify the save settings in the Save as PDF file dialog box, then click Save.
Images are saved according to the settings.
Opening PDF Files in an Application
You can open PDF files created with MP Navigator EX in an associated application and edit or print them.
1. Select PDF files and click PDF.
Important
For PDF files, you can only select those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot select PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be selected
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Strana 363 z celkového počtu 684
as well.
2. Click Open PDF file on the list.
The application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system starts.
Important
Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security.
Files may not open if an application that can be associated with PDF files is not installed.
3. Use the application to edit/print the file.
For details, refer to the application's manual.
Important
In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password
may differ from those in MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Printing Documents
Strana 364 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Printing Documents
Printing Documents
You can print multiple scanned images at one time, print at specific quality, etc. using MP Navigator EX.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Print, then click Print Document on the list.
Important
If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
3. Specify print settings as required.
In the displayed dialog box, specify print count, quality, scale, etc.
Print Document Dialog Box
Printing Documents
Strana 365 z celkového počtu 684
Important
At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In
that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size.
4. Click Print.
Printing starts.
Note
When printing a multiple-page PDF file via Print Document, printing may take time depending
on your computer. In that case, follow these steps and change settings.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Click Printers.
3. Right-click the icon of your printer and click Properties.
The printer properties dialog box opens.
4. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster.
6. Select Start printing after last page is spooled.
7. After printing, return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately.
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Printing Photos
Strana 366 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Printing Photos
Printing Photos
You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After
scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select how you want to print the
photos.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
When Printing Photos Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
You can use Easy-PhotoPrint EX to print scanned photos at high quality or to layout and print images.
1. Select images and click Print.
2. Click Print Photo or Print Album on the list.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts. See " Printing Photos " for details.
Note
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, print with MP Navigator EX.
When Printing Photos Using MP Navigator EX
1. Select images and click Print.
2. Click Print Photo on the list.
Printing Photos
Strana 367 z celkového počtu 684
3. Specify print settings as required.
In the displayed dialog box, specify paper size, print count, etc.
Print Photo Dialog Box
4. Click Print.
Printing starts.
Note
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Sending via E-mail
Strana 368 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Sending via E-mail
Sending via E-mail
Send scanned images via e-mail.
Important
MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs:
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000)
- Microsoft Outlook
(If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.)
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Send, then click Attach to E-mail on the list.
3. Set save options as required.
Specify the destination folder and file name.
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Sending via E-mail
Strana 369 z celkového počtu 684
Note
You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e-mail. Click Set... to open
a dialog box and select a compression type from High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
4. Click OK.
Files are saved according to the settings, and the e-mail software program starts.
5. Specify the recipient, enter the subject and message, then send e-mail.
For details, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.
Page top
Editing Files
Strana 370 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Editing Files
Editing Files
You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies
the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select what
you want to do with the images.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Correcting Photo Images
You can correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
1. Select images and click Edit/Convert.
2. Click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
3. Correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Note
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
See the corresponding sections below for correcting/enhancing images.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Editing Files
Strana 371 z celkového počtu 684
Converting Documents to Text
Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
Important
PDF files cannot be converted to text.
1. Select images and click Edit/Convert.
2. Click Convert to text file on the list.
Notepad (included with Windows) starts and editable text appears.
Note
Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to
Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language
according to the language of the document to be scanned.
When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file.
General Tab
Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of
the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
- Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
- Slanted documents
- Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with narrow line spacing
- Documents with colors in the background of text
- Documents containing multiple languages
Page top
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Strana 372 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set passwords for opening, editing and printing PDF files.
You can set two passwords: one for opening the file and one for editing/printing it.
Important
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function.
You will not be able to open/edit the file if you forget the password. Record your passwords in a safe
place for future reference.
Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security.
In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password may
differ from those in MP Navigator EX.
Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched by text from the View & Use Window .
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX, then click Save as PDF file.
Alternatively, edit existing files in the Create/Edit PDF file window, then click Save
Selected Pages or Save All Pages.
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens.
Important
Passwords cannot be set when images are automatically saved after scanning, such as when
scanning from the One-click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images.
See " Creating/Editing PDF Files " to create PDF files from existing images or to edit files.
2. Select the Password security settings checkbox.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Strana 373 z celkového počtu 684
The Password Security -Settings dialog box opens.
Note
You can also open the Password Security -Settings dialog box by clicking Set..., then selecting
Password Security for Security in the PDF Settings dialog box.
3. Select the Require a password to open the document or Use a password to restrict
printing and editing of the document and its security settings checkbox, then enter a
password.
Important
Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for the password. Passwords are
case sensitive.
Select both checkboxes to set both Document Open Password and Permissions Password.
You cannot use the same password for both.
4. Click OK.
The Confirm Document Open Password or Confirm Permissions Password dialog box opens.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Strana 374 z celkového počtu 684
Document Open Password
Permissions Password
5. Re-enter the password and click OK.
The Save as PDF file dialog box returns.
Important
If you close the Save as PDF file dialog box without clicking Save, the settings in the Password
Security -Settings dialog box will be deleted.
Passwords are deleted once the file is edited. Reset the passwords when saving edited files.
Note
If you set the passwords via the PDF Settings dialog box, the PDF Settings dialog box returns.
Click OK. The Save as PDF file dialog box returns.
6. Click Save.
Files are saved according to the settings.
Related Topic
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page top
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Strana 375 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Enter a password to open or edit/print password-protected PDF files.
Password entry method varies by operation. The following procedures are examples only.
Important
You can open, edit or print only PDF files whose passwords were set with MP Navigator EX. You
cannot edit PDF files edited in other applications or whose passwords were set with other
applications. Only MP Navigator EX version 1.1 and 2.0 or later supports opening, editing and
printing password-protected PDF files.
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open, edit or print
password-protected PDF files.
Passwords are case sensitive.
You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX.
Entering a Password to Open a File
1. In the View & Use window, select the PDF file you want to open and click
Zoom
in.
Alternatively, double-click the PDF file.
Note
Only the Document Open Password will be required. The Permissions Password will not be
required.
If the Zoom in dialog box with a lock icon opens, click Enter Password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
2. The Password dialog box opens. Enter the password and click OK.
The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box.
Note
To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box, re-enter the password.
Entering a Password (Permissions Password) to Edit or Print a File
1. In the View & Use window, select PDF files and click PDF or Print.
Strana 376 z celkového počtu 684
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Strana 377 z celkového počtu 684
2. To create a PDF file or edit the file, select Create/Edit PDF file on the list. To print
the file, click Print Document.
In the Password dialog box, you will be prompted to enter a password.
Note
If the Document Open Password is set as well, the Document Open Password will be
required, then the Permissions Password will be required.
3. Enter the password and click OK.
The corresponding dialog box opens.
Important
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Related Topic
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page top
MP Navigator EX Screens
Strana 378 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens
MP Navigator EX Screens
Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
View & Use Window
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Print Document Dialog Box
Print Photo Dialog Box
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Custom Scan with One-click Tab / One-click Mode Screen
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
PDF Dialog Box
Mail Dialog Box
OCR Dialog Box
Custom Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
General Tab
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Page top
Navigation Mode Screen
Strana 379 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens >
Navigation Mode Screen
Navigation Mode Screen
This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX.
Point to the icon at the top of the screen to display each tab. Use each tab depending on what you want to
do.
Scan/Import
Scan Photos and Documents.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
View & Use
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit
them using an application that accompanies the machine.
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
One-click
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to
saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Page top
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Strana 380 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan/
Import Documents or Images Tab
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan/Import Documents or Images
tab.
Scan Photos and Documents.
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Opens the Scan/Import window. Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to
saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Page top
View Use Images on your Computer Tab
Strana 381 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View &
Use Images on your Computer Tab
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View & Use Images on your Computer
tab.
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit
them using an application that accompanies the machine.
My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
Opens the View & Use window with My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) selected.
You can open and use images saved in My Box.
My Box is a specific folder for saving images scanned with MP Navigator EX.
Note
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Specify Folder
Opens the View & Use window with Specify Folder selected.
You can open and use images saved in specific folders.
Recently Saved Images
Opens the View & Use window with Recently Saved Images selected.
You can open and use "Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or
"Sent to Application" recently.
View & Use Window
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to
saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
View Use Images on your Computer Tab
Strana 382 z celkového počtu 684
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Related Topic
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Strana 383 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom
Scan with One-click Tab
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Point to One-click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One-click tab.
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Auto Scan
Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files
are saved to a computer. You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required.
When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings.
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save to PC
Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected
automatically.
When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save as PDF file
Scan documents and save them as PDF files.
When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application
settings.
PDF Dialog Box
Attach to E-mail
Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail.
When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail
software program settings.
Mail Dialog Box
OCR
Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
OCR Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Custom
Scan documents and open them in a specified application. Document type is automatically detected.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Strana 384 z celkového počtu 684
When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and
application settings.
Custom Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Start scanning by clicking the button
Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately.
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode. The One-click Mode screen appears.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Important
The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or
Custom dialog box.
When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not
select Auto Mode).
Related Topic
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Strana 385 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Photos/
Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos/Documents (Platen) to open the
Photos/Documents (Platen) screen (Scan/Import window).
Open this window to scan documents from the Platen.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Thumbnail Window
(4) Selected Images Area
Settings and Operation Buttons
(View & Use)
Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer. The View & Use
window opens.
View & Use Window
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Displays the screen for scanning photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo
Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR)
Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color)
Important
You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
Specify...
Specify the document size, resolution, and other advanced scan settings.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Strana 386 z celkového počtu 684
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Important
Specify... is not available if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox when you want to scan with ScanGear (scanner driver). Use ScanGear
(scanner driver) to correct images and adjust colors when scanning.
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
This button changes to Open Scanner Driver when you select the Use the scanner driver
checkbox.
Open Scanner Driver
ScanGear (scanner driver) starts.
See "ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens " for details on ScanGear (scanner driver) screens.
Note
This button changes to Scan when you deselect the Use the scanner driver checkbox.
Clear
Delete all images in the Thumbnail window.
Note
Images not saved on a computer will be deleted. To keep important images, use Save or other
methods to save them to a computer before clicking Clear.
Save
Save the selected images. Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings.
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file
Save the selected images as PDF files. Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the
save settings.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
(Select All)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
(Cancel All)
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Strana 387 z celkového počtu 684
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise.
(Invert)
Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally.
(Trimming)
Trims the target image (outlined in orange) in the Thumbnail window. Trimming is the act of
selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. Click this button to open
the Crop window and specify the trimming frame.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date (ascending or descending).
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Scanned images are displayed.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Note
Thumbnails may appear as "?" when there is not enough memory to display the images.
When Images are Sorted by Categories
Close All / Open All
Close All
Hides all images.
Open All
Displays all images.
Note
Click Close All to change to Open All.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Strana 388 z celkového počtu 684
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Related Topic
Scanning Photos and Documents
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Strana 389 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window.
In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo
Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR)
Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color)
Important
To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
You cannot select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Auto Detect when Document Type is
Text(OCR).
Scanning Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Note
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Strana 390 z celkového počtu 684
The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text(OCR).
300 dpi / 400 dpi
Descreen
Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns.
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or
Text(OCR).
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen.
Reduce Show-through
Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or
Text(OCR).
Note
Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the
scanned image.
Unsharp Mask
Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Remove gutter shadow
Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple
Documents) or Stitch Assist.
Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen.
Note
Use ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size
documents or when custom cropping frames are set.
For details, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings " (ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab).
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Strana 391 z celkového počtu 684
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in
Document Language.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly. In that case, select the scanned image in the Thumbnail window of the "
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " and rotate it with Edit Tools.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and
rotate images.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
Defaults
Restores the default settings.
Page top
Save Dialog Box
Strana 392 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan/Import window.
In the Save dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP.
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Strana 393 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as
PDF file Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF
files. You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP
Navigator EX.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Dialog box that opens when Save as PDF file in the Scan/Import window is clicked
Dialog box that opens when Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages is clicked in the
Create/Edit PDF file window
Save as type
Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Strana 394 z celkového počtu 684
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set...
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified
as well.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
PDF Settings Dialog Box
Strana 395 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF
Settings Dialog Box
PDF Settings Dialog Box
In the PDF Settings dialog box, you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings
for creating PDF files.
Enable keyword search
Select this checkbox to convert characters in a document to text data. This will enable an easy search
by keyword.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation.
Important
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
PDF Compression
Select a compression type for saving.
PDF Settings Dialog Box
Strana 396 z celkového počtu 684
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high
compression.
Note
The following images can be compressed with high efficiency.
- Images with resolutions within the range of 75 dpi to 600 dpi.
Security
Set passwords for opening, editing and printing the created PDF files.
Important
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function.
This function is not available when images are automatically saved after scanning, such as when
scanning from the One-click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Note
Select Password Security and set passwords in the Password Security -Settings dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page top
View Use Window
Strana 397 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View &
Use Window
View & Use Window
Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Specify
Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View & Use window.
Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer.
Important
For PDF files, only those created with MP Navigator EX are displayed. You cannot display PDF files
created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be displayed as well.
(1) Display Setting Items
(2) Image Handling Buttons
(3) Toolbar
(4) Thumbnail Window
(5) Selected Images Area
Display Setting Items
(Scan/Import)
Click this when you want to scan photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. The
View Use Window
Strana 398 z celkového počtu 684
Scan/Import window opens.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
Displays folders of images (grouped by year, year/month and year/month/date) in My Box in tree
view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right.
Image date is the scanned, captured or updated date.
Specify Folder
Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view. Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail
window to the right.
Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name, allowing you to rename it.
Recently Saved Images
"Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or "Sent to Application"
recently are displayed in tree view by date. Select a Month/Date/Year folder to display images by date
in the Thumbnail window to the right.
Image date is the scanned or sent date.
Search
The advanced search options opens.
Searching Images
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Image Handling Buttons
Image Handling Buttons
Specify what to do with the selected images. See the corresponding sections below for details on
each button.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Note
The buttons in Image Handling Buttons are displayed when the corresponding applications are
installed.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
(Select All)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
(Cancel All)
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
View Use Window
Strana 399 z celkového počtu 684
(Image Correction/Enhancement)
Allows you to correct the target image (outlined in orange). Click this button to open the Correct/
Enhance Images window in which you can correct/enhance images and also adjust the
brightness, contrast, etc.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Important
Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary
files.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it. You can check all pages when you select a PDF file.
You can also check file information such as file name, date, size and security setting. A lock icon
appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
(Search)
Enter a word or phrase included in the file name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you
(Search button). For Exif information, text in Maker, Model,
want to search for, then click
Description and User Comment is searched.
Note
Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a
selected folder and its subfolders.
(Refresh)
Refreshes the Thumbnail window contents.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category, date (ascending or descending) or
name (ascending or descending).
Images can be sorted by category only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify
Folder is displayed.
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Scanned images are displayed.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Selecting an image and clicking the file name highlights the file name, allowing you to rename it.
Drag and drop an image to do the following things.
- Move from one category to another within the Thumbnail window
- Move to a category folder displayed in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
- Copy to a folder displayed in Specify Folder
Important
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open passwordprotected PDF files.
You cannot change the extension (.jpg, .pdf, etc.) when renaming a file.
You cannot move or copy images to the date folders displayed in tree view in My Box (Scanned/
Imported Images) or Recently Saved Images.
View Use Window
Strana 400 z celkového počtu 684
Note
A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set.
Thumbnails may appear as "?" in the following cases.
- Opening unsupported images
- File size is too large and there is not enough memory to display the image
- The file is corrupted
When Images are Sorted by Categories
Scanned images are displayed by category.
Note
Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories.
In that case, drag and drop an image and move it from one category to another.
Category name Images: N (Selected: n)
Category name
The following categories are provided.
Photos: Portrait, Others
Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others
Custom categories: Displays your custom categories.
Unclassified: Displays images that have not yet been classified.
Images: N
The number of images classified into the category is displayed.
(Selected: n)
The number of images with the checkbox selected is displayed.
Note
This portion is displayed only when one or more images are selected.
Close All / Open All
Close All
Hides all images.
Open All
Displays all images.
Note
Immediately after opening the View & Use window or sorting images, all images appear
and Close All is displayed.
Click Close All to change to Open All.
Specific Categories / All Categories
You can narrow down the categories to display only those containing images. If you narrow
down the categories, more images are displayed in the Thumbnail List area, allowing you to
find or move images easily.
This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is
displayed.
Specific Categories
Displays categories containing images, along with the contained images.
View Use Window
Strana 401 z celkového počtu 684
All Categories
Displays all categories and images.
Note
Click Specific Categories to change to All Categories.
Edit Custom Categories
When My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is displayed, the Edit Custom
Categories dialog box opens.
In the Edit Custom Categories dialog box, you can add/delete categories displayed in Custom
Categories.
See "Classifying Images into Categories " for details.
Classify Images
Images imported from hard disks appear in Unclassified. Click Classify Images to classify
them automatically.
This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is
displayed.
Note
Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Related Topic
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Strana 402 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Create/
Edit PDF file Window
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Click PDF in the View & Use window, then click Create/Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create/Edit
PDF file window.
In the Create/Edit PDF file window, you can add/delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files
created with MP Navigator EX.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX.
Rearrange Pages
You can move the selected image (outlined in orange).
Moves the selected image to the top.
Moves the selected image up one page.
Moves the selected image down one page.
Moves the selected image to the end.
Note
You can also drag and drop the image to rearrange the order.
Delete Selected Pages
Deletes the selected image.
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Strana 403 z celkového počtu 684
Add Page
Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file.
Note
A password will be required to add a password-protected PDF file.
Undo
Cancels the latest change made.
Reset
Cancels all the changes made.
Save Selected Pages
Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. Only the selected page is saved.
Note
When multiple pages are selected, a multiple-page PDF file is created.
See "Save as PDF file Dialog Box " for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Save All Pages
Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. All PDF files in the list will be saved
as one PDF file.
Finish
Closes the Create/Edit PDF file window.
Toolbar
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the page 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the page 90 degrees clockwise.
(Preview Mode)
Switches to Preview Mode.
The selected file appears in Preview.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the image displayed in Preview.
(Reduce)
Reduces the image displayed in Preview.
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Strana 404 z celkového počtu 684
(Full-screen)
Enlarges/reduces the image to display it fully in Preview.
(Thumbnail Mode)
Switches to Thumbnail Mode. Thumbnails of files are displayed.
Page top
Print Document Dialog Box
Strana 405 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print
Document Dialog Box
Print Document Dialog Box
Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document
dialog box.
In the Print Document dialog box, you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images
at one time.
Note
The setting items in the Print Document dialog box vary by printer.
Printer
Select the printer to use.
Paper Source
Select paper source.
Page Layout
Select a print type.
Normal-size Printing
Print one image per sheet.
Scaled Printing
Print images at the selected scale (enlarged or reduced).
Fit-to-Page Printing
Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced).
Borderless Printing
Print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins.
Page Layout Printing (2 on 1)
Layout and print two images on a sheet of paper.
Page Layout Printing (4 on 1)
Layout and print four images on a sheet of paper.
Enlarge/Reduce
Enlarge or reduce images to print.
Print Document Dialog Box
Strana 406 z celkového počtu 684
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Print a reduced or enlarged image by specifying a scale in increments of 1%.
Auto
Scale is adjusted automatically according to the detected paper width and the selected paper size.
Image may be printed rotated 90 degrees depending on its size.
Scale
Select a scale from the list.
Important
At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In
that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size.
Paper Size
Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine.
Note
Selectable paper sizes depend on the selected printer.
Media Type
Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type.
Note
Selectable paper types depend on the selected printer.
Print Quality
Select the print quality.
Density
Click
(Density adjustment) to select the print density.
Copies
Click
(Copy setting) to select the number of copies to be printed.
Grayscale Printing
Select this checkbox to print the document in black and white.
Preview before printing
Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing.
Defaults
Restores the default settings.
Print
Start printing with the specified settings.
Note
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Print Photo Dialog Box
Strana 407 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print
Photo Dialog Box
Print Photo Dialog Box
Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box.
Important
The Print Photo dialog box will not open if Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts
instead.
PDF files cannot be printed.
Note
Double-click an image to display it in a different window.
Printer
Select the printer to use.
Properties...
Displays the selected printer's advanced setting screen.
Paper Size
Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine.
Media Type
Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type.
Page Layout
Select a print type.
Normal-size Printing
Print one image per sheet.
Fit-to-Page Printing
Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced).
Borderless Printing
Print Photo Dialog Box
Strana 408 z celkového počtu 684
Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins.
Important
Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing.
This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing.
Orientation
Specify the print orientation.
Important
This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing. For others, the image is
automatically rotated according to the aspect ratio of the paper.
Copies
Specify the number of copies to print.
Vivid Photo
Select this checkbox to print the image in vivid colors.
Preview before printing
Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing.
Print
Starts printing.
Note
Only the images in the Thumbnail window with the checkbox selected are printed.
Close
Closes the dialog box without printing the photo.
Page top
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Strana 409 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Send via
E-mail Dialog Box
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Click Send in the View & Use window, then click Attach to E-mail on the list to open the Send via E-mail
dialog box.
In the Send via E-mail dialog box, you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e-mail.
Important
MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs:
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000)
- Microsoft Outlook
(If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.)
Mail Program
The e-mail software program set up via Preferences in the Navigation Mode screen is displayed.
Select the e-mail software program you want to use.
Adjust attachment file size
When Save as type is JPEG, selecting this checkbox allows you to resize the images. Select a size
from Size.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another
one. If resized, the resized images are saved.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be attached (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Set...
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files.
Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression).
Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 410 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Correct/
Enhance Images Window
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Click
(Image Correction/Enhancement) in the View & Use window or click Fix photo images in the
Task Button area to open the Correct/Enhance Images window.
In the Correct/Enhance Images window, you can make advanced settings including image correction/
enhancement and brightness/contrast adjustment.
You can also display the source image and corrected image side by side for comparison.
Important
Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
Enhancement) in the Zoom in dialog box.
It may take a while to correct large images.
See "View & Use Window" for details on the View & Use window.
(Image Correction/
(1) Task Area
(2) Toolbar
Task Area
Available tasks and settings vary between the Auto and Manual tabs.
Click Auto or Manual to open the corresponding tab.
Auto Tab
Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image.
See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically " for details.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 411 z celkového počtu 684
Auto Photo Fix
Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos.
Prioritize Exif Info
Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of
shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note
Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images
(JPEG).
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Apply to all images
Applies the correction to all images displayed in the thumbnail list.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected images selected.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Manual Tab
Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image.
Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas.
See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually " for details.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 412 z celkového počtu 684
Adjustment
Brightness
Adjusts the overall image brightness.
Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast.
Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Sharpness
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the
photo is out of focus or text is blurred.
Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image.
Blur
Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image.
Move the slider to the right to soften the image.
Show-through Removal
Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document
from appearing on the image.
Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect.
Defaults
Resets all adjustments (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal).
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected images selected.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correction/Enhancement
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 413 z celkového počtu 684
Face Brightener
Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Face Sharpener
Corrects the entire image to sharpen the face. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect
to.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can specify the area you want
to apply the effect to.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Blemish Remover
Removes moles. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the specified area.
Undo
Cancels the latest correction.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected images selected.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Toolbar
Toolbar
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Strana 414 z celkového počtu 684
(Invert)
Inverts the image horizontally.
(Trimming)
Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. In
the displayed window, drag the white frame to specify the trimming area. Move the cursor inside
the white frame and drag to move the trimming area.
Note
Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a
balanced image.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the displayed image.
(Reduce)
Reduces the displayed image.
(Full-screen)
Enlarges/reduces the image to display it full-screen.
(Compare)
Opens the source image for comparison.
The source image appears on the left and the corrected image appears on the right.
Page top
One-click Mode Screen
Strana 415 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > One-click
Mode Screen
One-click Mode Screen
Click
(Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One-click
Mode screen.
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Auto
Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files
are saved to a computer. You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required.
When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings.
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save
Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected
automatically.
When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
PDF
Scan documents and save them as PDF files.
When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application
settings.
PDF Dialog Box
Mail
Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail.
When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail
software program settings.
Mail Dialog Box
OCR
Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
OCR Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Custom
Scan documents and open them in a specified application. Document type is automatically detected.
When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and
application settings.
Custom Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
(Switch Mode)
One-click Mode Screen
Strana 416 z celkového počtu 684
Switches to Navigation Mode. The Navigation Mode screen appears.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Important
The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or
Custom dialog box.
When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not
select Auto Mode).
Related Topic
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Strana 417 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto
Scan Dialog Box
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Click Auto Scan on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Auto in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Auto Scan dialog box.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, click another icon in
One-click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One-click tab and specify the document type or size.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents
may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
To reduce moire, click another icon in One-click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One-click tab
and set Document Type to Magazine.
Scan Settings
Enable Auto Photo Fix
Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically.
This function is available when Auto or JPEG/Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the base color tone of the following types of documents may
change from the source since they are corrected as photos. In that case, deselect the checkbox
and scan.
- Postcards and business cards
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Strana 418 z celkového počtu 684
Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos
depending on how you place the document. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
Note
If you select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type and then select this checkbox, a
message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto.
Save Settings
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP or PDF.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ depending on how you place the
document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow
(alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is
Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo
each.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Strana 419 z celkového počtu 684
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Strana 420 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Save in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Save dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is
automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically
set as well.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case,
specify the document type or size.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Strana 421 z celkového počtu 684
To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Save dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode. When
saving as PDF files, select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
Important
When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow
(alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Strana 422 z celkového počtu 684
Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an
option other than Auto in Save as type.
If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in
AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable.
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo
each.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB
Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB.
Important
This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto
Mode.
This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed.
Note
You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an
underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg)
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information)
Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings
such as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Save Dialog Box
Note
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Strana 423 z celkového počtu 684
(Input Exif information). After scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Application Settings
Open with
You can select whether to open the View & Use window or Explorer after saving the images.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Strana 424 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Make advanced settings for scanning with one-click or scanning using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in a dialog box for making scan settings.
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode or Auto Scan is selected, the document
type is automatically detected.
In that case, Color Mode, Document Size, etc. are automatically set as well.
Important
To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned.
When opened from the Scanner Button Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box, the Document
Type specified in the Scanner Button Settings tab is displayed and cannot be changed in this
dialog box.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Color
This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Grayscale
This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Black and White
This mode renders the image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain
levels (threshold level) into black and white and is rendered in two colors.
Note
Color Mode is not displayed in the Scan Settings dialog box opened from the Scanner Button
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Document Size
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Strana 425 z celkového počtu 684
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Scanning Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Descreen
Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns.
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen.
Reduce Show-through
Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Note
Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the
scanned image.
Unsharp Mask
Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image.
Remove gutter shadow
Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple
Documents) or Stitch Assist.
Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen.
Note
Use ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size
documents or when custom cropping frames are set.
For details, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings " (ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab).
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Strana 426 z celkového počtu 684
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document.
Enable Auto Photo Fix (When scanning with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel)
Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically.
This function is available when Auto or JPEG/Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings on the
Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the base color tone of the following types of documents may change
from the source since they are corrected as photos. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
- Postcards and business cards
Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos depending
on how you place the document. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
Note
If you select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type and then select this checkbox, a
message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in
Document Language.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and
rotate images.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
Defaults
Restores the default settings.
Page top
Save Dialog Box
Strana 427 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box opens when you scan from Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or
from Save in the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the
image (Input Exif information).
You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP, PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Save Dialog Box
Strana 428 z celkového počtu 684
Important
PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) and PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the
Operation Panel of the machine.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Exif Settings...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif, you can input Exif information into the file to be saved.
Exif Settings Dialog Box
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Note
This function is available only when Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as
well.
Rotate Left 90°/Rotate Right 90°
Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.
Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Exif Settings Dialog Box
Strana 429 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Exif
Settings Dialog Box
Exif Settings Dialog Box
You can input Exif information into a file to be saved. Exif is a standard format for embedding various
shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Embedding Exif information into scanned images
allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images.
The Exif Settings dialog box can be opened when Save as type is JPEG/Exif.
Basic Information
Displays the information obtained automatically from the machine or software.
Advanced Information
Displays the information specified on the right side of the screen.
Advanced Information Settings Area
You can input Exif information such as the title and shooting data. Select the checkbox of the items you
want to specify, and select or enter information.
Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically
Select this checkbox to automatically display the information you specified for the previous image.
Apply
After specifying all the information you need, click Apply to embed it into the image. The information
appears in Advanced Information.
OK
Embeds the specified information into the image and closes the screen. The specified information is
saved.
Cancel
Cancels the settings and closes the screen.
Information is embedded when Cancel is clicked after clicking Apply.
Page top
PDF Dialog Box
Strana 430 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF
Dialog Box
PDF Dialog Box
Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click PDF in the One-click Mode screen
to open the PDF dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
PDF Dialog Box
Strana 431 z celkového počtu 684
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
Note
Click Set... to open the PDF Settings dialog box in which you can specify the PDF compression
type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files.
PDF Settings Dialog Box
See "Creating/Editing PDF Files " to delete or rearrange the pages of saved PDF files.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
Select this to open the Save as PDF file dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save
PDF Dialog Box
Strana 432 z celkového počtu 684
settings such as destination folder and file name.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Note
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. After
scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Application Settings
Open with
Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application
that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images
are scanned.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application
may not start.
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application to start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents as PDF files with the specified settings.
Page top
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Strana 433 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as
PDF file Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with
One-click tab or from PDF in the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after
scanning the image.
In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Save as type
Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images.
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Strana 434 z celkového počtu 684
PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set...
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Rotate Left 90°/Rotate Right 90°
Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.
Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Mail Dialog Box
Strana 435 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Mail
Dialog Box
Mail Dialog Box
Click Attach to E-mail on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Mail in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Mail dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Mail Dialog Box
Strana 436 z celkového počtu 684
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
File Size
Select a size from Small (fits in a 640 by 480 window), Medium (fits in a 800 by 600 window), Large
(fits in a 1024 by 768 window) and Original.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages).
Important
You cannot set passwords for PDF files.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages).
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Attachment Settings
Mail Program
Specify an e-mail software program.
Note
Mail Dialog Box
Strana 437 z celkového počtu 684
Select Add... to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e-mail
software program. If the e-mail software program you want to use is not listed, click Add to List
and select it.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans documents with the specified settings.
When scanning is completed, the e-mail software program starts automatically and a new message
screen appears with the image attached.
Page top
OCR Dialog Box
Strana 438 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > OCR
Dialog Box
OCR Dialog Box
Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the OCR
dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
OCR Dialog Box
Strana 439 z celkového počtu 684
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Note
When scanning slanted documents, select the Correct slanted document checkbox to improve
the text recognition accuracy.
Save Settings
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP.
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Application Settings
OCR with
Specify an OCR application.
When MP Navigator EX is specified, after the image is scanned, the text in the image is extracted
and appears in Notepad (included with Windows).
Note
Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to
Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language
according to the language of the document to be scanned.
When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file.
General Tab
Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of
the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
- Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
OCR Dialog Box
Strana 440 z celkového počtu 684
- Slanted documents
- Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with narrow line spacing
- Documents with colors in the background of text
- Documents containing multiple languages
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the text may not be extracted correctly or the application
may not start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans documents with the specified settings.
Page top
Custom Dialog Box
Strana 441 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom
Dialog Box
Custom Dialog Box
Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the
Custom dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is
automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically
set as well.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case,
specify the document type or size.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
Custom Dialog Box
Strana 442 z celkového počtu 684
To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Custom dialog box will be
disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
Note
If an application to start is specified in Application Settings, the scanned image opens in the
specified application.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed and selected by default when Document Type
is Auto Mode.
Important
When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
Custom Dialog Box
Strana 443 z celkového počtu 684
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow
(alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is
Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an
option other than Auto in Save as type.
If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in
AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable.
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo
each.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB
Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB.
Important
This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto
Mode.
This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed.
Note
You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an
underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg)
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information)
Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings
such as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Save Dialog Box
Application Settings
Custom Dialog Box
Strana 444 z celkového počtu 684
Open with
Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application
that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images
are scanned.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application
may not start.
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application to start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Preferences Dialog Box
Strana 445 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens >
Preferences Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box.
In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions via the
General and Scanner Button Settings tabs.
Note
See the corresponding sections below for details on each tab.
General Tab
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Page top
General Tab
Strana 446 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > General
Tab
General Tab
On the General tab, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings.
Product Name
Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use.
If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
Save in (My Box)
Displays the folder in which to save scanned documents. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Location of Temporary Files
Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
Important
An error may occur if you set the destination to the root directory of the drive on which the
operating system is installed. Be sure to specify a folder.
An error may occur if you set the destination to a network folder. Be sure to specify a local folder.
Application to run
Displays the applications that can be started via MP Navigator EX. Install the applications from the
Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine.
For Attach to E-mail, you can select an e-mail software program to start.
For Open PDF file, the application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system is
displayed.
General Tab
Strana 447 z celkového počtu 684
Important
You can change which items are installed during installation from the Setup CD-ROM by
selecting Custom Install. If you choose not to install some applications with Custom Install, the
corresponding MP Navigator EX functions will be unavailable. To use those functions, install the
corresponding applications.
Note
For Convert to text file, Notepad (included with Windows) is displayed. Click Set... to open a dialog
box, then specify Document Language and how to scan multiple documents.
Document Language
Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. Only text
written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to
Notepad.
Combine multiple text conversion results
When scanning multiple documents, select the checkbox to collect the conversion results (text)
into one file. This checkbox is selected by default.
When the checkbox is selected, you can scan up to 99 pages at one time.
Deselect the checkbox to display each conversion result (text) in a separate file.
When the checkbox is not selected, you can scan up to 10 pages at one time.
Page top
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Strana 448 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner
Button Settings Tab (Save)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
You can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Event
Select Event
Save to PC is set.
Document Type
Auto Scan is set. The document type is automatically detected.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Scan. In that case,
specify the document type or size in MP Navigator EX.
See "Scanning Photos and Documents " to scan images using MP Navigator EX.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Strana 449 z celkového počtu 684
Actions
Scan Settings
Document Size
This setting is automatically set.
Resolution
This setting is automatically set.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File Name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters).
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed by default.
Important
When Document Type is Auto Scan and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/
arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save
as type is Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
Note
If you select the Enable Auto Photo Fix checkbox in the Scan Settings dialog box and then
select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type, a message appears and the Enable
Auto Photo Fix checkbox will be deselected.
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document
type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for saving Document
and Photo each.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse...
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Strana 450 z celkového počtu 684
to specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date
and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date) will be created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
Select this to open the save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such
as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Note
See "Save Dialog Box " for details.
Page top
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
Strana 451 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than
Scanned Images
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX.
Using images saved on a computer
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Strana 452 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than
Scanned Images > Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail using MP Navigator
EX. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. In the Navigation Mode screen, point to View & Use and click My Box (Scanned/
Imported Images), Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images.
Click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) to open images saved in My Box (Scanned/Imported
Images), click Specify Folder to open images saved in a specific folder, or click Recently Saved
Images to open recently saved images.
Note
If the Show this window at startup checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. If
the Scan/Import window is displayed, click
(View & Use) on the upper left of the screen.
The View & Use window opens.
See " View & Use Images on your Computer Tab " for details on the View & Use Images on your
Computer tab.
3. Click the folder containing the images you want to open.
Images saved in the folder appear in the Thumbnail window.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Strana 453 z celkového počtu 684
4. Select the images you want to use, then select what you want to do with them.
See the corresponding sections below for details on using images.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Strana 454 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru
Čo je to ScanGear (ovládač skenera)?
Skenovanie s rozšírenými nastaveniami pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Oprava obrázkov a úprava farieb pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Obrazovky programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera)
Príloha: Užitočné informácie o skenovaní
Na začiatok strany
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Strana 455 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the
output size and make image corrections when scanning.
ScanGear (scanner driver) can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are
compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN. (ScanGear (scanner driver) is a TWAIN-compatible
driver.)
What You Can Do with This Software
This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size, etc. when
scanning documents. It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone, as it allows you to make
various corrections and adjust brightness, contrast, etc.
Screens
There are three modes: Basic Mode, Advanced Mode and Auto Scan Mode.
Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen.
Note
ScanGear (scanner driver) starts in the last used mode.
Settings are not retained when you switch between modes.
Basic Mode
Use Basic Mode to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps (
,
and
).
Advanced Mode
Use Advanced Mode to specify color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when
scanning.
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Strana 456 z celkového počtu 684
Auto Scan Mode
Use Auto Scan Mode to scan easily by simply placing the document on the Platen and clicking Scan.
Page top
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Strana 457 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner
Driver)
Starting ScanGear (scanner driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning documents after making simple image corrections
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and brightness/color adjustments
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning with a simple operation
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Scanning multiple documents at one time after making image corrections and color adjustments
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page top
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Strana 458 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning.
ScanGear (scanner driver) can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application.
Starting from MP Navigator EX
Navigation Mode Screen
Follow these steps to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from the Navigation Mode screen of MP Navigator
EX.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
The Scan/Import window opens.
3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox, then click Open Scanner Driver.
The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears.
One-click Mode Screen
Follow these steps to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from the One-click Mode screen of MP Navigator
EX.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the One-click Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Click the corresponding icon.
The corresponding dialog box opens.
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Strana 459 z celkového počtu 684
3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox in Scan Settings, then click Scan.
The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears.
Important
Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the PDF dialog box or Auto Scan dialog box.
Starting from an Application
Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from an application.
The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, refer to the application's manual.
1. Start the application.
2. On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine.
3. Select the command to scan a document (Scan/Import, Acquire image, etc.).
The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears.
Page top
Scanning in Basic Mode
Strana 460 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Basic Mode
In Basic Mode, you can scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
This section explains how to scan a single document.
See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple
documents at one time.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
(Thumbnail)
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Important
Place the document face-down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with
the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.
Note
To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine(Color).
Scanning in Basic Mode
Strana 461 z celkového počtu 684
3. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Note
Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source.
4. Set Destination.
5. Set Output Size.
Output size options vary by the items selected in Select Source and Destination.
6. Adjust the scan area (cropping frame) as required.
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
7. Set Image corrections as required.
8. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
Click
(Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab
Page top
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Strana 462 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
In Advanced Mode, you can specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc.
when scanning.
This section explains how to scan a single document.
See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple
documents at one time.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
(Thumbnail)
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Important
Place the document face-down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with
the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
2. Click Advanced Mode.
The Advanced Mode tab appears.
Note
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Strana 463 z celkového počtu 684
Settings are not retained when you switch between modes.
3. Set Color Mode.
Input Settings
4. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Note
If you scan without preview, the show-through reduction function will be active. This function is
useful when scanning magazines. However, when scanning photos, the color tone of the
scanned image may differ from the source due to the show-through reduction function. In that
case, use preview first.
5. Set Output Settings.
Output Settings
6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image and adjust colors as required.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
7. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
Click
(Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Advanced Mode Tab
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Strana 464 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Strana 465 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
You can scan easily in Auto Scan Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver) by letting it automatically determine
the type of document placed on the Platen.
Note
Supported document types are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD. To scan other documents, specify the document type on the Basic Mode
tab or the Advanced Mode tab.
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Click Auto Scan Mode.
The Auto Scan Mode tab appears.
3. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Strana 466 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne...
Strana 467 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time in Basic Mode and
Advanced Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver).
This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab.
Important
To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view.
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping
frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
Note
See "Scanning in Auto Scan Mode " to scan easily by automatically detecting the document type.
You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab. Use the Advanced
Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image
brightness and color tone.
See the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab.
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne...
Strana 468 z celkového počtu 684
3. Click Preview.
Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Images are cropped (scan areas are
specified) automatically according to the document size.
4. Set Destination.
5. Set Output Size.
6. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames) and set Image corrections as required.
Note
You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.
In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame (scan area) per image.
To create multiple cropping frames in an image, scan in whole image view.
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
7. Select the images you want to scan.
Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne...
Strana 469 z celkového počtu 684
8. Click Scan.
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan
multiple documents as a single image.
Note
Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view.
1. After previewing images, click
(Thumbnail) on the Toolbar.
Switch to whole image view.
Note
When the whole image is displayed, the icon changes to
(Whole Image).
2. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames).
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image. You can also
create two or more cropping frames.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
3. Set Destination.
4. Set Output Size.
5. Set Image corrections as required.
6. Click Scan.
Areas framed by broken lines are scanned.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne...
Strana 470 z celkového počtu 684
Note
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Page top
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner D...
Strana 471 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
The following sections provide you with tips and know-how on advanced scanning techniques involving
color/brightness adjustment, etc.
Sharpening out-of-focus photos, reducing dust and scratches, and correcting faded colors
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
Previewing and changing the color tone of the entire image to scan
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Brightening colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting the color tone using histogram (a graph showing brightness distribution)
Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting the image brightness using tone curve (a graph of brightness balance)
Adjusting Tone Curve
Sharpening characters in text documents or reducing show-through effects
Setting Threshold
Page top
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fa...
Strana 472 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and
Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
The Image Settings functions in Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to enhance
the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches and correct faded colors when scanning images.
Setting Items
Click
(Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu.
Important
Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color
tone may be adversely affected.
See "Image Settings " for details and precautions on each function.
Note
See "Scanning in Advanced Mode " to start ScanGear (scanner driver) in Advanced Mode tab and
scan.
Adjusting the image brightness and color tone
Set Image Adjustment to Auto, Photo, Magazine, Newspaper or Document according to the document
type.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fa...
None
Strana 473 z celkového počtu 684
Auto
Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images
Set Unsharp Mask to ON.
ON
OFF
Reducing gradations and stripe patterns
Set Descreen to ON.
ON
OFF
Note
"Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or
pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Reducing dust and scratches
Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of dust and scratches.
Medium
None
Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast
Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast.
None
Medium
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fa...
Strana 474 z celkového počtu 684
Reducing graininess
Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of graininess.
None
Medium
Correcting backlit images
Set Backlight Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of backlight.
None
Medium
Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets
Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of shadows.
None
Medium
Page top
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Strana 475 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the Color Pattern function in
ScanGear's Basic Mode tab.
Color Adjustment
Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific
color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color.
Cyan & red, magenta & green and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a
shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color
and increasing the complementary color.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Strana 476 z celkového počtu 684
It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so
that the portion turns white.
Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them.
Below is an example of correcting a bluish image.
Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct.
Before
After
Note
Color adjustments are applied only to the scan area (cropping frame) or the frame selected in
thumbnail view.
You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern
screen.
You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image. Increase the magenta to add a
warm tint, and increase the blue to add a cool tint.
Page top
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Strana 477 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Saturation/Color Balance).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Saturation
Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc.
Move
(slider) under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation (darken the image), and to the
right to increase the saturation (brighten the image). You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Saturation decreased
Original image
Saturation increased
Note
The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much.
Color Balance
Adjust images that have a colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire
picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Move
Strana 478 z celkového počtu 684
(slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.
Cyan & Red
Magenta & Green
Yellow & Blue
These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can
reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary
color.
It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is recommended
that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all three color pairs so that the
portion turns white.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Below is an example of an image in which the "Cyan & Red" pair has been adjusted.
Cyan is increased
Red is increased
Page top
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Strana 479 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Brightness/Contrast).
Note
Click
(Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click
(Up arrow) to return to the previous view.
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Strana 480 z celkového počtu 684
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Brightness
Adjust the image brightness. Move
(slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten
the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Darkened
Original image
Brightened
Note
Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken
the image too much.
Contrast
"Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing
contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image. Decreasing contrast will decrease the
difference, thus softening the image.
Move
(slider) under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Decreased contrast
Original image
Increased contrast
Note
Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three-dimensional feel to soft images. However,
shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much.
Page top
Adjusting Histogram
Strana 481 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting Histogram
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Histogram).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Reading Histograms
You can open Histogram of a specified area for each Channel. The higher the Histogram peak, the more
data is distributed to that level.
Adjusting Histogram
Strana 482 z celkového počtu 684
(1) Bright area
(2) Dark area
(3) Whole image
More data is distributed to the
highlight side.
More data is distributed to the
Data is widely distributed between the
highlight and shadow.
shadow side.
Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider)
Select a Channel, then move
set as the shadow or highlight.
- All parts to the left of
- The parts at
(Black-point Slider) or
(White-point Slider) to specify the level to be
(Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0).
(Mid-point Slider) will turn to the color exactly between the black-point and white-point.
- All parts to the right of
(White-point Slider) will turn white (level 255).
Image Adjustment is Auto by default. Adjustments shown below are automatically performed.
Moving the Black-point and White-point Sliders
Move the Black-point Slider or White-point Slider to adjust brightness.
Images with more data distributed to the highlight side
Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side.
Images with more data distributed to the shadow side
Move the White-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Images with widely distributed data
Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side, and White-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Histogram
Strana 483 z celkového počtu 684
Moving the Mid-point Slider
Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range.
Images with more data distributed to the highlight side
Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side.
Images with more data distributed to the shadow side
Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Histograms (Using the Droppers)
When you select a Channel and click the Black-point, Mid-point or White-point Dropper, the mouse
pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper. Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to
change the setting.
- The point clicked with
to 245).
(Black-point Dropper) will be the darkest point. You can also enter a value (0
- The point clicked with
a value (5 to 250).
(Mid-point Dropper) will be the middle of the tonal range. You can also enter
- The point clicked with
(10 to 255).
(White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a value
- Click
(Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview
image.
The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted
accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole
image and reproduce natural colors.
Page top
Adjusting Tone Curve
Strana 484 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Tone Curve
Adjusting Tone Curve
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Tone Curve Settings).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Reading Tone Curves
With ScanGear (scanner driver), scanning images via a scanner is the input, and displaying to a monitor
is the output. "Tone Curve" shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel.
Adjusting Tone Curve
Strana 485 z celkového počtu 684
Adjusting Tone Curve
In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High
contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image and Edit custom curve.
No correction (No adjustment)
Overexposure (Convex curve)
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a
bright-toned image when viewed on a monitor.
Underexposure (Concave curve)
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side, resulting in a darktoned image when viewed on a monitor.
High contrast (S curve)
The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced, resulting in a high-contrast image.
Reverse the negative/positive image (Downward-sloping line)
The input and output sides are reversed, resulting in a negative-positive inverted image.
Adjusting Tone Curve
Strana 486 z celkového počtu 684
Edit custom curve
You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding
areas.
Page top
Setting Threshold
Strana 487 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Setting Threshold
Setting Threshold
The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in
creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is
the borderline value that determines a color as black or white. By adjusting the threshold level, you can
sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White.
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Threshold).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Adjusting Threshold
Move
(slider) to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas. Move the
slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas. You can also enter a value (0 to
255).
Page top
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Strana 488 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
The following sections describe ScanGear's screens and functions, and how to use ScanGear (scanner
driver).
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
Input Settings
Output Settings
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Preferences Dialog Box
Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Basic Mode Tab
Strana 489 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Basic Mode Tab
Basic Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
This section describes the settings and functions available in Basic Mode.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Settings and Operation Buttons
Select Source
Photo(Color)
Scan color photos.
Magazine(Color)
Scan color magazines.
Newspaper(Grayscale)
Scan text and line drawings in black and white.
Document(Grayscale)
Scan documents and photos in black and white.
Select this mode to create high-resolution black and white images.
Note
When you select a document type, colors are adjusted based on the Unsharp Mask function or
document type.
If you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be active.
Display Preview Image
Basic Mode Tab
Strana 490 z celkového počtu 684
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Note
When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a while
until the preview image appears.
Destination
Select what you want to do with the scanned image.
Print
Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.
Image display
Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.
OCR
Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.
OCR software is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be
edited in word processors and other programs.
Output Size
Select an output size.
Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.
Flexible
Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames.
In thumbnail view
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a
cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Paper Size (L, A4, etc.)
Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of
the selected paper size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining
the aspect ratio.
Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)
Select an output size in pixels.
Basic Mode Tab
Strana 491 z celkového počtu 684
A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed and the portion within the
cropping frame will be scanned. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while
maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.
You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save
them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected,
along with the predefined items.
Add
To add a size, enter Output Size Name, Width and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can
select mm or inches when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination
is Image display. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save
the items listed in Output Size List.
Delete
To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items
listed in Output Size List.
Important
You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
Note
Save up to 10 items.
An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the setting range.
Note
Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified
on the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box. See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in
"Preview Tab ."
Invert aspect ratio
This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Adjust cropping frames
You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Basic Mode Tab
Strana 492 z celkového počtu 684
Image corrections
Fading correction
Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.
Backlight correction
Corrects photos that have been shot against light.
Gutter shadow correction
Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
For precautions on using this function, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings
" (Advanced Mode tab).
Color Pattern...
Allows you to adjust the image's overall color. You can correct colors that have faded due to
colorcast, etc. and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Perform Scan
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
Toolbar
Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view
In whole image view
Basic Mode Tab
Strana 493 z celkového počtu 684
(Thumbnail)/
(Whole image view)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
Preview Area
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in
the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping
area within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames.
All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the
cropping frames.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear (scanner driver) and the current scan settings (document
type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
This page appears.
Preview Area
Preview Area
This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the
settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ."
When
(Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar
Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the
Basic Mode Tab
Strana 494 z celkového počtu 684
checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
- Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
- Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and
Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while
pressing the Ctrl key.
- Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
(Frame Advance) at the bottom of
Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click
the screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the
display to its non-magnified state.
When
(Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar
Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be
scanned.
Note
You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can
only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping
frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab
Strana 495 z celkového počtu 684
Scanning in Basic Mode
Page top
Advanced Mode Tab
Strana 496 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Advanced Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution,
image brightness and color tone.
This section describes the settings and functions available in Advanced Mode.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Settings and Operation Buttons
Favorite Settings
You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings and
Color Adjustment Buttons) on Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to save a
group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default
settings.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu and the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box
opens.
Advanced Mode Tab
Strana 497 z celkového počtu 684
Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Favorite Settings List.
When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save settings
displayed in Favorite Settings List.
Note
You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview.
Save up to 10 items.
Input Settings
Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.
Input Settings
Output Settings
Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.
Output Settings
Image Settings
Enable/disable various image correction functions.
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
These buttons can be used to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones. You
can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow values
(histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Color Adjustment Buttons
Zoom
Zooms in on an image or the portion within the cropping frame. When the image is zoomed in,
Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its non-magnified state.
In thumbnail view
Zooms in on the selected image. Click
display the previous or next frame.
(Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to
Note
You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the frame again
to return the display to its non-magnified state.
In whole image view
Rescans the portion within the cropping frame at higher magnification.
Note
Zoom rescans the image and displays high-resolution image in Preview.
(Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the
resolution of the displayed image will be low.
Preview
Advanced Mode Tab
Strana 498 z celkového počtu 684
Performs a trial scan.
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in "
Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain
size. In that case, a warning message appears. It is recommended that you reduce the total
size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
Toolbar
Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view
In whole image view
(Thumbnail)/
(Whole image view)
Advanced Mode Tab
Strana 499 z celkového počtu 684
Switches the view in the Preview area.
Preview Area
(Clear)
Click this button to delete the preview image.
It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings.
(Crop)
Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.
(Move Image)
If an enlarged image is too large to fit in the Preview area, you can click this button and drag the
image across the screen until the part you want to see is displayed. You can also move the
image using the scroll bars.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Click this button then click on the image to enlarge it (zoom in). Right-click on the image to
reduce it (zoom out).
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in
the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping
area within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames.
All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the
cropping frames.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Advanced Mode Tab
Strana 500 z celkového počtu 684
Displays the version of ScanGear (scanner driver) and the current scan settings (document
type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
This page appears.
Preview Area
Preview Area
This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the
settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ."
When
(Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar
Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the
checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
- Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
- Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and
Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while
pressing the Ctrl key.
- Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
When
(Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar
Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be
scanned.
Advanced Mode Tab
Strana 501 z celkového počtu 684
Note
You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can
only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping
frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Related Topic
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Page top
Input Settings
Strana 502 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Input
Settings
Input Settings
Input Settings allows you to set the following items:
Select Source
The type of document to be scanned is displayed.
Paper Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole film image view only.
When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly.
Important
Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive. ScanGear (scanner
driver) can scan data that is of:
- 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less
If you change Paper Size after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
Note
If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size, set Paper Size to Full Platen, then
measure the size of the document and enter the values into
(Width) and
(Height).
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Color
Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the
image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Grayscale
Select this mode to scan black and white photos, or to create black and white images. This mode
Input Settings
Strana 503 z celkového počtu 684
renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Black and White
Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white. This mode renders the
image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold level)
into black and white and is rendered in two colors. The threshold level can be set with
(Threshold).
Input Size
In thumbnail view, the cropped document size is displayed after preview.
In whole image view, the Paper Size is displayed before preview, and the cropping frame (scan area)
size is displayed after preview.
You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into
Click
(Keep Aspect Ratio) and change it to
specify the cropping frame size.
(Width) and
(Height).
(Locked) to maintain the aspect ratio when you
Important
Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible. If you select
a size other than Flexible, a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output Resolution is
displayed, and its aspect ratio is fixed.
Note
The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum
size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100%.
When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since
the size will be prioritized.
See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames.
Page top
Output Settings
Strana 504 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Output Settings
Output Settings
Output Settings allows you to set the following items:
Output Resolution
Select the resolution to scan at.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value within the range
of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi (in 1 dpi increments).
Resolution
Output Size
Select an output size.
Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying. Select Add/Delete... to set
custom size and save it as a new output size option.
Flexible
You can specify the output resolution and scale, and adjust the cropping frame.
In thumbnail view
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Note
To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into
(Width) and
(Height) in
Output Settings
Strana 505 z celkového počtu 684
Output Settings or specify a value (by 1%) for %. The maximum value available for %
depends on the Output Resolution. % can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum
available output resolution).
Paper Size (L, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)
Width, height and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped according to the
selected output size and resolution. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the
size of the selected paper/monitor size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge, reduce or
move it while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save them
at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
Add
To add a size, select Print or Image display for Destination, then enter Output Size Name, Width,
and Height then click Add. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List.
Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.
Delete
To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items listed
in Output Size List.
Important
You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
Note
Save up to 10 items for each destination.
An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the range displayed in the message.
Unit varies by Destination. For Print, select mm or inches. For Image display, the unit is
pixels.
Note
See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames.
Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified on
the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box. See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "
Preview Tab ."
(Switch Aspect Ratio)
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Data Size
An image file is created when the preview image is scanned. Its size when saved in BMP format is
displayed.
Note
When the file size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning
Output Settings
Strana 506 z celkového počtu 684
message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce
Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Page top
Image Settings
Strana 507 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Image Settings
Image Settings
Important
Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color
tone may be adversely affected.
Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image.
Note
Selectable settings depend on color mode settings.
Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings.
Image Settings allows you to set the following items:
Image Adjustment
When Image Adjustment is set, the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized.
Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified
document type. The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image. This setting is Auto by
default.
None
Image Adjustment will not be applied.
Auto
Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type. It is recommended that
you normally select this setting.
Photo
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to photos.
Magazine
Image Settings
Strana 508 z celkového počtu 684
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to magazines.
Newspaper
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to newspapers.
Document
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to text documents.
Important
You can set Image Adjustment after preview.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type.
The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set
Image Adjustment to None.
Unsharp Mask
When this is set to ON, the outline of the subjects is emphasized to sharpen the image. This setting is
ON by default.
Descreen
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. This setting is OFF by default.
Note
Even if Descreen is set to ON, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON. In
that case, set Unsharp Mask to OFF.
Selecting Magazine(Color) in Select Source in Basic Mode tab has the same effect as setting
Descreen to ON in Advanced Mode tab.
Reduce Dust and Scratches
Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches. Use this function to reduce such
noise. This setting is None by default.
None
Dust and scratches will not be reduced.
Low
Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to reduce small/large dust particles and scratches. Evidence of the reduction process
may remain and may also remove delicate parts of the image.
Important
This function may not be effective for some types of photos.
Note
It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials.
Fading Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. Colorcast is a
phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong
colors. This setting is None by default.
None
Image Settings
Strana 509 z celkového počtu 684
Fading correction will not be applied.
Low
Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast. This can affect the tone of the image.
Important
You can set Fading Correction after preview.
Fading Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Grain Correction
Use this function to reduce graininess (roughness) in photos taken with high-speed or sensitized film.
This setting is None by default.
None
Graininess will not be reduced.
Low
Select this when the photo is slightly grainy.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the photo is very grainy. This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the
image.
Important
Grain Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Backlight Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have been shot against light.
When you change the Backlight Correction setting, the result will be reflected in the preview image.
This setting is None by default.
None
Backlight correction will not be applied.
Low
Select this to correct slightly backlit photos. This will not affect the image contrast.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to correct strongly backlit photos. This can affect the image contrast.
Important
You can set Backlight Correction after preview.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Note
Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied. Applying Grain Correction and
Image Settings
Strana 510 z celkového počtu 684
setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns.
Gutter Shadow Correction
Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected.
Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is
pressed.
Unclear or blurred text/lines caused by curved pages are not corrected. This setting is None by default.
None
Gutter shadow will not be corrected.
Low
Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting.
Important
Do not place items that weigh 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) or more on the Platen. Also, do not press on the
document with a force exceeding 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg). If you press heavily, the scanner may not work
correctly or you might break the glass.
Align the document with the edge of the Platen. If not, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document. If the page background is
not white, shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all.
While scanning, press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview
the scan. If the binding part is not even, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned.
Note
Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan
results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen.
If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page top
Color Adjustment Buttons
Strana 511 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color
Adjustment Buttons
Color Adjustment Buttons
The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color
tones. You can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow
values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Important
The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Note
Selectable settings depend on color mode settings.
When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons, the results will be reflected in the
preview image.
Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items:
(Saturation/Color Balance)
Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image. Use this function to brighten colors that have faded
with time or due to colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire
picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
(Brightness/Contrast)
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. If the image is too dark or too bright, or if the image
quality is flat due to lack of contrast, you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Color Adjustment Buttons
Strana 512 z celkového počtu 684
(Histogram)
A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can
specify the darkest level (shadow) and brightest level (highlight) within an image, cut the levels and
expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.
Adjusting Histogram
(Tone Curve Settings)
Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of
tone input and output. You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area.
Adjusting Tone Curve
(Final Review)
Make a final check of color adjustments. The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived
from the subsequent image processing will be displayed. There are no settings to make in this
screen.
For a color image, select a color in Channel to check either Red, Green or Blue, or select Master to
check three colors together.
If you place the cursor on the preview image, the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values (only
K when Color Mode is Grayscale) before and after the adjustments will be displayed.
(Threshold)
Set the boundary (threshold) at which black and white are divided. By adjusting the threshold level, you
can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Setting Threshold
Custom
You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu. When Color Mode is set to anything but Black and
White, the Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens. When Color Mode is Black and White,
the Add/Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens.
Color Adjustment Buttons
Strana 513 z celkového počtu 684
Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold
Settings List.
Click Save to save.
You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the
settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu.
To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.
Click Save to save settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List.
Note
Save up to 20 items.
Defaults
Reset all adjustments (saturation/color balance, brightness/contrast, histogram and tone curve).
Page top
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Strana 514 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Auto
Scan Mode Tab
Auto Scan Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen and clicking a button.
In Auto Scan Mode, documents are automatically detected. You do not need to specify cropping frames
or make image corrections.
Supported Documents
Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, specify the document
type or size on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab and scan again.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
Scan from the " Basic Mode Tab " or "Advanced Mode Tab " to reduce moire.
Placing Documents
"Placing Documents " appears.
View scanned images
Select this checkbox to display the thumbnails of scanned images in a different window.
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Strana 515 z celkového počtu 684
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in "
Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
Instructions
This page appears.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
Related Topic
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Page top
Preferences Dialog Box
Strana 516 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Preferences Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
Click Preferences... in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen to open Preferences dialog box.
In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear (scanner driver) functions
via the Scanner, Preview, Scan and Color Settings tabs.
Scanner Tab
Allows you to specify a folder to save images temporarily and a music file to play during or at the end of a
scan.
Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started and how to
display cropping frames after previewing images. You can also select the cropping size for thumbnails of
scanned documents.
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images.
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab
Allows you to select how to adjust color, and specify the monitor gamma value.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Scanner Tab
Strana 517 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Scanner Tab
Scanner Tab
On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings.
Quiet Mode
Select this checkbox to reduce scanner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or
scanning documents. This checkbox is not selected by default.
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved
Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
Sound Settings
You can set the machine to play music during/at the end of a scan.
Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox, then
click Browse... and specify a sound file.
You can specify the following files.
- MIDI file (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi)
- Audio file (*.wav, *.aif, *.aiff)
- MP3 file (*.mp3)
Calibration Settings
When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing
and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images.
Note
Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in
some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on).
Calibration may take time depending on your computer.
Scanner Tab
Strana 518 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Preview Tab
Strana 519 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Preview Tab
Preview Tab
On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings.
Preview at Start of ScanGear
Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started. Display Saved Preview
Image is selected by default.
Automatically Execute Preview
ScanGear (scanner driver) will automatically start previewing at startup.
Display Saved Preview Image
The previously previewed image will be displayed.
The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings
are also saved.
None
No preview image will be displayed at startup.
Note
Select None if you do not want to save the preview image.
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images
Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images. Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed
Images is selected by default.
Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images
The cropping frame will automatically be displayed in the document size after previewing.
Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images
A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after
previewing.
None
Preview Tab
Strana 520 z celkového počtu 684
No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing.
Cropping Size for Thumbnail View
Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents. Standard is selected by default.
Larger
Displays 105% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Standard
The standard size.
Smaller
Displays 95% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Note
When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be
refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color
adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset.
Page top
Scan Tab
Strana 521 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scan
Tab
Scan Tab
On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings.
Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images. Close ScanGear
automatically is selected by default.
Close ScanGear automatically
Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed.
Do not close ScanGear automatically
Select this to return to the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen for another scan when scanning is
completed.
Display the dialog to select next action
Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed.
Note
Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set,
some applications may not support it.
Page top
Color Settings Tab
Strana 522 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color
Settings Tab
Color Settings Tab
On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
Color Adjustment
Select either of the following. Recommended is selected by default.
This function is available when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale.
Recommended
Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you
normally select this setting.
Color Matching
Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor and color printer colors, thus reducing
time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors.
Color Adjustment Buttons will be disabled.
This function is available when Color Mode is Color.
- Source(Scanner): Select scanner profile.
- Target: Select target profile.
- Monitor: Select this to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor.
- Defaults: Returns to the default Color Matching settings.
None
Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear (scanner driver).
Note
Color Matching is available when ScanGear (scanner driver), monitor, color managementcompliant application (such as Adobe Photoshop) and printer are set up correctly.
Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer and application settings.
Monitor Gamma
By setting the gamma value of a monitor, you can adjust the input data to the brightness
characteristics of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the
Color Settings Tab
Strana 523 z celkového počtu 684
default value set in ScanGear (scanner driver), and the colors of the original image are not accurately
reflected in the monitor.
Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20).
Note
Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual,
contact the manufacturer.
Page top
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Strana 524 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Adjusting the cropping frame (scan area)
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Selecting the best resolution
Resolution
Learning about file formats
File Formats
Learning about Color Matching
Color Matching
Matching the colors between the document and monitor
See Monitor Gamma in the following section.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Strana 525 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Adjusting Cropping Frames
You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area
of the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. When you click Scan, only the portion within the cropping frame
will be scanned and passed to the application.
Cropping Frame Types
(1) Focus Cropping Frame (rotating thick broken lines)
The settings in Basic Mode or Advanced Mode will be applied.
(2) Selected Cropping Frame (stationary thick broken lines)
The settings will be applied to the Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames
simultaneously. You can select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
(3) Unselected Cropping Frame (stationary thin broken lines)
The settings will not be applied.
Note
Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are displayed in whole image view.
Initial Cropping Frame
In thumbnail view
Cropping frame is not displayed initially. Drag the mouse over a frame to create a cropping frame.
In whole image view
A cropping frame (Focus Cropping Frame) is displayed automatically around the preview image
according to the document size. You can also create a cropping frame by dragging the mouse in the
Preview area.
Note
Cropping frames are set according to the document size (Auto Crop) by default. For details, see
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box).
Adjusting a Cropping Frame
(Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you
The cursor will change into
click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract
accordingly.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Strana 526 z celkového počtu 684
(Crosshair arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click
The cursor will change into
and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.
Note
In Advanced Mode, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into Width and
Height in Input Settings.
Input Settings
(Switch Aspect Ratio). However,
You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking
(Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible.
Creating Multiple Cropping Frames
In thumbnail view
You can only create one cropping frame per image.
In whole image view
Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame
in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the Focus Cropping Frame, and the old cropping
frame will be the Unselected Cropping Frame.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Strana 527 z celkového počtu 684
You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame.
You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear (scanner
driver), the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames.
When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.
Note
Create up to 12 cropping frames.
Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected.
Deleting Cropping Frames
In thumbnail view
To delete a cropping frame, click an area outside the cropping frame on an image.
In whole image view
To delete a cropping frame, select it and click
Alternatively, press the Delete key.
(Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar.
When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (Focus Cropping Frame and
Selected Cropping Frames) are deleted simultaneously.
Page top
Resolution
Strana 528 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Resolution
Resolution
What is Resolution?
The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and
color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail
your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per square
inch (2.54 cm square).
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less
detail.
Setting the Resolution in MP Navigator EX
In MP Navigator EX, you can specify the resolution with Scanning Resolution in the Scan Settings dialog
box.
Images for Printing
Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution that corresponds to the resolution of the printer.
For example, if you want to print using a 600 dpi black and white printer, you should set the resolution to
600 dpi.
With a color printer, specifying the resolution at half the resolution of the printer should be fine. For
example, if you want to print scanned paper/photos using a 600 dpi color printer, you should set the
resolution to 300 dpi. However, with a high-resolution printer, printing takes longer than usual if you set
the resolution to half the resolution of the printer.
Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale
If you print a document at twice the size both vertically and horizontally, the resolution of the document will
be reduced by half. If the resolution of the original document is 300 dpi, the resolution of the enlarged
document will be 150 dpi. If you print the document with a 600 dpi color printer, the lack of detail in the
image may be obvious. In that case, if you scan at the Scanning Resolution of 600 dpi, the resolution will
be 300 dpi even if you double the size of document and you can print the document with sufficient quality.
Conversely, if you print a document at half scale, it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution.
When Printing Color Photos at Twice the Size
Document resolution: 300
dpi
Scanning resolution: 600
dpi
Scale: 200%
Print at twice the size
Scanning resolution/actual scanning
resolution: 600 dpi
Printing resolution: 300
dpi
Setting the Resolution in ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
In ScanGear (scanner driver), you can specify the resolution with Output Resolution in Output Settings on
Resolution
Strana 529 z celkového počtu 684
the Advanced Mode tab.
Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale
The scanning resolution is automatically set so that the value set in Output Resolution will be the
resolution of the scanned image. If you set Output Resolution to 300 dpi and scan at twice the size, the
document will be automatically scanned at 600 dpi, and the resolution of the scanned image will be 300
dpi. You can print the document with sufficient quality using a 600 dpi color printer.
When Printing L Size (8.9 cm x 12.7 cm) Photos at Twice the Size
Document resolution: 300
dpi
Output resolution: 300 dpi
Scale: 200%
Scan at twice the size
Actual scanning resolution: 600
Image resolution/printing resolution:
300 dpi
dpi
Appropriate Resolution Settings
Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image.
For displaying on a monitor: 150 dpi
For printing: 300 dpi
When Output Size is set to Flexible in ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab (Select Source is Platen and the
scale is 100%):
Document
Use
Color Mode
Output
Resolution
Copying
(Printing)
Color
300 dpi
Creating a postcard
Color
300 dpi
Saving to a computer
Color
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Using on a website or attaching
to e-mail
Color
75 dpi - 150 dpi
Black and white
photo
Saving to a computer
Grayscale
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Using on a website or attaching
to e-mail
Grayscale
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Text document
Copying
Color, Grayscale or Black
and White
300 dpi
Attaching to e-mail
Color, Grayscale or Black
and White
300 dpi
Color photo
Important
If you double the resolution, the file size quadruples. If the file is too large, the processing speed will
slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory. Set the
minimum required resolution according to the use of the image.
Note
Although you can change Output Resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver), it is recommended that
you scan at the default value.
Page top
File Formats
Strana 530 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
File Formats
File Formats
You can select a file format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable format
according to how you want to use the image on which application.
Available file formats vary by application and computer (Windows or Macintosh).
See below for the characteristics of each image file format.
BMP (Standard File Extension: .bmp)
A standard file format for Windows.
BMP is often selected for images that are used only on Windows.
JPEG (Standard File Extension: .jpg)
A file format often used on websites and for digital camera images.
JPEG features high compression rates. JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved, and
cannot be returned to their original state.
JPEG is not available for black and white images.
Exif (Standard File Extension: .jpg)
A file format supported by many digital cameras.
It adds information such as the date of image capture, camera model, shutter speed, shooting mode
and comments to JPEG files.
The file format version must be Exif 2.2 or later in order to print on a Direct Print compatible printer.
TIFF (Standard File Extension: .tif)
A file format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications. (Some
TIFF files are incompatible.) TIFF is suitable for editing saved images.
Note
MP Navigator EX supports the following TIFF file formats.
- Uncompressed, black and white binary
- Uncompressed, RGB (8 bits per channel)
- Uncompressed, YCC (8 bits per component)
- Uncompressed, RGB (16 bits per channel)
- Uncompressed, YCC (16 bits per component)
- Uncompressed, Grayscale
PDF (Standard File Extension: .pdf)
A file format developed by Adobe Systems. It can be used on various computers and operating systems.
Therefore, PDF files can be exchanged between people who use different operating systems, fonts, etc.
regardless of the differences.
Important
Only PDF files created with MP Navigator EX are supported. PDF files created or edited in other
applications are not supported.
Page top
Color Matching
Strana 531 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Color Matching
Color Matching
Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor
or a printed image with the colors of the original document.
Example: When sRGB is selected as the output profile (target)
Input Profile (Source)
Scanner
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Output Profile (Target)
sRGB
OS
Application
Application
Printer Driver
Monitor
Printer
ScanGear (scanner driver) converts the image's color space from the scanner's color space to sRGB.
When displaying on a monitor, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor's color
space based on the operating system's monitor settings and the application's working space settings.
When printing, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the printer's color space based on the
application's print settings and the printer driver's settings.
Page top
Ďalšie skenovacie postupy
Strana 532 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Ďalšie skenovacie postupy
Ďalšie skenovacie postupy
Skenovanie pomocou ovládača WIA
Skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela (iba pre systém Windows XP)
Na začiatok strany
Scanning with WIA Driver
Strana 533 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning with WIA Driver
Scanning with WIA Driver
You can scan an image from a WIA-compliant application and use the image in that application.
The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only.
For details, refer to the application's manual.
Important
In Windows 2000, you cannot scan using the WIA driver.
Scanning with WIA Driver 2.0
The following is an example of scanning using Windows Photo Gallery.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. In File, click Import from Camera or Scanner..., then double-click WIA Canon (model
name).
The scan setting screen appears.
3. Specify the settings.
Scanner
The currently set product name is displayed. To change the scanner, click Change... and select
the product you want to use.
Profile
Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the document to be scanned. To save a new
Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box.
Source
Select a scanner type.
Paper size
This setting is not available for this machine.
Color format
Select how to scan the document.
Scanning with WIA Driver
Strana 534 z celkového počtu 684
File type
Select a file format from JPEG, BMP, PNG and TIFF.
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi. 300 dpi is set by default.
Resolution
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Preview or scan images as separate files
Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files.
See how to scan a picture
Click to open Windows Help and Support.
4. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right.
5. Click Scan.
When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.
Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0
The following is an example of scanning using Paint.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. In File, click From Scanner or Camera.... (Select the command to scan a document
in the application.)
3. Select an image type according to the document to be scanned.
Note
To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select
Custom Settings.
4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required.
Scanning with WIA Driver
Strana 535 z celkového počtu 684
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your document.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
5. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right. Drag
to specify the scan area.
6. Click Scan.
When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.
Page top
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Strana 536 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver.
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) is a driver model implemented in Windows XP. It allows you to scan
documents without using an application. Scan documents from a TWAIN-compliant application to specify
advanced settings for scanning.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click WIA
Canon (model name).
The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box opens.
3. Click Next.
4. Select Picture type according to the document to be scanned.
Note
To scan with the values previously set in Custom Settings, select Custom.
5. Click Custom Settings to set the preferences as required.
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Strana 537 z celkového počtu 684
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your document.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
6. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right. Drag
to specify the scan area.
7. Click Next and follow the instructions.
Page top
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade...
Strana 538 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre
zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Na začiatok strany
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade...
Strana 539 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač
fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre
zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Na začiatok strany
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade...
Strana 540 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač
fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného
zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre
zariadenie MP270 series)
Pomocou kábla USB odporúčaného výrobcom zariadenia môžete pripojiť zariadenie kompatibilné so
štandardom PictBridge, napríklad digitálny fotoaparát, kamkordér alebo mobilný telefón, k
multifunkčnému zariadeniu a tlačiť zaznamenané obrázky priamo bez použitia počítača.
Poznámka
Pri tlači fotografií so zariadením kompatibilným so štandardom PictBridge pripojeným k
multifunkčnému zariadeniu odporúčame používať sieťový adaptér dodaný s kompatibilným
zaradením. Ak používate batériu kompatibilného zariadenia, skontrolujte, či je úplne nabitá.
V závislosti od modelu alebo značky multifunkčného zariadenia možno budete musieť pred
pripojením kompatibilného zariadenia vybrať režim tlače kompatibilný so štandardom PictBridge.
Po pripojení k multifunkčnému zariadeniu budete možno musieť ručne zapnúť kompatibilné
zariadenie alebo vybrať režim prehrávania.
Pred pripojením k multifunkčnému zariadeniu vykonajte na zariadení kompatibilnom so
štandardom PictBridge všetky potrebné operácie podľa pokynov v príručke tohto kompatibilného
zariadenia.
1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2. Vložte papier do zadného zásobníka.
3. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardnom PictBridge vypnuté.
4. Pripojte zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge k multifunkčnému
zariadeniu pomocou kábla USB (A) odporúčaného výrobcom kompatibilného
zariadenia.
Zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardnom PictBridge sa zapne automaticky.
Ak sa nezapne automaticky, zapnite ho ručne.
Ak je multifunkčné zariadenie správne pripojené ku kompatibilnému zariadeniu, na displeji LED sa
zobrazí písmeno c a na displeji LCD kompatibilného zariadenia sa zobrazí hlásenie, že je
multifunkčné zariadenie pripojené. Pozrite si príručku k zariadeniu.
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade...
Strana 541 z celkového počtu 684
5. Zadajte nastavenia tlače, napríklad typ papiera a rozloženie.
Na zadanie nastavenia môžete použiť ponuku na displeji LCD zariadenia kompatibilného so
štandardom PictBridge. Vyberte typ a veľkosť papiera vloženého do multifunkčného zariadenia.
Nastavenia v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge
6. Spustite tlač zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge.
Dôležité
Nikdy neodpájajte kábel USB počas tlače, ak to výslovne neumožňuje zariadenie kompatibilné
so štandardom PictBridge. Pri odpájaní kábla USB medzi zariadením kompatibilným so
štandardom PictBridge a multifunkčným zariadením postupujte podľa pokynov uvedených v
príručke kompatibilného zariadenia.
Na začiatok strany
Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (le...
Strana 542 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač
fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Informácie o nastaveniach tlače
pomocou štandardu PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu
PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Nastavenia v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge
Táto časť opisuje funkciu PictBridge multifunkčného zariadenia. Informácie o nastavení zariadenia
kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge nájdete v príručke dodanej s týmto zariadením.
Poznámka
V nasledujúcom opise sa názvy položiek nastavenia uvádzajú podľa položiek používaných v
zariadeniach kompatibilných so štandardom PictBridge od spoločnosti Canon. Názvy
položiek nastavenia sa môžu líšiť v závislosti od značky a modelu vášho zariadenia.
Niektoré položky nastavenia vysvetlené v nasledujúcej časti nemusia byť na niektorých
zariadeniach dostupné. Ak v kompatibilnom zariadení nemožno zmeniť nastavenia tlače,
multifunkčné zariadenie vytlačí fotografie použitím nasledujúcich nastavení:
Veľkosť papiera: 4" x 6"/101,6 x 152,4 mm
Typ papiera: Photo
Tlač s okrajmi/bez okrajov: podľa nastavenia fotoaparátu
Rozloženie: 1 na strane
Kvalita tlače: štandardná
Optimalizácia obrazu: na optimalizáciu tlače sa použije funkcia Photo Optimizer PRO.
Táto časť opisuje nastavenia tlače v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge. Pri
ovládaní zariadenia postupujte podľa pokynov uvedených v príručke k zariadeniu.
Veľkosť papiera (Paper
Size)
4 x 6 palcov/10 x 15 cm, 5 x 7 palcov*1, 8 x 10 palcov/20 x 25 cm, A4, 8,
5 x 11 palcov (Letter), 4 x 7,1 palca/10,1 x 18 cm*2
*1 Môže sa vybrať len na niektorých zariadeniach kompatibilných so
štandardom PictBridge značky Canon. (V závislosti od zariadenia sa
nemusí dať vybrať.)
*2 Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge od inej
spoločnosti ako spoločnosť Canon sa môže zobraziť symbol Hi
Vision.
Typ papiera (Paper type)
Predvolené nastavenie (Default): Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-
201
Fotografický papier (Photo):
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201/Glossy Photo Paper „na
každodenné použitie“ GP-501/Photo Paper Glossy GP-502/Photo
Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-201
Fotografický papier na rýchlu tlač (Fast Photo):
Photo Paper Pro II PR-201
Obyčajný papier (Plain):
A4/Letter
Ak je položka Paper type nastavená na možnosť Plain, tlač bez
okrajov bude vypnutá aj v prípade, ak je položka Layout nastavená
na možnosť Borderless.
Rozloženie (Layout)
Predvolené nastavenie (Bez okrajov) (Default (Borderless)), Zoznam
(Index), S okrajmi (Bordered), Bez okrajov (Borderless), 4 na strane (4
-up)*
* Rozloženie kompatibilné s papierom veľkosti A4/Letter.
Tlač dátumu a č. súboru
(Print date & file no.)
Predvolené nastavenie (Default) (Vypnuté: Netlačí sa (Off: No
printing)), Dátum (Date), Č. súboru (File No.), Oba (Both), Vypnuté
(Off)
Optimalizácia obrazu
(Image optimize)
Predvolené nastavenie (Default)*1, Zapnuté (On) (tlač Exif Print),
Vypnuté (Off), Tvár (Face)*2, Červené oči (Red eye)*2
*1 Fotografie sa optimalizujú pre tlač pomocou funkcie Optimalizácia
Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (le...
Strana 543 z celkového počtu 684
fotografií pro (Photo optimizer pro).
*2 Môže sa vybrať len na niektorých zariadeniach kompatibilných so
štandardom PictBridge značky Canon. (V závislosti od zariadenia sa
nemusí dať vybrať.)
Orezanie (Trimming)
Predvolené nastavenie (Default) (Vypnuté: Bez orezania (Off: No
trimming)), Zapnuté (On) (postupujte podľa nastavenia fotoaparátu),
Vypnuté (Off)
Na začiatok strany
Údržba
Strana 544 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba
Údržba
Čistenie zariadenia
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Vykonávanie údržby z počítača
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie zariadenia
Strana 545 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia
Čistenie zariadenia
Čistenie
Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia
Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie
Strana 546 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie
Čistenie
Táto časť opisuje postup čistenia, ktoré je potrebné na údržbu zariadenia.
Dôležité
Na čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia nepoužívajte toaletný papier, papierové utierky, hrubé
tkaniny ani podobné materiály, aby ste nepoškriabali povrch. Používajte mäkkú handričku.
Na čistenie zariadenia nikdy nepoužívajte prchavé kvapaliny ako riedidlo, benzén, acetón ani iné
chemické čistidlá, pretože môžu spôsobiť poruchu zariadenia alebo poškodenie jeho povrchu.
Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia
Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia
Strana 547 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia
Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia
Použite mäkkú handričku na čistenie okuliarov a opatrne ňou utrite nečistoty na povrchu. V prípade
potreby pred čistením vyhlaďte záhyby na handričke.
Dôležité
Pred čistením vždy vypnite zariadenie a vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z elektrickej siete.
Nepoužívajte toaletný papier, papierové utierky, hrubé tkaniny ani podobné materiály, pretože by
mohli poškriabať povrch.
Na začiatok strany
Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov
Strana 548 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov
Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov
Dôležité
Pred čistením vždy vypnite zariadenie a vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z elektrickej siete.
Čistou mäkkou handričkou, ktorá nepúšťa vlákna, jemne utrite ploché predlohové sklo (A) a vnútornú
stranu krytu dokumentov (bielu plochu) (B). Dávajte pozor, aby najmä na plochom predlohovom skle
nezostali žiadne zvyšky.
Dôležité
Vnútorná strana krytu dokumentov (biela plocha) (B) sa môže ľahko poškodiť, a preto ju utierajte
opatrne.
Na začiatok strany
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Strana 549 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Na začiatok strany
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Strana 550 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak je výsledok tlače neuspokojivý, upravte polohu tlačovej
hlavy.
Poznámka
Ak je v kazete nedostatok atramentu, hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nevytlačí správne.
Vymeňte kazety FINE, v ktorých je nedostatok atramentu.
Bežná údržba
1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2. Do zadného zásobníka vložte obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter.
3. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť.
4. Vytlačte hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
1. Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance) , kým sa nezobrazí malé písmeno u.
2. Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Vytlačí sa hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Dôležité
Na hárku na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nedotýkajte vytlačených častí.
Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy nezašpiňte. Ak sa hárok zašpiní alebo pokrčí, vzorka sa
nemusí správne naskenovať.
5. Naskenovaním hárka nastavte polohu tlačovej hlavy.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Strana 551 z celkového počtu 684
1. Položte hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy na ploché predlohové sklo a potom opatrne zatvorte
kryt dokumentov.
Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy položte vytlačenou stranou SMEROM NADOL a značku
alebo jeho ľavý horný roh zarovnajte so značkou zarovnania (
).
2. Skontrolujte, či sa na displeji LED zobrazilo veľké písmeno U, a stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo
(Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa naskenuje a automaticky sa nastaví poloha tlačovej hlavy.
Po nastavení polohy tlačovej hlavy sa displej LED vráti do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania.
Odstráňte hárok z plochého predlohového skla.
Dôležité
Kým sa skenovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte vložený
hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak automatické nastavenie polohy tlačovej hlavy zlyhá, na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód
chyby.
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Poznámka
Ak ani po nastavení polohy tlačovej hlavy podľa uvedeného postupu nie sú výsledky tlače
uspokojivé, nastavte polohu tlačovej hlavy manuálne prostredníctvom počítača.
Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy
Ak chcete vytlačiť hodnoty aktuálneho nastavenia polohy tlačovej hlavy, na displeji LED
zobrazte písmeno L a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) .
Na začiatok strany
Vykonávanie údržby z počítača
Strana 552 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Vykonávanie údržby z počítača
Vykonávanie údržby z počítača
Čistenie tlačových hláv
Čistenie valčekov podávača papiera
Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy
Kontrola dýz tlačovej hlavy
Čistenie vnútorných častí zariadenia
Na začiatok strany
Cleaning the Print Heads
Strana 553 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Print Heads
Cleaning the Print Heads
The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head. Perform print
head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink.
The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows:
Cleaning
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning.
3. Execute cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute.
Print head cleaning starts.
4. Complete cleaning
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.
5. Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check
process, click Cancel.
If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem, clean it once more.
Deep Cleaning
Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning. Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do
not resolve the print head problem.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning.
3. Execute deep cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
Print head deep cleaning starts.
4. Complete deep cleaning
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.
Cleaning the Print Heads
Strana 554 z celkového počtu 684
5. Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check
process, click Cancel.
Important
Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink. Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than
Cleaning.
Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently,
perform cleaning only when necessary.
Note
If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning, switch off the machine, wait 24 hours, and
then perform Deep Cleaning again. If there is still no sign of improvement, refer to " Machine Moves
But Ink Is Not Ejected ."
Related Topic
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Page top
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Strana 555 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Cleans the paper feed roller. Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the
paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly.
The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows:
Roller Cleaning
1. Prepare the machine
Remove all sheets of paper from the rear tray.
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The confirmation message appears.
4. Execute paper feed roller cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and click OK.
Paper feed roller cleaning starts.
5. Complete paper feed roller cleaning
After the rollers have stopped, follow the instruction in the message, load three sheets of plain
paper into the rear tray, and click OK.
Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed.
Page top
Aligning the Print Head Position
Strana 556 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Aligning the Print Head Position
Aligning the Print Head Position
Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors
and lines.
This machine supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head
alignment.
To perform automatic head alignment, refer to "Aligning the Print Head" in the manual: Basic Guide and
then execute the function from the operation panel of the machine.
The procedure for performing manual print head alignment is as follows:
Print Head Alignment
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
3. Switch head alignment to manual
Check the Align heads manually check box.
4. Transmit the settings
Click Send, and click OK when the confirmation message appears.
5. Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab
The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens.
6. Load paper in the machine
Load three sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray.
7. Execute head alignment
Make sure that the machine is on and click Align Print Head.
Follow the instruction in the message.
8. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set
their numbers in the associated boxes.
Aligning the Print Head Position
Strana 557 z celkového počtu 684
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks
(B) More noticeable vertical white streaks
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable
horizontal white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable horizontal white streaks
(B) More noticeable horizontal white streaks
9. Confirm the displayed message and click OK
The second pattern is printed.
Important
Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress.
10. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set
their numbers in the associated boxes.
Aligning the Print Head Position
Strana 558 z celkového počtu 684
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks
(B) More noticeable vertical white streaks
11. Confirm the displayed message and click OK
The third pattern is printed.
Important
Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress.
12. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the associated
boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the preview window, will
automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes.
Aligning the Print Head Position
Strana 559 z celkového počtu 684
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable
horizontal white stripes.
(A) Less noticeable horizontal white stripes
(B) More noticeable horizontal white stripes
Note
To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click
Print Alignment Value.
Page top
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Strana 560 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a
nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print.
The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows:
Nozzle Check
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens.
To display a list of items that you should check before printing the check pattern, click Initial Check
Items.
3. Load paper in the machine
Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray.
4. Print a nozzle check pattern
Make sure that the machine is on and click Print Check Pattern.
The nozzle check pattern is printed.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The Pattern Check dialog box opens.
5. Check the print result
Check the print result. When the print result is normal, click Exit.
If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print
head.
Related Topic
Cleaning the Print Heads
Page top
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Strana 561 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning Inside the Machine
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side
of the paper.
Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on
the printed page.
The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows:
Bottom Plate Cleaning
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens.
3. Load paper in the machine
As instructed in the dialog box, fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally, and then
unfold the sheet.
Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down.
4. Perform the bottom plate cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and click Execute.
Bottom plate cleaning starts.
Page top
Zmena nastavení zariadenia
Strana 562 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Zmena nastavení zariadenia
Zmena nastavení zariadenia
Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača
Na začiatok strany
Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača
Strana 563 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Zmena nastavení zariadenia > Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača
Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača
Zmena možností tlače
Uloženie často používaného profilu tlače
Nastavenie kazety s atramentom
Riadenie napájania zariadenia
Zníženie hluku zariadenia
Zmena prevádzkového režimu zariadenia
Na začiatok strany
Changing the Print Options
Strana 564 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the
Print Options
Changing the Print Options
You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software.
Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off.
The procedure for changing the print options is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Print Options... on the Page Setup tab
The Print Options dialog box opens.
3. Change the individual settings
If necessary, change the setting of each item, and then click OK.
The Page Setup tab is displayed again.
Page top
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Strana 565 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Registering a
Frequently Used Printing Profile
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows:
Registering a Printing Profile
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the necessary items
From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select the printing profile to be used and if
necessary, change the settings after Additional Features.
You can also set necessary items on the Main, Page Setup, and Effects tab.
3. Click Save...
The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens.
4. Save the settings
Set Name, then click OK. If necessary, set the items in Options.... The printing profile is saved, and
the Quick Setup tab is displayed again.
The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list.
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Strana 566 z celkového počtu 684
Important
To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click
Options..., and check each item.
Note
When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver, the print settings
you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings.
Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print
settings again.
Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile
1. Select the printing profile to be deleted
Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
2. Delete the printing profile
Click Delete. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Settings list.
Note
Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
Page top
Setting the Ink Cartridge
Strana 567 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Setting the Ink
Cartridge
Setting the Ink Cartridge
This feature enables you to specify the most appropriate ink cartridge among installed cartridges
according to an intended use.
When one of the ink cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one, you
can specify the other ink cartridge that still has ink and continue printing.
The procedure for specifying the ink cartridge is as follows:
Ink Cartridge Settings
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Ink Cartridge Settings on the Maintenance tab
The Ink Cartridge Settings dialog box appears.
3. Select the ink cartridge to be used
Select the ink cartridge to be used for printing and click OK.
The specified ink cartridge will be used from the next printing.
Important
When the following settings are specified, Black Only does not function because the machine uses
the color ink cartridge to print documents.
Other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A, Hagaki, or Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab
Borderless is selected from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab
Do not detach an ink cartridge that is not in use. Printing cannot be performed while either ink
cartridge is detached.
Page top
Managing the Machine Power
Strana 568 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Managing the
Machine Power
Managing the Machine Power
This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver.
The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows:
Power Off
The Power Off function turns off the machine. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the
machine on from the printer driver.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Execute power off
Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The machine power switches off, and the Maintenance tab is displayed again.
Page top
Reducing the Machine Noise
Strana 569 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Reducing the
Machine Noise
Reducing the Machine Noise
This function allows you to reduce the operating noise of the machine. Select when you wish to reduce
the operating noise of the printer at night, etc.
Using this function may lower the print speed.
The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows:
Quiet Mode
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab
The Quiet Mode dialog box opens.
3. Set the quiet mode
If necessary, specify one of the following items:
Do not use quiet mode
The operating noise of the machine is at normal volume.
Always use quiet mode
Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine.
Use quiet mode within specified time
The operating noise of the machine can be reduced during a specified period of time.
Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated.
Important
The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different.
4. Transmit the settings
Make sure that the machine is on and click Send.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The settings are enabled hereafter.
Note
Depending on print quality settings, effects of the quiet mode may be less.
Page top
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Strana 570 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the
Machine Operation Mode
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
If necessary, switch between various modes of machine operation.
The procedure for configuring settings is as follows:
Custom Settings
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Make sure that the machine is on, and then click Custom Settings on the
Maintenance tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Note
If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear
because the computer cannot collect the machine status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3. If necessary, complete the following settings:
Prevent paper abrasion
The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density printing
to prevent paper abrasion.
Check this check box to use this function.
Align heads manually
The Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is normally set to automatic head
alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment. If the printing results are unsatisfactory
even after you execute automatic head alignment, see " Aligning the Print Head Position ," and
execute manual head alignment.
Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment.
Ink Drying Wait Time
You can set the length of the machine rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the
slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.
If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries,
increase the ink drying wait time.
Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.
4. Transmit the settings
Click Send, and click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The machine operates with the modified settings hereafter.
Page top
Riešenie problémov
Strana 571 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov
Riešenie problémov
Ak sa objaví chyba
Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené
Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Tlač sa nespustí
Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením
Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje
Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo
Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu
Papier sa správne nepodáva
Zaseknutý papier
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Pre používateľov systému Windows
Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje chybové hlásenie (len pre
zariadenie MP270 series)
Problémy pri skenovaní
Problémy so softvérom
Problémy s programom MP Navigator EX
Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť
Často kladené otázky
Pokyny na používanie (ovládač tlačiarne)
Všeobecné poznámky (ovládač skenera)
Na začiatok strany
Ak sa objaví chyba
Strana 572 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Ak sa objaví chyba
Ak sa objaví chyba
Ak sa pri tlači objaví chyba, napríklad sa v tlačiarni minie alebo zasekne papier, automaticky sa zobrazí
hlásenie s návodom na riešenie problému. Vykonajte príslušné opatrenia uvedené v hlásení. Hlásenie
sa môže líšiť v závislosti od verzie operačného systému.
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x:
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9:
Ak sa objaví chyba
Strana 573 z celkového počtu 684
Na začiatok strany
Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť
Strana 574 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť
Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť
Kontrola č. 1: Stlačte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON).
Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je zástrčka napájacieho kábla bezpečne
zasunutá do konektora napájacieho kábla na zariadení, a potom
zariadenie znovu zapnite.
Kontrola č. 3: Odpojte zariadenie od napájacieho zdroja, potom ho
znova pripojte a približne po dvoch minútach znova zapnite.
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Na začiatok strany
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Strana 575 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Indikátor Alarm svieti na oranžovo
Keď nastane chyba, indikátor Alarm sa rozsvieti na oranžovo a na displeji LED sa striedavo
zobrazujú písmeno E a číslo (kód chyby). Skontrolujte kód chyby zobrazený na displeji LED a
vykonajte príslušné opatrenie na jej odstránenie.
* Pri niektorých chybách sa indikátor Alarm nerozsvieti.
Kód chyby
Príčina
Opatrenie
E, 0, 2
V zariadení sa minul
papier. / Papier sa
nepodáva.
Správne vložte papier do zadného zásobníka a
stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo
Farebne (Color) .
E, 0, 3
Výstupný zásobník papiera
je zatvorený./Došlo k
zaseknutiu papiera.
Ak je výstupný zásobník papiera zatvorený,
otvorte ho. Zariadenie obnoví tlač.
Ak sa otvorením výstupného zásobníka papiera
problém nevyriešil alebo ak tlač začala s
otvoreným zásobníkom, znamená to, že sa
mohol zaseknúť papier. Odstráňte zaseknutý
papier, do tlačiarne správne vložte nový papier
a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black)
alebo Farebne (Color) .
Zaseknutý papier
E, 0, 4
E, 0, 5
Nemožno rozpoznať kazetu
FINE.
Kazeta FINE je možno nesprávne vložená
alebo nekompatibilná s týmto zariadením.
Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a vložte
vhodnú kazetu FINE.
Ak sa chyba neodstránila, obráťte sa na
servisné stredisko.
E, 0, 7
Kazeta FINE nie je vložená
na správnom mieste.
Skontrolujte, či sú všetky kazety FINE vložené
na správnych miestach.
Bežná údržba
E, 0, 8
Absorbér odpadového
atramentu je takmer plný.
V tlači pokračujte stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo
(Black) alebo Farebne (Color) na zariadení.
Obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
E, 0, 9
Multifunkčné zariadenie
nedostalo odpoveď od
digitálneho fotoaparátu.
Pripojený digitálny
fotoaparát alebo digitálny
kamkordér nie je
kompatibilný s týmto
multifunkčným zariadením.
(len pre
zariadenie
MP270 series)
Skontrolujte zariadenie pripojené k
multifunkčnému zariadeniu. Priama tlač
fotografií je možná len pomocou zariadenia
kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge.
Ak určitá operácia alebo prenos údajov trvá
príliš dlho, môže vypršať časový limit. Môže
to spôsobiť zrušenie tlače. V takých
prípadoch odpojte a znovu pripojte kábel
USB.
V závislosti od typu alebo značky zariadenia
kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Strana 576 z celkového počtu 684
možno budete musieť pred jeho pripojením
k multifunkčnému zariadeniu a tlačou
vybrať režim tlače kompatibilný so
štandardom PictBridge. Po pripojení k
multifunkčnému zariadeniu budete možno
musieť ručne zapnúť kompatibilné
zariadenie alebo vybrať režim prehrávania.
Pred pripojením vykonajte nevyhnutné
opatrenia, ktoré sú opísané v príručke k
zariadeniu.
Ak sa problém stále neodstránil,
skontrolujte, či možno vytlačiť inú fotografiu.
E, 1, 3
Nemožno zistiť hladinu
atramentu.
Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok
atramentu.
Funkcia rozpoznávania hladiny zostávajúceho
atramentu bude vypnutá pretože hladinu
atramentu nie je možné správne rozpoznať.
Ak chcete pokračovať v tlači bez tejto funkcie,
stlačte a podržte tlačidlo [Stop/Reset] (Zastaviť
/Vymazať) po dobu aspoň 5 sekúnd.
Spoločnosť Canon odporúča použiť na
dosiahnutie optimálnej kvality nové originálne
kazety Canon.
Spoločnosť Canon nenesie zodpovednosť za
možné poruchy a poškodenia tlačiarne,
zapríčinené tlačou s nedostatkom atramentu v
kazete.
E, 1, 4
Nemožno rozpoznať kazetu
FINE.
Kazeta FINE možno nie je kompatibilná s týmto
zariadením.
Vložte vhodnú kazetu FINE.
Bežná údržba
E, 1, 5
Nemožno rozpoznať kazetu
FINE.
Kazeta FINE možno nie je správne vložená.
Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a správne
vložte kazetu FINE.
Bežná údržba
E, 1, 6
Atrament došiel.
Atrament došiel.
Vymeňte atramentovú kazetu a zatvorte
Skenovaciu jednotku (Kryt).
Ak prebieha tlač a chcete v nej pokračovať,
stlačte a podržte tlačidlo [Stop/Reset] (Zastaviť
/Vymazať) aspoň 5 sekúnd bez toho,
aby ste atramentovú kazetu vymenili. Tlač bude
v tomto prípade pokračovať pri malom
množstve atramentu.
Funkcia rozpoznávania hladiny zostávajúceho
atramentu bude vypnutá.
Vymeňte prázdnu atramentovú kazetu ihneď po
dokončení tlače. Ak budete pokračovať v tlači
pri malom množstve atramentu, nebude
výsledná kvalita tlače uspokojivá.
E, 1, 9
(len pre
zariadenie
MP270 series)
Zariadenie kompatibilné so
štandardom PictBridge je
pripojené prostredníctvom
rozbočovača USB.
Ak je zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom
PictBridge pripojené prostredníctvom
rozbočovača USB, odstráňte rozbočovač a
zariadenie pripojte priamo k multifunkčnému
zariadeniu.
E, 3, 0
Pri kopírovaní s
prispôsobením strane sa
nedá zistiť správna veľkosť
pôvodného dokumentu
alebo je dokument príliš
Skontrolujte, či pôvodný dokument
zodpovedá požiadavkám a či je správne
položený na ploché predlohové sklo.
Skontrolujte polohu a smer pôvodného
dokumentu položeného na plochom
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Strana 577 z celkového počtu 684
predlohovom skle.
malý.
E, 3, 1
Zariadenie nie je pripojené
k počítaču.
Prepojte zariadenie a počítač pomocou kábla
USB.
E, 5, 0
Nepodarilo sa naskenovať
hárok na zarovnanie
tlačovej hlavy.
Stlačením tlačidla Zastaviť/Vymazať (Stop/
Reset) zrušte chybu a potom vykonajte
opatrenia uvedené nižšie.
Skontrolujte, či je hárok na zarovnanie
tlačovej hlavy nastavený v správnej polohe a
so správnou orientáciou na plochom
predlohovom skle.
Skontrolujte, či ploché predlohové sklo a
hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy nie sú
znečistené.
Skontrolujte, či sa typ a veľkosť položeného
papiera hodia na automatické zarovnanie
tlačovej hlavy.
Na automatické zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
vždy používajte jeden hárok obyčajného
papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter.
Skontrolujte, či nie sú upchaté dýzy tlačovej
hlavy.
Podľa vytlačenej vzorky na kontrolu dýz
skontrolujte stav tlačovej hlavy.
Bežná údržba
Ak sa chyba neodstránila, pripojte zariadenie k
počítaču a zarovnajte tlačovú hlavu v ovládači
tlačiarne.
Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy
Indikátory tlačiarne striedavo blikajú – indikátor Napájanie (Power) na zeleno a indikátor
Alarm na oranžovo
Ak indikátory Napájanie (Power) a Alarm striedavo blikajú, ako je znázornené nižšie, a na displeji
LED sa striedavo zobrazujú písmeno P a číslo (kód chyby), pravdepodobne sa vyskytla chyba,
ktorá vyžaduje servisný zásah.
Kód chyby
P, 0, 2
Opatrenie
Zrušte tlač a vypnite zariadenie. Potom vyberte zaseknutý
papier alebo ochranný materiál, ktorý bráni v pohybe
držiaka kazety FINE, a znovu zapnite zariadenie.
Dôležité
Dávajte pozor, aby ste sa nedotkli častí vnútri
zariadenia. Ak sa ich dotknete, zariadenie nemusí
správne tlačiť.
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné
stredisko.
P, *, *
Hodnoty *, * závisia od chyby, ktorá sa vyskytla.
Keď sa zobrazí kód P, 1, 0:
Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja
napájania.
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
Strana 578 z celkového počtu 684
Obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Keď sa zobrazí kód P, 0, 3:
Ak sa pred zariadením nachádza nejaký predmet,
odstráňte ho.
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom
vypnite a znova zapnite napájanie.
V iných prípadoch:
Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja
napájania.
Zariadenie znova pripojte a zapnite.
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné
stredisko.
Na začiatok strany
Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené
Strana 579 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené
Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené
Ak indikátor Napájanie (Power) nesvieti:
Zariadenie nie je zapojené. Zapojte napájací kábel a stlačte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON).
Ak indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti:
Displej LED je možno v režime šetriča displeja. Na ovládacom paneli stlačte iné tlačidlo než
(ON).
ZAP.
Na začiatok strany
Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Strana 580 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Ak sa inštalácia nespustí ani po vložení disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM
(Setup CD-ROM) do diskovej jednotky počítača:
Spustite inštaláciu podľa nasledujúceho postupu.
1. Kliknite na tlačidlo Štart (Start) a potom na položku Počítač (Computer).
V systéme Windows XP kliknite na tlačidlo Štart (Start) a potom na položku Tento počítač (My
Computer).
V systéme Windows 2000 dvakrát kliknite na ikonu
pracovnej ploche.
Tento počítač (My Computer) na
2. V zobrazenom okne dvakrát kliknite na ikonu disku CD-ROM
.
Po zobrazení obsahu disku CD-ROM dvakrát kliknite na súbor MSETUP4.EXE.
Dvojitým kliknutím na ikonu disku CD-ROM
na pracovnej ploche spustite inštaláciu.
Poznámka
Ak sa ikona disku CD-ROM nezobrazí, skúste nasledujúce kroky:
Vyberte disk CD-ROM z počítača a znovu ho vložte.
Reštartujte počítač.
Ak sa ikona nezobrazí, vyskúšajte iné disky a zistite, či sa zobrazia. Ak sa iné disky zobrazia,
znamená to, že sa vyskytol problém s diskom Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) . V
takom prípade sa obráťte na servisné stredisko.
Ak nemôžete pokračovať za obrazovkou Printer Connection:
Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Strana 581 z celkového počtu 684
Ak nemôžete pokračovať za obrazovkou Printer Connection, skontrolujte, či je kábel USB pevne
zasunutý do portu USB na zariadení a pripojený k počítaču, a potom podľa nižšie uvedeného
postupu znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers.
Poznámka
V závislosti od používaného počítača sa v systéme Windows Vista môže zobraziť hlásenie
Tlačiareň sa nezistila. Skontrolujte pripojenie. (The printer is not detected. Check the
connection.). V takom prípade chvíľu počkajte. Ak stále nemôžete prejsť na ďalší krok, podľa
postupu uvedeného nižšie opätovne nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers.
1. Na obrazovke Printer Connection kliknite na tlačidlo Cancel.
2. Na obrazovke Installation Failure kliknite na tlačidlo Start Over.
3. Na nasledujúcej obrazovke kliknite na tlačidlo Back.
4. Na obrazovke PIXMA XXX kliknite na tlačidlo Exit a vyberte disk CD-ROM.
5. Vypnite zariadenie.
6. Reštartujte počítač.
7. Skontrolujte, či nie je spustený žiadny aplikačný softvér.
8. Znova vložte disk CD-ROM a spustením inštalácie Easy Install nainštalujte
ovládače MP Drivers.
V iných prípadoch:
Podľa postupu uvedeného v inštalačnej príručke znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers.
Ak sa ovládače MP Drivers nenainštalovali správne, odinštalujte ich, reštartujte počítač a potom
ovládače znovu nainštalujte.
Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Strana 582 z celkového počtu 684
Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers
Pri opätovnej inštalácii ovládačov MP Drivers spustite z disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CDROM) inštaláciu Custom Install a vyberte položku MP Drivers.
Poznámka
Ak musel byť inštalačný program ukončený kvôli chybe v systéme Windows, systém môže byť
nestabilný a nemusí sa vám podariť nainštalovať ovládače. Pred opätovnou inštaláciou
reštartujte počítač.
Na začiatok strany
Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču
Strana 583 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču
Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču
Rýchlosť tlače alebo skenovania je nízka/Pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania USB Hi-
Speed nefunguje/
rýchlejšie“
Zobrazuje sa hlásenie „Toto zariadenie môže pracovať
Ak vaše systémové prostredie nie je úplne kompatibilné s rozhraním Hi-Speed USB, zariadenie
bude pracovať s nižšou rýchlosťou dostupnou pre rozhranie USB 1.1. V takom prípade zariadenie
funguje správne, ale prenosová rýchlosť môže spomaľovať tlač.
Kontrola: Kontrolou nasledujúcich podmienok sa presvedčte, či vaše systémové
prostredie podporuje pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania Hi-Speed USB.
Podporuje port USB na počítači pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania Hi-Speed USB?
Podporujú používaný kábel USB a rozbočovač USB (ak ho používate) pripojenie
prostredníctvom rozhrania Hi-Speed USB?
Používajte certifikovaný kábel Hi-Speed USB. Odporúča sa používať kábel dlhý najviac
10 stôp/3 metre.
Podporuje operačný systém vášho počítača pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania HiSpeed USB?
Získajte najnovšiu verziu a nainštalujte ju do počítača.
Pracuje ovládač rozhrania Hi-Speed USB správne?
Získajte najnovšiu verziu ovládača rozhrania Hi-Speed USB kompatibilného s
hardvérom a ovládač nainštalujte do počítača.
Dôležité
Podrobnosti o rozhraní Hi-Speed USB vášho systémového prostredia vám poskytne
výrobca počítača, kábla USB alebo rozbočovača USB.
Na začiatok strany
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Strana 584 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Ak výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé z dôvodu bielych pruhov, nezarovnaných čiar alebo nerovnomerných
farieb, skontrolujte najprv nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače.
Kontrola č. 1: Zhodujú sa nastavenia veľkosti strany a typu média s
veľkosťou a typom vloženého papiera?
Pokiaľ sú tieto nastavenia nesprávne, nemožno dosiahnuť správny výsledok tlače.
Pri tlači fotografie alebo ilustrácie môže nesprávne nastavenie typu papiera znížiť kvalitu vytlačených
farieb.
Pri tlači s nesprávnym nastavením typu papiera sa môže vytlačený povrch taktiež poškriabať.
Pri tlači bez okrajov môže v závislosti od kombinácie nastaveného typu papiera a vloženého papiera
dôjsť k nerovnomernému rozloženiu farieb.
Len pre zariadenie MP270 series
Kopírovanie ovládané zo zariadenia
Skontrolujte pomocou ovládacieho panela na
zariadení.
Kopírovanie
Tlač zo zariadenia kompatibilného so
štandardom PictBridge
Skontrolujte pomocou zariadenia kompatibilného so
štandardom PictBridge.
Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia
(len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Tlač z počítača
Skontrolujte pomocou ovládača tlačiarne.
Tlač pomocou inštalačného letáka
Len pre zariadenie MP250 series
Kopírovanie ovládané zo zariadenia Skontrolujte pomocou ovládacieho panela na zariadení.
Kopírovanie
Tlač z počítača
Skontrolujte pomocou ovládača tlačiarne.
Tlač pomocou inštalačného letáka
Kontrola č. 2: V ovládači tlačiarne skontrolujte, či je vzhľadom na typ
média a tlačové údaje vybratá vhodná kvalita tlače.
Vyberte možnosť kvality tlače, ktorá vyhovuje papieru, a obrázok, ktorý chcete vytlačiť. Ak zbadáte
rozmazanie alebo nerovnomerné rozloženie farieb, nastavte vyššiu kvalitu tlače a tlač zopakujte.
V ovládači tlačiarne skontrolujte nastavenie kvality tlače.
Zmena kvality tlače a korekcia obrazových údajov
Poznámka
Len pre zariadenie MP270 series:
Nastavenie kvality tlače nemožno zmeniť zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom
PictBridge.
Kontrola č. 3: Ak problém pretrváva, môžu existovať ďalšie príčiny.
Pozrite si aj nasledujúce časti:
Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy
Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele pruhy
Farby sú nejasné
Čiary nie sú zarovnané
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Strana 585 z celkového počtu 684
Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny
Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný
Na rube papiera sú šmuhy
Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary
Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy
Na začiatok strany
Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy
Strana 586 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy
Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy
Kontrola č. 1: Je veľkosť tlačených údajov mimoriadne veľká?
Na hárku Page Setup kliknite na položku Print Options. Potom v zobrazenom dialógovom okne
začiarknite políčko Prevent loss of print data.
Kontrola č. 2: Je na pevnom disku počítača dostatok miesta?
Odstráňte nepotrebné súbory a uvoľnite miesto na disku.
Na začiatok strany
Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele ...
Strana 587 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/
Farby sú skreslené/Biele pruhy
Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/
Biele pruhy
Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele ...
Strana 588 z celkového počtu 684
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače?
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Kontrola č. 2: Je kazeta FINE správne nainštalovaná?
Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je spoľahlivo zatvorený, atrament sa nemusí správne
vystrekovať.
Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, potom zaisťovací kryt
kazety s atramentom zatvorte.
Pri zatváraní potlačte na zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto.
Kontrola č. 3: Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz a vykonajte všetky
potrebné operácie údržby, napríklad čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament.
Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy
nájdete v časti Bežná údržba .
Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne:
Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách
vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE.
Kontrola č. 4: Ak sa v kazete FINE minul atrament, vymeňte ju za novú.
Kontrola č. 5: Pri používaní papiera určeného iba na jednostrannú tlač
skontrolujte, či je papier vložený tak, aby strana určená na tlač
smerovala nahor.
Tlač na nesprávnu stranu takéhoto papiera môže viesť k nejasným výtlačkom alebo zníženej kvalite
tlače.
Informácie o strane, na ktorú možno tlačiť, nájdete v príručke dodanej s papierom.
Kontrola č. 6: Je ploché predlohové sklo znečistené?
Vyčistite ploché predlohové sklo.
Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov
Pri kopírovaní si pozrite aj nasledujúce časti:
Kontrola č. 7: Skontrolujte, či je pôvodný dokument správne položený
na ploché predlohové sklo.
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele ...
Strana 589 z celkového počtu 684
Kontrola č. 8: Je originál položený na plochom predlohovom skle
stranou určenou na kopírovanie nadol?
Kontrola č. 9: Kopírujete výtlačok z tohto zariadenia?
Len pre zariadenie MP270 series: tlačte priamo z digitálneho fotoaparátu alebo výtlačok znova
vytlačte z počítača.
Len pre zariadenie MP250 series: výtlačok znova vytlačte z počítača.
Pri kopírovaní výtlačku zo zariadenia sa môže znížiť kvalita tlače.
Na začiatok strany
Farby sú nejasné
Strana 590 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Farby sú nejasné
Farby sú nejasné
Kontrola č. 1: Zapnite korekciu farieb.
Pokiaľ tlačíte fotografie alebo inú grafiku, zapnutím korekcie farieb v ovládači tlačiarne môžete
vylepšiť farby.
V dialógovom okne s vlastnosťami tlačiarne vyberte na hárku Effects položku Vivid Photo.
V rozbaľovacej ponuke dialógového okna Tlačiť (Print) vyberte položku Color Options a potom v
ponuke Color Mode vyberte položku Vivid Photo.
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9 vyberte v dialógovom okne Tlač (Print) položku
Special Effects a potom položku Vivid Photo.
Kontrola č. 2: Je kazeta FINE správne nainštalovaná?
Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je spoľahlivo zatvorený, atrament sa nemusí správne
vystrekovať.
Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, potom zaisťovací kryt
kazety s atramentom zatvorte.
Pri zatváraní potlačte na zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto.
Kontrola č. 3: Ak sa v kazete FINE minul atrament, vymeňte ju za novú.
Kontrola č. 4: Tlačí sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz správne?
Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament.
Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy
nájdete v časti Bežná údržba .
Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne:
Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách
vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE.
Poznámka
Vytlačené farby sa nemusia zhodovať s farbami na obrazovke kvôli základným rozdielom v
metódach použitých pri vytváraní farieb. Spôsob zobrazenia farieb na obrazovke môžu ovplyvniť aj
nastavenie kontroly farieb a rozdiely prostredia.
Farby sú nejasné
Strana 591 z celkového počtu 684
Na začiatok strany
Čiary nie sú zarovnané
Strana 592 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Čiary nie sú zarovnané
Čiary nie sú zarovnané
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače?
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Kontrola č. 2: Zarovnajte tlačovú hlavu.
Ak ste po inštalácii nezarovnali tlačovú hlavu, rovné čiary sa môžu vytlačiť nezarovnané.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Poznámka
Ak sa zarovnaním tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vykonajte manuálne zarovnanie tlačovej
hlavy podľa časti Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy .
Kontrola č. 3: Je veľkosť tlačených údajov mimoriadne veľká?
Na hárku Page Setup kliknite na položku Print Options. Potom v zobrazenom dialógovom okne
začiarknite políčko Prevent loss of print data.
Kontrola č. 4: Tlačí sa s použitím funkcie rozloženia strany alebo okraja
na zošitie?
Pokiaľ tlačíte s použitím funkcie rozloženia strany alebo okraja na zošitie, nemusia sa vytlačiť tenké
čiary. Skúste zväčšiť hrúbku čiar v dokumente.
Na začiatok strany
Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny
Strana 593 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje
atramentové škvrny
Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače?
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Kontrola č. 2: Ak je nastavená vysoká intenzita, znížte hodnotu
nastavenia Intensity v ovládači tlačiarne a skúste tlačiť znova.
Ak na tlač obrázkov s vysokou intenzitou používate obyčajný papier, papier môže absorbovať príliš
veľa atramentu, čím sa zvlní a odrie sa.
Skontrolujte intenzitu v ovládači tlačiarne.
Úprava intenzity
Kontrola č. 3: Používate na tlač fotografií fotografický papier?
Pri tlači údajov s vysokou sýtosťou farieb, akými sú fotografie alebo obrázky so sýtymi farbami,
odporúčame používať papier Photo Paper Plus Glossy II alebo iný špeciálny papier značky Canon.
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Na začiatok strany
Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný
Strana 594 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je
poškriabaný
Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače?
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Kontrola č. 2: Používate vhodný typ papiera? Skontrolujte nasledujúce
skutočnosti:
Skontrolujte, či sa na účely danej tlače hodí papier, na ktorý tlačíte.
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Pri tlači bez okrajov skontrolujte, či sa používaný papier hodí na tlač bez okrajov.
Ak sa používaný papier nehodí na tlač bez okrajov, môže sa znížiť kvalita tlače na horných a
spodných okrajoch papiera.
Oblasť tlače
Kontrola č. 3: Vyrovnajte zvlnenie a vložte papier.
Pri obyčajnom papieri
Obráťte papier a opätovne ho vložte tak, aby ste tlačili na druhú stranu.
Ak papier necháte dlhší čas vložený v zadnom zásobníku, môže sa zvlniť. V takom prípade vložte
papier opačnou stranou smerujúcou nahor. Môže to vyriešiť problém.
Odporúčame, aby ste nepoužitý papier vložili späť do balenia a skladovali na rovnom povrchu.
Pri inom type papiera
Ak je zvlnenie v rohoch papiera vyššie ako 0,1 palca/3 mm (A), môžu sa na ňom objaviť šmuhy
alebo sa nemusí správne podávať. V takých prípadoch vyrovnajte zvlnenie papiera podľa
postupu uvedeného nižšie.
Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný
Strana 595 z celkového počtu 684
1. Zviňte papier v opačnom smere zvlnenia papiera, ako je znázornené nižšie.
2. Skontrolujte, či sa papier vyrovnal.
Odporúčame, aby ste na takto vyrovnaný papier tlačili iba po jednom hárku.
Poznámka
V závislosti od typu média sa na papieri môžu objaviť šmuhy alebo sa nemusí správne
podávať, aj keď nie je skrútený dovnútra. V takých prípadoch sa riaďte postupom uvedeným
nižšie a pred tlačou skrúťte papier opačným smerom. Výška zvlnenia nesmie presiahnuť 0,1
palca/3 mm (B). Môže sa tým zlepšiť výsledok tlače.
(C) Strana určená na tlač
Odporúčame, aby ste na papier skrútený v opačnom smere tlačili iba po jednom hárku.
Kontrola č. 4: Ak tlačíte na tenký papier, nastavte možnosť Prevent
paper abrasion.
Výberom nastavenia Prevent paper abrasion sa zväčší vzdialenosť medzi tlačovou hlavou a
vloženým papierom. Ak spozorujete odretie papiera aj pri správnom nastavení typu média
zodpovedajúceho vloženému papieru, pomocou ovládacieho panela alebo ovládača tlačiarne
nastavte zariadenie tak, aby bránilo odretiu papiera.
Ak nastavíte možnosť Prevent paper abrasion, rýchlosť tlače sa zníži.
* Po dokončení tlače vypnite nastavenie Prevent paper abrasion. V opačnom prípade zostane toto
nastavenie zapnuté pre všetky následné tlačové úlohy.
Nastavenie pomocou ovládacieho panela
Ak chcete zapnúť funkciu Prevent paper abrasion, opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba
(Maintenance), kým sa na displeji LED nezobrazí písmeno r, a potom stlačte tlačidlo
Čiernobielo (Black).
Ak chcete funkciu Prevent paper abrasion vypnúť, opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba
(Maintenance), kým sa na displeji LED nezobrazí písmeno r, a potom stlačte tlačidlo Farebne
(Color).
Nastavenie pomocou ovládača tlačiarne
Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne a na karte Maintenance v oblasti Custom
Settings začiarknite políčko Prevent paper abrasion. Potom kliknite na položku Send.
Ak chcete otvoriť dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne, pozrite si časť Otvorenie dialógového
okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) .
V aplikácii Canon IJ Printer Utility vyberte v rozbaľovacom zozname položku Custom Settings,
začiarknite políčko Prevent paper abrasion a potom kliknite na položku Send.
Ak chcete otvoriť aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility, pozrite si časť Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ
Printer Utility (Macintosh) .
Kontrola č. 5: Ak je nastavená vysoká intenzita, znížte hodnotu
Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný
Strana 596 z celkového počtu 684
nastavenia Intensity v ovládači tlačiarne a skúste tlačiť znova.
Ak na tlač obrázkov s vysokou intenzitou používate obyčajný papier, papier môže absorbovať príliš
veľa atramentu, čím sa zvlní a odrie sa.
Znížte hodnotu nastavenia Intensity v ovládači tlačiarne a skúste tlačiť znova.
1. Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne.
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows)
Ak používate zariadenie MP270 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne
Ak používate zariadenie MP250 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne
* Prv než kliknutím sem otvoríte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne, ukončite všetky
spustené aplikácie.
2. Na karte Main vyberte v oblasti Color/Intensity položku Manual a potom kliknite na
tlačidlo Set.
3. Pomocou posúvača Intensity na karte Color Adjustment upravte intenzitu.
1. Otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print).
Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh)
2. V kontextovej ponuke vyberte položku Color Options.
3. Posúvačom Intensity nastavte intenzitu.
Kontrola č. 6: Tlačí sa mimo odporúčanej oblasti tlače?
Ak tlačíte mimo odporúčanej oblasti tlače papiera, spodný okraj papiera sa môže zašpiniť od
atramentu.
Upravte veľkosť pôvodného dokumentu v aplikačnom softvéri.
Oblasť tlače
Kontrola č. 7: Je ploché predlohové sklo znečistené?
Vyčistite ploché predlohové sklo.
Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov
Kontrola č. 8: Je vnútro zariadenia znečistené?
Pri obojstrannej tlači sa môže vnútro zariadenia zašpiniť atramentom a spôsobiť tak šmuhy na
výtlačkoch.
Vyčistením spodnej platne vyčistite vnútro zariadenia.
Bežná údržba
Poznámka
Ak chcete predísť znečisteniu vnútra zariadenia, nastavte správnu veľkosť papiera.
Kontrola č. 9: V položke Ink Drying Wait Time nastavte dlhší interval.
Vďaka tomu bude môcť vytlačený povrch dostatočne vyschnúť, čím sa zabráni jeho zašpineniu a
poškriabaniu.
Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný
Strana 597 z celkového počtu 684
1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2. Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne.
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows)
3. Kliknite na kartu Maintenance a potom na položku Custom Settings.
4. Posúvačom Ink Drying Wait Time nastavte čas čakania a potom kliknite na
tlačidlo Send.
5. Skontrolujte správu a kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté.
2. Otvorte aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility.
Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
3. V kontextovej ponuke vyberte možnosť Custom Settings.
4. Posúvačom Ink Drying Wait Time nastavte čas čakania a potom kliknite na
tlačidlo Send.
5. Skontrolujte správu a kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
Kontrola č. 10: Je papier poškriabaný od iného vloženého papiera?
V závislosti od typu média sa pri podávaní zo zadného zásobníka môže papier poškriabať od iného
vloženého papiera. V takom prípade vkladajte hárky jednotlivo.
Na začiatok strany
Na rube papiera sú šmuhy
Strana 598 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Na rube papiera sú šmuhy
Na rube papiera sú šmuhy
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače?
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Kontrola č. 2: Vyčistením spodnej platne vyčistite vnútro zariadenia.
Bežná údržba
Poznámka
Vnútro tlačiarne sa môže zašpiniť pri tlači bez okrajov, obojstrannej tlači alebo príliš častej tlači.
Na začiatok strany
Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary
Strana 599 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé
čiary
Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia typu papiera a kvality tlače?
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Kontrola č. 2: Je vložený papier správnej veľkosti?
Ak je veľkosť vloženého papiera väčšia než veľkosť nastavená v ovládači tlačiarne, na okraji sa môžu
vytlačiť zvislé čiary.
Nastavte správnu veľkosť papiera zodpovedajúcu vloženému papieru.
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Poznámka
Smer zvislých čiar sa môže líšiť v závislosti od obrazových údajov alebo nastavenia tlače.
Zariadenie vykoná v prípade potreby automatické čistenie na zachovanie čistých výtlačkov. Pri
čistení sa spotrebuje malé množstvo atramentu.
Aj keď sa atrament obyčajne vystrekuje do absorbéra odpadového atramentu, ak je vložený
väčší papier, ako je nastavené ovládačom tlačiarne, môže sa vystreknúť na papier.
Na začiatok strany
Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy
Strana 600 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú
pruhy
Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače?
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Kontrola č. 2: Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz a vykonajte všetky
potrebné operácie údržby, napríklad čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament.
Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy
nájdete v časti Bežná údržba .
Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne:
Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách
vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE.
Kontrola č. 3: Zarovnajte tlačovú hlavu.
Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy
Poznámka
Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy
Strana 601 z celkového počtu 684
Ak sa zarovnaním tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vykonajte manuálne zarovnanie tlačovej
hlavy podľa časti Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy .
Na začiatok strany
Tlač sa nespustí
Strana 602 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Tlač sa nespustí
Tlač sa nespustí
Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolujte, či je zástrčka napájacieho kábla bezpečne
zasunutá, a potom zapnite zariadenie.
Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte, kým
indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno.
Poznámka
Pri tlači veľkého množstva údajov, napríklad fotografií alebo grafiky, sa môže tlač spustiť s
oneskorením. Kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie spracúva údaje a
odosiela ich do tlačiarne. Počkajte, kým sa nespustí tlač.
Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do
zariadenia aj počítača, a potom skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti:
Ak používate zariadenie na prenos signálu, napríklad rozbočovač USB, odpojte ho, pripojte
zariadenie priamo k počítaču a znova sa pokúste spustiť tlač. Ak sa tlač spustí normálne,
problém spôsobilo zariadenie na prenos signálu. Podrobnejšie informácie získate od predajcu
zariadenia na prenos signálu.
Problém môže spôsobovať aj kábel USB. Vymeňte kábel USB a pokúste sa znova spustiť tlač.
Kontrola č. 3: Ak tlačíte z počítača, reštartujte počítač.
Ak sú v tlačovom fronte nepotrebné tlačové úlohy, odstráňte ich.
Odstránenie nežiaducej tlačovej úlohy
Kontrola č. 4: Skontrolujte, či je v dialógovom okne Tlač (Print) vybratý
názov zariadenia.
Zariadenie nebude správne tlačiť, ak používate ovládač určený pre inú tlačiareň.
V systéme Windows skontrolujte, či je názov zariadenia vybratý v dialógovom okne Tlačiť (Print).
V počítači Macintosh skontrolujte, či je názov zariadenia vybratý v poli Tlačiareň (Printer) dialógového
okna Tlač (Print).
Poznámka
Ak chcete, aby bolo zariadenie vybraté ako predvolené, vyberte možnosť Nastaviť tlačiareň ako
predvolenú (Set as Default Printer) (Windows), Predvolená tlačiareň (Default Printer) alebo
Nastaviť ako predvolené (Make Default) (v počítačoch Macintosh).
Kontrola č. 5: Správne nakonfigurujte port tlačiarne.
Nakonfigurujte port USBnnn (kde „n“ je číslo) ako port tlačiarne.
1. Použitím správcovských oprávnení sa prihláste ako používateľ.
2. Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a pod položkou Hardvér a zvuk
(Hardware and Sound) vyberte voľbu Tlačiareň (Printer).
V systéme Windows XP spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na položky
Tlačiarne a iný hardvér (Printers and Other Hardware) a Tlačiarne a faxy (Printers and Faxes).
V systéme Windows 2000 spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na položku
Tlačiarne (Printers).
Tlač sa nespustí
Strana 603 z celkového počtu 684
3. Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na ikonu Canon XXX Printer a vyberte možnosť
Vlastnosti (Properties).
4. Kliknite na kartu Porty (Ports) a skontrolujte nastavenia portu.
Skontrolujte, či je v stĺpci Tlačiareň (Printer) zobrazená tlačiareň Canon XXX Printer a či je pre
možnosť Tlačiť s použitím nasledovných portov (Print to the following port(s)) vybratý port s
názvom USBnnn (kde „n“ je číslo).
Ak je nastavenie nesprávne, znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers alebo nastavte správny port
tlačiarne.
Kontrola č. 6: Je veľkosť tlačených údajov mimoriadne veľká?
Na hárku Page Setup kliknite na položku Print Options. Potom v zobrazenom dialógovom okne
začiarknite políčko Prevent loss of print data.
Na začiatok strany
Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením
Strana 604 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením
Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením
Kontrola č. 1: Tlačilo zariadenie dlhý čas bez prerušenia?
Ak zariadenie tlačí bez prerušenia dlhší čas, môže sa prehriať tlačová hlava. Z dôvodu ochrany
tlačovej hlavy môže zariadenie pozastaviť tlač v momente, keď ukončí tlač riadka, a potom tlač znova
obnoviť.
V takom prípade vo vhodnom momente na chvíľu prerušte tlač a vypnite zariadenie aspoň na 15
minút.
Okrem toho zariadenie, ktoré dlhší čas neprerušene tlačí grafické obrázky alebo fotografie s
intenzívnymi farbami, môže zastaviť tlač, aby sa šetrila tlačová hlava. V takom prípade sa tlač
automaticky neobnoví. Vypnite zariadenie aspoň na 15 minút.
Upozornenie
Tlačová hlava a okolité časti vnútri zariadenia sa môžu veľmi zahriať. Nikdy sa nedotýkajte
tlačovej hlavy ani okolitých častí.
Kontrola č. 2: Je vložený papier?
Skontrolujte, či je v zadnom zásobníku vložený papier.
Ak sa v zariadení minul papier, vložte ho.
Kontrola č. 3: Obsahujú tlačené dokumenty veľa fotografií alebo
ilustrácií?
Pri tlači veľkého množstva údajov, napríklad fotografií alebo grafických obrázkov, potrebuje
zariadenie a počítač viac času na ich spracovanie. Vtedy sa môže zdať, že zariadenie prestane
pracovať.
Okrem toho pri nepretržitej tlači údajov na obyčajný papier, pri ktorej sa spotrebuje veľké množstvo
atramentu, môže zariadenie dočasne prerušiť činnosť. V každom prípade počkajte, kým sa proces
nedokončí.
Poznámka
Ak tlačíte dokument s veľkou potlačenou plochou alebo viacero kópií dokumentu, môže sa tlač
pozastaviť, aby uschol atrament.
Kontrola č. 4: Ak sa kopírovanie zastaví pred dokončením, pokúste sa
kopírovať znovu.
Ak sa počas kopírovania vyskytnú niektoré chyby, po uplynutí určitého času zariadenie preruší
činnosť.
Na začiatok strany
Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje
Strana 605 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje
Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje
Kontrola č. 1: Sú upchaté dýzy tlačovej hlavy?
Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament.
Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy
nájdete v časti Bežná údržba .
Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne:
Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách
vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy.
Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy:
Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE.
Kontrola č. 2: Je kazeta FINE správne nainštalovaná?
Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je spoľahlivo zatvorený, atrament sa nemusí správne
vystrekovať.
Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, potom zaisťovací kryt
kazety s atramentom zatvorte.
Pri zatváraní potlačte na zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto.
Kontrola č. 3: Ak sa v kazete FINE minul atrament, vymeňte ju za novú.
Na začiatok strany
Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo
Strana 606 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo
Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo
Kontrola č. 1: Tlačíte v režime Quiet Mode?
Rýchlosť tlačiarne sa zníži, ak ste v ovládači tlačiarne vybrali režim Quiet Mode. Ak chcete tlač
urýchliť, netlačte v režime Quiet Mode.
Zníženie hluku zariadenia
Kontrola č. 2: Je nastavená príliš vysoká kvalita tlače?
V ovládači tlačiarne zvýšte rýchlosť tlače. Nastavením uprednostňovania rýchlosti sa tlač zrýchli.
1. Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne.
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows)
Ak používate zariadenie MP270 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne
Ak používate zariadenie MP250 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne
* Prv než kliknutím sem otvoríte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne, ukončite všetky
spustené aplikácie.
2. Na karte Main nastavte možnosť Print Quality na hodnotu Fast.
Pri niektorých typoch médií nemusí byť hodnota Fast dostupná.
1. Otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print).
Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh)
2. V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte možnosť Quality & Media a potom nastavte
možnosť Print Quality na hodnotu Fast.
Pri niektorých typoch médií nemusí byť hodnota Fast dostupná.
Poznámka
V niektorých systémových prostrediach sa podľa postupu uvedeného vyššie nemusí rýchlosť tlače
výrazne zrýchliť.
Na začiatok strany
Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu
Strana 607 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu
Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na
výmenu
Kontrola č. 1: Nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) ?
Skontrolujte, či indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti na zeleno.
Držiak kazety FINE sa pohybuje len v prípade, že je zapnuté napájanie. Ak nesvieti indikátor
Napájanie (Power), zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a zapnite zariadenie.
Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte, kým
indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno, a znova otvorte
skenovaciu jednotku (kryt).
Kontrola č. 2: Nezobrazuje sa na displeji LED kód chyby?
Zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), skontrolujte, či sa zobrazuje kód chyby, vykonaním príslušných
opatrení odstráňte chybu a potom znovu otvorte kryt. Podrobné informácie o odstránení chyby
nájdete v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby .
Kontrola č. 3: Nebola skenovacia jednotka (kryt tlačiarne) otvorená
minimálne 10 minút?
Ak bola skenovacia jednotka (kryt) otvorená minimálne 10 minút, držiak kazety FINE sa posunie
doprava, aby sa tlačová hlava chránila pred vyschnutím. Zatvorením a opätovným otvorením
skenovacej jednotky (krytu) sa držiak kazety FINE vráti doľava.
Kontrola č. 4: Tlačilo zariadenie dlhý čas bez prerušenia?
Zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), chvíľu počkajte a znovu ju otvorte.
Ak zariadenie tlačí dlhší čas bez prerušenia, držiak kazety FINE sa nemusí posunúť do stredu,
pretože tlačová hlava môže byť prehriata.
Poznámka
Otvorením skenovacej jednotky (krytu) počas tlače sa držiak kazety FINE posunie doprava. Zatvorte
skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a po dokončení tlače ju znova otvorte.
Na začiatok strany
Papier sa správne nepodáva
Strana 608 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Papier sa správne nepodáva
Papier sa správne nepodáva
Kontrola č. 1: Pri vkladaní papiera nezabudnite vykonať nasledujúce
opatrenia.
Keď vkladáte dva alebo viac hárkov papiera, ešte pred vložením ich prevzdušnite.
Keď vkladáte dva alebo viac hárkov papiera, skontrolujte, či balík papiera nepresahuje značku
limitu vkladania papiera.
V závislosti od typu papiera či okolitých podmienok (vysoká, nízka teplota alebo vlhkosť) však
vkladanie maximálneho množstva papiera môže byť problematické. V takých prípadoch znížte
počet hárkov vkladaného papiera na menej ako polovicu limitu vkladania papiera.
Bez ohľadu na orientáciu tlače vždy vkladajte papier v orientácii na výšku.
Do zadného zásobníka vkladajte papier stranou určenou na tlač smerom NAHOR a vodiace lišty
posuňte tak, aby sa zarovnali s oboma stranami papiera.
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či papier, na ktorý sa tlačí, nie je príliš hrubý
ani zvlnený.
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Kontrola č. 3: Pri vkladaní obálok nezabudnite vykonať nasledujúce
opatrenia.
Pri tlači na obálky si prečítajte časť Vkladanie papiera a originálov a pred tlačou pripravte obálky.
Pripravené obálky vložte v orientácii na výšku. Ak obálky vložíte v orientácii na šírku, nebudú sa
správne podávať.
Kontrola č. 4: Skontrolujte, či sa v zadnom zásobníku nenachádzajú
žiadne cudzie predmety.
Papier sa správne nepodáva
Strana 609 z celkového počtu 684
Ak sa papier roztrhol v zadnom zásobníku, vyberte ho podľa postupu uvedeného v časti
papier .
Zaseknutý
Ak sú v zadnom zásobníku cudzie predmety, vypnite zariadenie, odpojte ho z napájania a cudzí
predmet vyberte.
Na začiatok strany
Zaseknutý papier
Strana 610 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zaseknutý papier
Zaseknutý papier
Poznámka
Ak počas tlače musíte vypnúť zariadenie, aby ste odstránili zaseknutý papier, pred vypnutím
zariadenia zrušte tlač stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset.
Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom zásobníku
V iných prípadoch
Na začiatok strany
Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom záso...
Strana 611 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zaseknutý papier > Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v
zadnom zásobníku
Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom
zásobníku
Papier vyberte podľa nasledujúceho postupu.
1. Papier pomaly vyťahujte zo zadného zásobníka alebo z otvoru na výstup papiera
(podľa toho, odkiaľ sa dá vytiahnuť jednoduchšie).
Poznámka
Ak sa papier trhá a kúsky ostávajú vnútri zariadenia, vypnite zariadenie, otvorte skenovaciu
jednotku (kryt) a vyberte papier.
Dávajte pozor, aby ste sa nedotkli častí vnútri zariadenia.
Po odstránení všetkého papiera zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a znova zapnite zariadenie.
Ak nemôžete papier vytiahnuť, vypnite zariadenie a znovu ho zapnite. Papier sa možno vysunie
automaticky.
2. Vložte nový papier a stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset na zariadení.
Ak ste v kroku č. 1 vypli zariadenie, zrušia sa všetky tlačové úlohy v tlačovom fronte. V prípade potreby
zopakujte tlač.
Poznámka
Pri opätovnom vkladaní papiera skontrolujte, či používate správny papier a či ho správne
vkladáte.
Vkladanie papiera a originálov
Papier veľkosti A5 je vhodný na tlač dokumentov, ktoré obsahujú prevažne text. Neodporúčame
ho používať na tlač dokumentov s fotografiami alebo grafikou, pretože sa výtlačok môže zvlniť a
spôsobiť zaseknutie papiera.
Ak papier nemôžete odstrániť alebo sa papier vnútri zariadenia roztrhol, prípadne sa chyba zaseknutia
papiera opakuje aj po odstránení papiera, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Na začiatok strany
V iných prípadoch
Strana 612 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zaseknutý papier > V iných prípadoch
V iných prípadoch
Skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti:
Kontrola č. 1: Nenachádzajú sa cudzie predmety okolo otvoru na
výstup papiera?
Kontrola č. 2: Nenachádzajú sa cudzie predmety v zadnom zásobníku?
Ak sú v zadnom zásobníku cudzie predmety, vypnite zariadenie, odpojte ho z napájania a cudzí
predmet vyberte.
Kontrola č. 3: Je papier zvlnený?
Kontrola č. 3: Vyrovnajte zvlnenie a vložte papier.
Na začiatok strany
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Strana 613 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Zobrazuje sa chyba č. B200 – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite tlačiareň a odpojte jej napájací kábel
od napájacieho zdroja. Potom sa obráťte na servisné stredisko. (B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn
the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service
center.)
Zobrazuje sa chyba č. **** – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite a znovu zapnite tlačiareň. Ak sa tým
chyba neodstráni, pozrite si bližšie informácie v užívateľskej príručke. (**** A printer error has occurred.
Turn the printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.)
Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 300
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 1700
Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1688
Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1686
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2001 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2002 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Iné chybové hlásenia
Zobrazuje sa obrazovka Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní,
skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program)
Zobrazuje sa ikona Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní,
skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program)
Zobrazuje sa chyba č. B200 – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite tlačiareň a odpojte jej
napájací kábel od napájacieho zdroja. Potom sa obráťte na servisné stredisko. (B200 A
printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer
from the power supply. Then contact the service center.)
Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja napájania.
Obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Zobrazuje sa chyba č. **** – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite a znovu zapnite
tlačiareň. Ak sa tým chyba neodstráni, pozrite si bližšie informácie v užívateľskej
príručke. (**** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If this
doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.)
„****“ sú alfanumerické znaky, ktoré závisia od chyby, ktorá sa vyskytla.
Zobrazuje sa číslo 5100
Skontrolujte, či nie je blokovaný pohyb držiaka kazety FINE.
Zrušte tlač z počítača a vypnite zariadenie. Potom vyberte zaseknutý papier alebo ochranný
materiál, ktorý bráni v pohybe držiaka kazety FINE, a znovu zapnite zariadenie.
Dôležité
Dávajte pozor, aby ste sa nedotkli častí vnútri zariadenia. Ak sa ich dotknete, zariadenie
nemusí správne tlačiť.
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Zobrazuje sa číslo 6000
Ak sa pred zariadením nachádza nejaký predmet, odstráňte ho.
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Strana 614 z celkového počtu 684
Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom vypnite a znova zapnite napájanie.
Zobrazujú sa štyri alfanumerické znaky a hlásenie Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne
(Printer error has occurred)
Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja napájania.
Zariadenie znova pripojte a zapnite.
Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko.
Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie
Kontrola č. 1: Ak nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power), skontrolujte, či je
zástrčka napájacieho kábla spoľahlivo zasunutá, a potom zapnite zariadenie.
Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte,
kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno.
Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je v ovládači tlačiarne správne konfigurovaný port
tlačiarne.
* V nasledujúcich pokynoch znaky „ XXX“ označujú názov zariadenia.
1.
Použitím správcovských oprávnení sa prihláste ako používateľ.
2.
Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a pod položkou Hardvér a zvuk (Hardware and
Sound) vyberte voľbu Tlačiareň (Printer).
V systéme Windows XP spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na
položky Tlačiarne a iný hardvér (Printers and Other Hardware) a Tlačiarne a faxy (Printers
and Faxes).
V systéme Windows 2000 spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na
položku Tlačiarne (Printers).
3.
Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na ikonu Canon XXX Printer a vyberte možnosť
Vlastnosti (Properties).
4.
Kliknite na kartu Porty (Ports) a skontrolujte nastavenia portu.
Skontrolujte, či je v stĺpci Tlačiareň (Printer) zobrazená tlačiareň Canon XXX Printer a či je
pre možnosť Tlačiť s použitím nasledovných portov (Print to the following port(s)) vybratý
port s názvom USBnnn (kde „n“ je číslo).
Ak nastavenie portu nie je správne, znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers alebo zmeňte
nastavenie portu podľa používaného rozhrania.
Kontrola č. 3: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do zariadenia aj
počítača.
Ak používate zariadenie na prenos signálu, napríklad rozbočovač USB, odpojte ho,
pripojte zariadenie priamo k počítaču a znova sa pokúste spustiť tlač. Ak sa tlač spustí
normálne, problém spôsobilo zariadenie na prenos signálu. Podrobnejšie informácie
získate od predajcu zariadenia na prenos signálu.
Problém môže spôsobovať aj kábel USB. Vymeňte kábel USB a pokúste sa znova
spustiť tlač.
Kontrola č. 4: Skontrolujte, či sú správne nainštalované ovládače MP Drivers.
Podľa postupu opísaného v časti Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers
odinštalujte ovládače MP Drivers. Potom do diskovej jednotky počítača vložte Inštalačný disk
CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) , spustite inštaláciu Custom Install a výberom položky MP Drivers
znova nainštalujte ovládače.
Kontrola č. 5: Skontrolujte stav zariadenia v počítači.
Podľa nasledujúceho postupu skontrolujte stav zariadenia.
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
1.
Strana 615 z celkového počtu 684
Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a kliknite na položky Hardvér a zvuk
(Hardware and Sound) a Správca zariadení (Device Manager).
Ak sa zobrazí obrazovka Kontrola používateľských kont (User Account Control), riaďte sa
jej pokynmi.
V systéme Windows XP spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel), vyberte možnosť Výkon
a údržba (Performance and Maintenance), Systém (System) a potom na hárku Hardvér
(Hardware) kliknite na položku Správca zariadení (Device Manager).
V systéme Windows 2000 spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel), vyberte možnosť
Systém (System) a potom na hárku Hardvér (Hardware) kliknite na položku Správca
zariadení (Device Manager).
2.
Dvakrát kliknite na položku Radiče Univerzálnej sériovej zbernice (Universal Serial
Bus controllers) a potom na položku Podpora tlače pomocou portu USB (USB Printing
Support).
Ak sa položka Podpora tlače pomocou portu USB (USB Printing Support) nezobrazí,
skontrolujte, či je zariadenie správne pripojené k počítaču.
Kontrola č. 3: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do zariadenia aj
počítača.
3.
Kliknite na kartu Všeobecné (General) a skontrolujte, či sa nevyskytol problém so
zariadením.
Ak sa zobrazí hlásenie o chybe zariadenia, podrobnosti o jej odstránení nájdete v
Pomocníkovi systému Windows.
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 300
Kontrola č. 1: Ak nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power), skontrolujte, či je
zástrčka napájacieho kábla spoľahlivo zasunutá, a potom zapnite zariadenie.
Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte,
kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno.
Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do zariadenia aj
počítača.
Ak používate zariadenie na prenos signálu, napríklad rozbočovač USB, odpojte ho,
pripojte zariadenie priamo k počítaču a znova sa pokúste spustiť tlač. Ak sa tlač spustí
normálne, problém spôsobilo zariadenie na prenos signálu. Podrobnejšie informácie
získate od predajcu zariadenia na prenos signálu.
Problém môže spôsobovať aj kábel USB. Vymeňte kábel USB a pokúste sa znova
spustiť tlač.
Kontrola č. 3: Skontrolujte, či je v dialógovom okne Tlač (Print) vybratý názov
zariadenia.
Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh)
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 1700
Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 0, 8 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
vykonajte príslušné opatrenia.
Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1688
Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 1, 6 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
vykonajte príslušné opatrenia.
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Strana 616 z celkového počtu 684
Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1686
Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 1, 3 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
vykonajte príslušné opatrenia.
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2001 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 0, 9 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
vykonajte príslušné opatrenia.
Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2002 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 1, 9 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
vykonajte príslušné opatrenia.
Iné chybové hlásenia
Kontrola: Ak sa chybové hlásenie zobrazí mimo monitora stavu tlačiarne,
skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti:
Údaje nemožno dočasne ukladať z dôvodu nedostatočného miesta na disku ("Could
not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space")
Odstránením nepotrebných súborov zvýšte množstvo voľného miesta na disku.
Údaje nemožno dočasne ukladať z dôvodu nedostatočnej pamäte ("Could not spool
successfully due to insufficient memory")
Ukončením iných spustených aplikácií zvýšte dostupnú pamäť.
Ak naďalej nemožno tlačiť, reštartujte počítač a skúste zopakovať tlač.
Nedá sa nájsť ovládač tlačiarne ("Printer driver could not be found")
Podľa postupu opísaného v časti Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers
odinštalujte ovládač tlačiarne a potom ho znova nainštalujte.
Nemožno tlačiť: názov aplikácie – názov súboru ("Could not print Application name File name")
Po dokončení aktuálnej tlačovej úlohy skúste tlačiť znovu.
Zobrazuje sa obrazovka Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania
atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended
Survey Program)
Po troch a potom po šiestich mesiacoch od nainštalovania Programu rozšíreného prieskumu
používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov sa zobrazí obrazovka s potvrdením
odoslania informácií o používaní tlačiarne. Potom sa približne štyri roky bude zobrazovať každých
šesť mesiacov.
Prečítajte si pokyny na obrazovke a postupujte podľa nasledujúcich krokov.
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Strana 617 z celkového počtu 684
Ak súhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu:
Kliknite na tlačidlo Agree a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Informácie o používaní
tlačiarne sa odošlú prostredníctvom internetu. Ak ste postupovali podľa pokynov na
obrazovke, informácie sa začnú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a
obrazovka s potvrdením sa už nezobrazí.
Poznámka
Pri odosielaní informácií sa môže zobraziť obrazovka s upozornením, napríklad
obrazovka na zabezpečenie internetu. V takom prípade skontrolujte, či je názov programu
IJPLMUI.exe, a potom ho povoľte.
Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka Send automatically from the next time, informácie sa
nebudú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a v čase
nasledujúceho prieskumu sa zobrazí obrazovka s potvrdením. Ak chcete, aby sa
informácie odosielali automaticky, pozrite si časť Zmena nastavenia obrazovky s
potvrdením:.
Ak nesúhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu:
Kliknite na tlačidlo Do not agree. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zatvorí a prieskum sa
momentálne preskočí. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zobrazí znovu po troch mesiacoch.
Odinštalovanie Programu rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových
tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov:
Ak chcete odinštalovať Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní,
skenerov alebo faxov, kliknite na tlačidlo Odinštalovať (Uninstall) a pokračujte podľa pokynov
na obrazovke.
Zmena nastavenia obrazovky s potvrdením:
1. V ponuke Štart (Start) vyberte nasledujúce položky.
V systéme Windows Vista vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel
(Control Panel) > Odinštalovanie programu (Uninstall a program).
V systéme Windows XP vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel
(Control Panel) > Pridanie alebo odstránenie programov (Add or Remove
Programs).
V systéme Windows 2000 vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Nastavenie
(Settings) > Ovládací panel (Control Panel) > Pridať alebo odstrániť programy
(Add/Remove Programs).
Poznámka
V systéme Windows Vista sa pri inštalácii, odinštalovaní alebo spúšťaní softvéru
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Strana 618 z celkového počtu 684
môže zobraziť dialógové okno s potvrdením alebo varovaním.
Toto dialógové okno sa zobrazí v prípade, ak sa na vykonanie úlohy vyžadujú
správcovské oprávnenia.
Ak ste prihlásení ako správca, pokračujte kliknutím na tlačidlo Pokračovať
(Continue) alebo Povoliť (Allow).
2. Vyberte položku Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
3. Vyberte možnosť Change.
Ak postupujete podľa pokynov na obrazovke a vyberiete možnosť Yes, obrazovka s
potvrdením sa zobrazí v čase nasledujúceho prieskumu
Ak vyberiete možnosť No, informácie sa budú odosielať automaticky.
Poznámka
Ak vyberiete možnosť Odinštalovať (Uninstall) (alebo Odstrániť (Remove)), Program
rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov sa
odinštaluje. Pokračujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke.
Zobrazuje sa ikona Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania
atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended
Survey Program)
Ak je nainštalovaný Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov
alebo faxov, odosielanie informácií o používaní tlačiarne je naplánované po troch a potom po
šiestich mesiacoch od nainštalovania. Potom sa približne štyri roky budú odosielať každých šesť
mesiacov. Ak nastane čas na odoslanie informácií o používaní tlačiarne, v Doku (Dock) sa zobrazí
ikona Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.3.9 sa Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových
tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov neinštaluje.
Po kliknutí na ikonu si prečítajte pokyny na obrazovke a postupujte podľa nasledujúcich krokov.
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Strana 619 z celkového počtu 684
Ak súhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu:
Kliknite na tlačidlo Agree a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Informácie o používaní
tlačiarne sa odošlú prostredníctvom internetu. Ak ste postupovali podľa pokynov na
obrazovke, informácie sa začnú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a
obrazovka s potvrdením sa už nezobrazí.
Poznámka
Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka Send automatically from the next time, informácie sa
nebudú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a v čase
nasledujúceho prieskumu sa v Doku (Dock) zobrazí ikona Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax
Extended Survey Program.
Ak nesúhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu:
Kliknite na tlačidlo Do not agree. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zatvorí a prieskum sa
momentálne preskočí. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zobrazí znovu po troch mesiacoch.
Zastavenie odosielania informácií:
Kliknite na tlačidlo Turn off. Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových
tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov sa deaktivuje a informácie sa prestanú odosielať. Informácie o
spôsobe obnovenia prieskumu nájdete v časti Zmena nastavenia: .
Odinštalovanie Programu rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových
tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov:
1. Zastavte Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov
alebo faxov.
Zmena nastavenia:
2. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications), dvakrát kliknite na
priečinok Canon Utilities a potom na priečinok Inkjet Extended Survey Program.
3. Presuňte súbor Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.app do Koša
(Trash).
4. Reštartujte počítač.
Vyprázdnite Kôš (Trash) a reštartujte počítač.
Zmena nastavenia:
Ak chcete, aby sa obrazovka s potvrdením zobrazovala pri každom odosielaní informácií o
používaní tlačiarne, alebo chcete pokračovať v prieskume, postupujte podľa nasledujúcich
krokov.
1. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications), dvakrát kliknite na
priečinok Canon Utilities a potom na priečinok Inkjet Extended Survey Program.
2. Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent:
Ak začiarknete toto políčko, informácie sa budú odosielať automaticky.
Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka, v čase nasledujúceho prieskumu sa v Doku (Dock)
zobrazí ikona Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program. Kliknite na
ikonu a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke.
Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie
Strana 620 z celkového počtu 684
Tlačidlo Turn off/Turn on:
Kliknutím na tlačidlo Turn off sa Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania
atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov deaktivuje.
Kliknutím na tlačidlo Turn on sa Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania
atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov znovu aktivuje.
Na začiatok strany
Pre používateľov systému Windows
Strana 621 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Pre používateľov systému Windows
Pre používateľov systému Windows
Nezobrazuje sa monitor stavu tlačiarne
Kontrola: Je monitor stavu tlačiarne zapnutý?
Skontrolujte, či je v ponuke Option monitora stavu tlačiarne vybratá možnosť Enable Status
Monitor.
1.
Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne.
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows)
2.
Na karte Maintenance kliknite na možnosť View Printer Status.
3.
Ak v ponuke Option nie je vybratá možnosť Enable Status Monitor, vyberte ju.
Ak používate systém Windows Vista:
Spustenie programu MP Navigator EX pri každom stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) na
zariadení
Kontrola: Nastavte odpoveď na stlačenie tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) na
zariadení.
Podľa nasledujúceho postupu nastavte odpoveď v počítači.
1.
Použitím správcovských oprávnení sa prihláste ako používateľ.
2.
Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a kliknite na položky Hardvér a zvuk
(Hardware and Sound) a Skenery a fotoaparáty (Scanners and Cameras).
3.
Vyberte položku WIA Canon XXX ser a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Vlastnosti
(Properties).
Ak sa zobrazí obrazovka Kontrola používateľských kont (User Account Control), kliknite na
tlačidlo Pokračovať (Continue).
4.
Na obrazovke Vlastnosti zariadenia WIA Canon XXX ser (WIA Canon XXX ser
Properties) kliknite na kartu Udalosti (Events).
5.
V časti Akcie (Actions) vyberte možnosť Spustiť nasledovný program (Start this
program) a potom v rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte aplikáciu MP Navigator EX Ver3.0.
V rozbaľovacej ponuke Vyberte udalosť (Select an event) vyberte požadovanú udalosť a
potom vyberte, aby sa pre každú udalosť spúšťal program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0. Ak je
už program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 vybratý pre každú udalosť, kliknite na tlačidlo Zrušiť
(Cancel).
6.
Kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
Na začiatok strany
Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje... Strana 622 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje chybové
hlásenie (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa
zobrazuje chybové hlásenie (len pre zariadenie MP270 series)
V nasledujúcej časti sú uvedené možné chyby, ktoré sa môžu vyskytnúť pri tlači priamo zo zariadenia
kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge, a postupy na ich odstránenie.
Poznámka
V tejto časti sú opísané chyby, ktoré sa zobrazujú na zariadeniach kompatibilných so štandardom
PictBridge od spoločnosti Canon. Chybové hlásenia a činnosti sa môžu líšiť v závislosti od
používaného zariadenia. V prípade zariadení kompatibilných so štandardom PictBridge inej značky
ako Canon skontrolujte kód chyby na displeji LED a vykonajte príslušné opatrenia na jej
odstránenie. Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby .
Informácie o chybách zobrazených na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge a ich
riešení nájdete aj v referenčnej príručke k tomuto zariadeniu. V prípade iných problémov so
zariadením sa obráťte na výrobcu.
Chybové hlásenie na zariadení
kompatibilnom so štandardom
PictBridge
Opatrenie
[Printer in use/Tlačiareň sa používa]
Ak zariadenie tlačí z počítača alebo sa zahrieva, počkajte,
kým sa úloha nedokončí.
Zariadenie automaticky spustí tlač, keď bude pripravené.
[No paper/Chýba papier]
Vložte papier do zadného zásobníka a na displeji zariadenia
kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge vyberte možnosť
Pokračovať (Continue)*.
* Ak chcete obnoviť tlač, namiesto výberu možnosti
Pokračovať (Continue) na kompatibilnom zariadení môžete
tiež stlačiť tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color)
na multifunkčnom zariadení.
[Paper Error/Chyba papiera]
Výstupný zásobník papiera je zatvorený.
Otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a stlačte tlačidlo
Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) na multifunkčnom
zariadení.
[Paper jam/Zaseknutie papiera]
Výberom položky Zastaviť (Stop) na displeji zariadenia
kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge zastavte tlač.
Vyberte zaseknutý papier, vložte nový papier, stlačte tlačidlo
Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) na multifunkčnom
zaradení a pokúste sa znovu spustiť tlač.
[Printer cover open/Otvorený kryt
tlačiarne]
Zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) zariadenia.
[No Print Head/Chýba tlačová hlava]
Kazeta FINE nie je vložená alebo nie je kompatibilná s týmto
zariadením.
Podľa pokynov v odsekoch E, 0, 4 / E, 0, 5 v časti Na displeji
LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia.
[Waste tank full/Odpadová kazeta je
plná]/[Ink absorber full/Absorbér
odpadového atramentu je plný]
Absorbér odpadového atramentu je takmer plný.
Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 0, 9 v časti Na displeji LED sa
zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia.
[No ink/Chýba atrament]/[Ink cassette
error/Chyba kazety s atramentom]
V kazete FINE sa minul alebo sa pravdepodobne minul
atrament.
Kazeta FINE možno nie je správne vložená alebo nie je
kompatibilná s týmto zariadením.
Skontrolujte kód chyby na displeji LED a vykonajte príslušné
Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje... Strana 623 z celkového počtu 684
opatrenie na odstránenie chyby.
Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby
[Hardware Error/Hardvérová chyba]
Vyskytla sa chyba kazety FINE.
Vymeňte kazetu FINE.
Bežná údržba
Na začiatok strany
Problems with Scanning
Strana 624 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning
Problems with Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Slow Scanning Speed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Page top
Scanner Does Not Work
Strana 625 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work
Scanner Does Not Work
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a hub, remove it from the hub
and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 4: Restart the computer.
Page top
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Strana 626 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Check 1: Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed.
If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install
and install MP Drivers.
Check 2: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and
select the machine.
Important
Do not select the model name that includes WIA in it.
Note
The operation may differ depending on the application.
Check 3: Start from a TWAIN-compliant application.
Page top
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen ... Strana 627 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner
Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Screen Does Not Appear
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a hub, remove it from the hub
and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 4: Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed.
If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install
and install MP Drivers.
Check 5: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and
select the machine.
Note
The operation may differ depending on the application.
Check 6: Make sure that the application is TWAIN-compliant.
You cannot open ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.
Check 7: Exit ScanGear (scanner driver) if it is running on another
application.
Page top
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Strana 628 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Check 1: Increase the scanning resolution.
Resolution
Check 2: Set the scale to 100%.
Some applications do not display images clearly if the image is too small.
Check 3: If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and
scan again.
On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), select Magazine(Color) in Select Source.
On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), set Descreen in Image Settings to ON.
Image Settings
Note
If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo, take the above measures and scan again.
If you use MP Navigator EX, set Document Type to Magazine(Color) or enable Descreen in the Scan
Settings dialog box and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Check 4: Check the monitor's color depth.
From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Adjust screen resolution
to open the Display Settings dialog box. Set the color depth to Medium (16 bit) or Highest (32 bit).
Windows XP:
From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Display to open the Display Properties dialog box. On
the Settings tab, set Colors to Medium (16 bit) or Highest (32 bit).
Windows 2000:
From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel > Display to open the Display Properties dialog
box. On the Settings tab, set Colors to High Color (16 bit) or True Color (32 bit).
Check 5: Clean the Platen and Document Cover.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Check 6: If the document is in poor condition (dirty, faded, etc.), use
Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. in
Image Settings on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver).
Image Settings
Check 7: If the color tone of images is different from the original document,
take the following measures and scan again.
On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to
None.
Image Settings
Open the Preferences dialog box from the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) and set
Color Matching on the Color Settings tab.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Strana 629 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Check: Specify the scan area.
(Auto Crop) in ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the cropping frame (scan
Click
area) according to the document size. You can also manually specify the scan area, for example when
there are white margins along the document or when you want to create custom cropping frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page top
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Strana 630 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Scan each item individually.
Some applications do not support multiple image scanning.
Page top
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Strana 631 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Multiple image scanning may not be supported.
Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.
Page top
Slow Scanning Speed
Strana 632 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Slow Scanning Speed
Slow Scanning Speed
Check 1: To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to
around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi.
Resolution
Check 2: Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None.
Image Settings
Check 3: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document
checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Check 4: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text
documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Page top
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Strana 633 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Check 1: Exit other applications and try again.
Check 2: Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.
Resolution
Page top
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Strana 634 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Check 1: Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear
(scanner driver) and scan again.
Check 2: Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space,
then scan again.
Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image
size is too large (such as when scanning a large document at high resolution.)
Check 3: For Location of Temporary Files in MP Navigator EX, specify a
folder on a drive with sufficient free space.
General Tab
Check 4: Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports.
Disconnect other devices.
Page top
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Strana 635 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Check: Disconnect the machine from the computer, then uninstall and
reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Step 1: Uninstall the MP Drivers.
See "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers " for details.
Step 2: Uninstall MP Navigator EX.
1.
From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 3.0 > MP
Navigator EX Uninstall.
2.
When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
3.
When uninstallation is complete, click OK.
MP Navigator EX is uninstalled.
Step 3: Reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and reinstall the
MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Software Problems
Strana 636 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems
Software Problems
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail
Software Program
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Page top
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the...
Strana 637 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear
in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in
the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program
Check 1: MP Navigator EX may not support the e-mail software program.
The following e-mail software programs are supported. (Image are attached to the mail message
automatically.)
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000)
- Microsoft Outlook
Check 2: If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check
that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.
Check 3: If using an e-mail software program other than the ones listed
above, select None (Attach Manually) when prompted to select a program
and attach the scanned image manually.
Page top
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Strana 638 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Check: Set the printing size in the application.
Page top
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
Strana 639 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer
Monitor
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer
Monitor
Check 1: Change the display setting in the application.
You cannot reduce the display size in "Paint." To reduce the display size, open the images in an
application.
For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.
Check 2: Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and
scan again.
The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.
Resolution
Page top
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Strana 640 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Does Not Open
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Check: If the file format is not supported by the application, scan the image
again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG.
For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.
Page top
MP Navigator EX Problems
Strana 641 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems
MP Navigator EX Problems
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image
Page top
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Strana 642 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again.
If the matching size is not found, scan at a larger size and trim the image.
See the Toolbar (Trimming) in " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details.
Page top
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When ...
Strana 643 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected
Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly
When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Check that the MP Navigator EX settings are correctly set
according to the document.
If you cannot scan properly with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel, specify the document type or size
in MP Navigator EX.
Scanning Photos and Documents
Page top
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Strana 644 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image
Is Slanted
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is
Slanted
Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document
checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Page top
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the ...
Strana 645 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation
Changes in the Scanned Image
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in
the Scanned Image
Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text
documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Page top
Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť
Strana 646 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť
Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť
Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť pomocou návodov v tejto časti, obráťte sa na predajcu zariadenia alebo
servisné stredisko.
Zamestnanci podpory spoločnosti Canon sú školení, aby boli schopní poskytovať technickú podporu na
uspokojenie potrieb zákazníkov.
Upozornenie
Ak zariadenie vydáva nezvyčajný zvuk, dym alebo zápach, ihneď ho vypnite. Odpojte napájací kábel z
elektrickej zásuvky a obráťte sa na predajcu alebo servisné stredisko. Nikdy sa nepokúšajte
zariadenie opravovať ani rozoberať sami.
Pokusy zákazníkov opraviť alebo rozobrať zariadenie budú dôvodom ukončenia záruky bez ohľadu
na to, či záručná lehota vypršala.
Skôr než sa obrátite na servisné stredisko, zistite si nasledujúce skutočnosti:
Názov produktu:
* Názov zariadenia sa nachádza na prednom obale inštalačnej príručky.
Sériové číslo: pozrite si inštalačnú príručku.
Podrobnosti o probléme.
Ako ste sa pokúsili problém vyriešiť a čo sa stalo.
Na začiatok strany
Často kladené otázky
Strana 647 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Často kladené otázky
Často kladené otázky
Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele pruhy
Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje
Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers
Tlač sa nespustí
Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením
Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie
Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé
Zaseknutý papier
Papier sa správne nepodáva
Na začiatok strany
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
Strana 648 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using
the printer driver.
Restrictions on the Printer Driver
With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be
enabled.
In this case, use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software.
If the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface
language, the driver screen may not be displayed properly.
Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties. If you change any of the items, you
will not be able to use the following functions correctly.
Also, if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications
that prohibit EMF spooling, such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor, the following
functions will not operate.
Preview before printing on the Main tab
Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box
Page Layout, Poster, Booklet, Duplex Printing, Specify Margin..., Print from Last Page, Collate, and
Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the
preview display may appear different from the actual print result.
With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs.
To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs.
If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box and change the setting of
Disable ICM required from the application software. This may solve the problem.
Software windows may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when fonts are set to Larger scale.
When you want to display the windows with Larger scale fonts, set the desktop theme to Windows
Classic as follows:
1. Select Control Panel from the Start menu.
2. Select Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Theme.
The Theme Settings dialog box opens.
3. At the Theme Settings dialog box, click the Themes tab, and select Windows Classic from
Theme.
4. Click OK.
Desktop changes to Windows Classic display.
Points to Note with Applications
There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation).
When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify
them.
When selecting Scaled, Fit-to-Page, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup
tab, the selected printing function may not be effective, depending on the version of Word.
If this happens, follow the procedure below.
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
Strana 649 z celkového počtu 684
1. Open Word's Print dialog box.
2. Open the printer driver setup window, specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab, and click
OK.
3. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box.
4. Open Word's Print dialog box again.
5. Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK.
6. Start printing.
Illustrator/Adobe Systems Inc.
If bitmap printing takes effect, printing may take time or some data may not be printed. Print after
unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box.
Page top
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Strana 650 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > General Notes (Scanner Driver)
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using
it.
Scanner Driver Restrictions
When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the
TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's
administrator for help.
Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from
standby mode. In that case, restart the computer.
Do not connect two or more machines or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same
computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the
Operation Panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices.
Software screens may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when font size is set to Larger scale. If
you want to display the screens with Larger scale fonts, change the theme in Appearance and
Personalization to Windows Classic as follows:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Select Appearance and Personalization > Personalization > Theme.
The Theme Settings dialog box opens.
3. On the Theme tab of the Theme Settings dialog box, select Windows Classic under Theme.
4. Click OK.
Desktop changes to Windows Classic view.
Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly.
Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow
these steps and scan again.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Exit ScanGear (scanner driver), then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect
it.
3. Turn on the machine.
ScanGear (scanner driver) cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an
application, ScanGear (scanner driver) cannot be opened for the second time when it is already
open.
Be sure to close the ScanGear (scanner driver) window before closing the application.
Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high
resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600
dpi in full-color.
ScanGear (scanner driver) and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.
Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.
Calibration may take time if the machine is connected via USB 1.1.
Applications with Restrictions on Use
If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005, you may not be able to
scan using the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer.
You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows Vista™ and Windows XP Media
Center Edition 2005. Scan with other applications such as MP Navigator EX.
In some applications, you may encounter a problem when you switch to thumbnail view in the
Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver). In that case, scan each document individually,
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Strana 651 z celkového počtu 684
changing Paper Size according to the document.
In some applications, if you select the View scanned images checkbox in the Auto Scan Mode tab of
ScanGear (scanner driver), the window displaying the thumbnails of the scanned images may close
automatically.
Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's
manual and change the settings accordingly.
Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only
the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image.
When scanning platen size images into a Microsoft Office application (such as Word, Excel or
PowerPoint), click Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise,
images may not be scanned correctly.
Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating
system's virtual memory and retry.
When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your
computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0% depending on the application. In
that case, cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the
operating system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan
the image via MP Navigator EX first, then save and import it into the application.
Page top
Príloha
Strana 652 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha
Príloha
Oblasť tlače
Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov
Odstránenie nežiaducej tlačovej úlohy
Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers
Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual
Preprava zariadenia
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows)
Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh)
Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Zdieľanie tlačiarne v sieti
Na začiatok strany
Oblasť tlače
Strana 653 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače
Oblasť tlače
Na zabezpečenie vyššej kvality tlače ponecháva zariadenie na okraji každého média okraje. Skutočná
oblasť tlače bude oblasť vnútri týchto okrajov.
Odporúčaná oblasť tlače
Oblasť tlače
: Spoločnosť Canon odporúča, aby ste tlačili v rámci tejto oblasti.
: Oblasť, na ktorú je možné tlačiť.
Tlač v tejto oblasti však môže ovplyvniť kvalitu tlače alebo presnosť podávania papiera.
Poznámka
Tlač bez okrajov
Výberom možnosti tlače bez okrajov môžete vytvárať výtlačky bez okrajov.
Pri tlači bez okrajov môže dôjsť na okrajoch k jemnému orezaniu, keďže obrázok, ktorý sa má
kopírovať, je zväčšený tak, aby vyplnil celú stranu.
Na tlač bez okrajov používajte nasledujúci typ papiera:
Glossy Photo Paper „na každodenné použitie“ GP-501
Photo Paper Glossy GP-502
Photo Paper Plus Semi-Gloss SG-201
Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT-101*
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201
Photo Paper Pro II PR-201
Matte Photo Paper MP-101
* V prípade zariadenia MP270 series možno tento papier použiť len pri tlači z počítača.
Tlač bez okrajov na akomkoľvek inom type papiera môže podstatne znížiť kvalitu tlače alebo
spôsobiť zmenu farebných odtieňov výtlačkov.
Tlač bez okrajov na obyčajnom papieri môže spôsobiť zníženú kvalitu výtlačkov. Použite ich len
na testovaciu tlač. Tlačiť bez okrajov na obyčajnom papieri môžete len pri tlači z počítača.
Tlačiť bez okrajov nemôžete na papier veľkosti Legal, A5, B5 ani na obálky.
V závislosti od typu papiera môže tlač bez okrajov znížiť kvalitu tlače na hornom a dolnom okraji
papiera, prípadne môže vytlačiť tieto časti rozmazane.
Formát Letter a Legal
Obálky
Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky
Na začiatok strany
Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky
Strana 654 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače > Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky
Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky
Veľkosť
Oblasť tlače (šírka x výška)
A5*
5,56 x 7,95 palca/141,2 x 202,0 mm
A4
8,00 x 11,38 palca/203,2 x 289,0 mm
B5*
6,90 x 9,80 palca/175,2 x 249,0 mm
4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm
3,73 x 5,69 palca/94,8 x 144,4 mm
4" x 8" / 10 x 20 cm*
3,73 x 7,69 palca/94,8 x 195,2 mm
5" x 7" / 13 x 18 cm
4,73 x 6,69 palca/120,2 x 169,8 mm
8" x 10" / 20 x 25 cm
7,73 x 9,69 palca/196,4 x 246,0 mm
Wide
3,73 x 6,80 palca/94,8 x 172,6 mm
* V prípade zariadenia MP270 series možno túto veľkosť strany použiť len pri tlači z počítača.
Odporúčaná oblasť tlače
Oblasť tlače
Na začiatok strany
Formát Letter a Legal
Strana 655 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače > Formát Letter a Legal
Formát Letter a Legal
Veľkosť
Oblasť tlače (šírka x výška)
Letter
8,00 x 10,69 palca/203,2 x 271,4 mm
Legal*
8,00 x 13,69 palca/203,2 x 347,6 mm
* Túto veľkosť papiera možno použiť len pri tlači z počítača.
Odporúčaná oblasť tlače
Oblasť tlače
Na začiatok strany
Obálky
Strana 656 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače > Obálky
Obálky
Veľkosť
Odporúčaná oblasť tlače (šírka x výška)
Európska DL* (European DL*)
4,06 x 7,07 palca/103,2 x 179,5 mm
US Comm. Env. #10*
3,86 x 7,91 palca/98,0 x 200,8 mm
* Túto veľkosť papiera možno použiť len pri tlači z počítača.
Odporúčaná oblasť tlače
Na začiatok strany
Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov
Strana 657 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov
Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov
Odpojenie krytu dokumentov:
Kryt dokumentov držte vo zvislej polohe.
Nasadenie krytu dokumentov:
Kryt dokumentov nasaďte podľa nasledujúceho obrázka vložením oboch závesov (A) krytu
dokumentov do držiaka (B) vo zvislom smere.
Na začiatok strany
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Strana 658 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
If the printer does not start printing, the print job data cancelled or failed may be remaining.
Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor.
1. Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor
Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar.
The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
2. Display the print jobs
Click Display Print Queue....
The print queue window opens.
3. Delete the print jobs
Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu.
When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.
The deletion of the print job is complete.
Important
Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the
print job of another user.
Note
When you perform this operation, all print jobs are deleted. If the print queue list contained a
necessary print job, start the printing process over from the beginning.
Page top
Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers
Strana 659 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers
Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers
Získanie najnovších ovládačov MP Drivers
Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers
Pred inštaláciou ovládačov MP Drivers
Inštalácia ovládačov MP Drivers
Na začiatok strany
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Strana 660 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
The MP Drivers include a printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear).
By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved.
Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
Important
You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your
responsibility.
Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
For information on how to delete the MP Drivers, refer to Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers .
Related Topics
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Strana 661 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
The MP Drivers you no longer use can be deleted.
When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running.
The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows:
When There is an Uninstaller
1. Start the uninstaller
In Windows Vista or Windows XP, select the Start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" ->
MP Drivers Uninstaller.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Programs -> "Your model name" -> MP Drivers
Uninstaller.
The MP Drivers Uninstaller dialog box is displayed.
Important
In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling
or starting software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
2. Execute the uninstaller
Click Execute. When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.
When all the files have been deleted, click Complete.
The deletion of the MP Drivers is complete.
Important
Printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear) will be deleted when you uninstall the MP Drivers.
When There is No Uninstaller
When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows Vista, follow these steps:
1. Select the printer to be deleted
Select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers.
Click the model to delete, then press the Alt key on your keyboard. On the File menu, click Delete.
2. Delete the printer
When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue. Then when the confirmation
message appears, click Yes.
The icon is deleted.
3. Select the printer driver to be deleted
Press the Alt key. On the File menu, select Run as administrator, and then click Server Properties....
When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
Click the Drivers tab. In the Installed printer drivers list, click the printer to delete.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Strana 662 z celkového počtu 684
4. Delete the printer driver
When you click Remove..., Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed.
Select Remove driver and driver package, and then click OK.
In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box, click Delete.
5. Click OK
The deletion of the printer driver is complete.
Important
You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers list.
If this happens, restart your computer, and try again.
Page top
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Strana 663 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Before Installing the MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also
refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed.
Checking the Machine Status
Properly connect the personal computer and the machine. For details on connection instructions,
refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting Started.
Turn off the machine.
Checking the Personal Computer Settings
Terminate all running applications.
In Windows Vista, log on as a user who has the administrator rights.
In Windows XP, log on as the computer administrator.
In Windows 2000, log on as a member of the Administrators group.
Note
When an old version of the MP Drivers is already installed, first delete (uninstall) that version. For
instructions on deleting the MP Drivers, see Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers .
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Installing the MP Drivers
Strana 664 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows:
1. Turn off the machine
Important
When you turn on the computer while the machine is on, the Windows Plug and Play function is
executed automatically, and the Found New Hardware window (Windows Vista) or Found New
Hardware Wizard window (Windows XP, Windows 2000) is displayed. In this case, click
Cancel.
2. Start the installer
Double-click the icon of the downloaded file.
The installation program starts.
Important
In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling
or starting software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
3. Install the driver
At the Welcome window, click Next.
Read the contents of the License Agreement window. After checking the contents, click Yes.
Installation of the MP Drivers begins.
After the Installation Complete window is displayed, check that the machine and the computer are
connected through a cable.
To select the connection port for your machine manually, check the Select printer port check box, and
click Manual selection. At the Select printer port window, select the connection destination, and then
click OK.
4. Complete the installation
Click Complete.
Turn on the machine, and wait awhile until the connection is recognized.
This procedure installs the MP Drivers is complete.
Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be
displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer.
Important
You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your
responsibility.
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Strana 665 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual
Strana 666 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual
Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual
Ak chcete z počítača odinštalovať všetky nainštalované príručky on-screen manual, postupujte podľa
nižšie uvedeného postupu.
Skôr ako začnete s odinštalovaním príručiek on-screen manual, ukončite všetky otvorené príručky onscreen manual.
Všetky nainštalované príručky on-screen manual sa odstránia naraz.
1. Kliknite na položky Štart (Start) > Všetky programy (All Programs) (Programy
(Programs) v systéme Windows 2000) > Canon XXX Manual (kde „ XXX “ je názov
zariadenia) > Uninstall.
2. Po zobrazení potvrdzujúcej správy kliknite na tlačidlo OK.
Poznámka
Keď sa zobrazí hlásenie vyžadujúce reštartovanie počítača, kliknutím na tlačidlo OK reštartujte
počítač.
Všetky príručky on-screen manual okrem Pomocníka ovládača tlačiarne a Pomocníka ovládača skenera
sa odinštalujú naraz.
1. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications).
2. Dvakrát kliknite na priečinok Canon Utilities a potom na priečinok IJ Manual.
3. Priečinok s názvom zariadenia presuňte myšou do koša.
4. Ikonu
Príručka on-screen manual k zariadeniu Canon XXX (Canon XXX Onscreen Manual) (kde „ XXX “ je názov zariadenia) presuňte z plochy do koša.
Na začiatok strany
Preprava zariadenia
Strana 667 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Preprava zariadenia
Preprava zariadenia
Pri premiestňovaní zabaľte zariadenie do pôvodného obalu.
Ak už nemáte pôvodný obal, zariadenie dôkladne zabaľte do ochranného materiálu a vložte do pevnej
škatule.
Dôležité
Zariadenie neprenášajte ani neskladujte v naklonenej, vertikálnej ani obrátenej polohe, pretože
môže vytiecť atrament a poškodiť zariadenie.
1. Vypnite zariadenie.
2. Skontrolujte, či nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) , a zariadenie odpojte od
elektrickej zásuvky.
Dôležité
Zariadenie neodpájajte, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti alebo bliká na zeleno, pretože
to môže spôsobiť poruchu alebo poškodenie zariadenia, a tak znemožniť tlač.
3. Zasuňte podperu papiera a potom zatvorte výstupný zásobník papiera.
4. Odpojte kábel tlačiarne od počítača aj od zariadenia a potom zo zariadenia vytiahnite
zástrčku napájacieho kábla.
5. Pomocou lepiacej pásky zabezpečte všetky kryty na zariadení, aby sa počas
prenosu neotvorili. Potom zariadenie zabaľte do igelitového vreca.
6. Pri balení pripevnite k zariadeniu ochranný materiál.
Dôležité
Pri balení nechajte atramentové kazety FINE nainštalované v zariadení.
Poznámka
Škatuľu zreteľne označte ako „KREHKÉ“ alebo „POZOR SKLO“.
Na začiatok strany
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows)
Strana 668 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows)
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne
(Windows)
Okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne možno zobraziť prostredníctvom používaného aplikačného softvéru
alebo ponuky Štart (Start) systému Windows.
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne prostredníctvom aplikačného
softvéru
Podľa nižšie uvedeného postupu nakonfigurujte nastavenia tlače.
1.
V používanom aplikačnom softvéri vyberte príkaz na tlač.
Vo všeobecnosti otvorte dialógové okno Tlačiť (Print) výberom položky Tlačiť (Print) v ponuke
Súbor (File).
2.
Vyberte názov svojho modelu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Predvoľby (Preferences) (alebo
Vlastnosti (Properties)).
Otvorí sa dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne.
Poznámka
V závislosti od používaného aplikačného softvéru môžu byť názvy príkazov alebo ponúk
odlišné a môže byť potrebných viac krokov. Podrobné informácie nájdete v
používateľskej príručke k aplikačnému softvéru.
Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne prostredníctvom ponuky Štart (Start)
Podľa nižšie uvedeného postupu vykonajte operácie údržby, napríklad čistenie tlačovej hlavy,
alebo nakonfigurujte nastavenia tlače spoločné pre všetok aplikačný softvér.
1.
V ponuke Štart (Start) vyberte nasledujúce položky.
V systéme Windows Vista vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel (Control
Panel) > Hardvér a zvuk (Hardware and Sound) > Tlačiarne (Printers).
V systéme Windows XP vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel (Control Panel)
> Tlačiarne a iný hardvér (Printers and Other Hardware) > Tlačiarne a faxy (Printers and
Faxes).
V systéme Windows 2000 vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Nastavenie (Settings) >
Tlačiarne (Printers).
2.
Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na ikonu s názvom vášho modelu a v zobrazenej ponuke
potom vyberte položku Predvoľby tlače (Printing Preferences).
Otvorí sa dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne.
Dôležité
Po otvorení dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne pomocou tlačidla Vlastnosti
(Properties) sa zobrazia karty týkajúce sa funkcií systému Windows ako napríklad karta
Porty (Ports) alebo Rozšírené (Advanced). Tieto karty sa nezobrazia pri otvorení
prostredníctvom položky Predvoľby tlače (Printing Preferences) alebo aplikačného
softvéru. Informácie o kartách týkajúcich sa funkcií systému Windows nájdete v
používateľskej príručke k systému Windows.
Na začiatok strany
Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač... Strana 669 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh)
Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a
Tlač (Print) (Macintosh)
Dialógové okná Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) môžete otvoriť z aplikácie, ktorú používate.
Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup)
Pred tlačou otvorte dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a zadajte nastavenia strany
(papiera).
1.
V ponuke Súbor (File) aplikačného programu vyberte položku Nastavenie strany... (Page
Setup...).
Otvorí sa dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup).
Otvorenie dialógového okna Tlač (Print)
Pred tlačou otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print) a zadajte nastavenia tlače.
1.
V ponuke Súbor (File) aplikačného programu vyberte položku Tlač... (Print...).
Otvorí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print).
Na začiatok strany
Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Strana 670 z celkového počtu 684
Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility otvoríte nasledujúcim spôsobom.
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x
1.
V ponuke Apple vyberte položku Systémové predvoľby (System Preferences).
2.
Kliknite na položku Tlač a faxovanie (Print & Fax).
3.
V zozname Tlačiarne (Printers) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo
Otvoriť tlačový front... (Open Print Queue...).
Zobrazí sa zoznam úloh pre vaše zariadenie.
4.
Kliknite na tlačidlo Pomôcka (Utility).
Otvorí sa okno Zoznam tlačiarní (Printer List).
5.
V zozname Produkt (Product) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo Údržba
(Maintenance).
Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Strana 671 z celkového počtu 684
Spustí sa aplikácia Canon IJ Printer Utility.
V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9
1.
V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications).
2.
Dvakrát kliknite na priečinok Pomôcky (Utilities) a potom dvakrát na ikonu Pomôcka na
inštaláciu tlačiarne (Printer Setup Utility).
Otvorí sa okno Zoznam tlačiarní (Printer List).
3.
V zozname Názov (Name) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo Pomôcka
(Utility).
4.
V zozname Produkt (Product) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo Údržba
(Maintenance).
Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Strana 672 z celkového počtu 684
Spustí sa aplikácia Canon IJ Printer Utility.
Na začiatok strany
Sharing the Printer on a Network
Strana 673 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network
Sharing the Printer on a Network
When multiple computers are being used in the network environment, you can share the printer
connected to one computer with the other computers.
The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the
same.
Settings on Print Server
The procedure for setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable is as
follows:
Settings on Client PC
The procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network is as
follows:
When you execute print, the data is sent through the print server system to the printer.
Important
In case an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer, the
error message of Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print
server system. For regular printing, Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client
system.
Note
Install the printer driver from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine on the print server
system and each of the client systems according to the OS of each system.
You cannot share this printer with Macintosh computers.
Related Topic
Restrictions on Printer Sharing
Page top
Settings on Print Server
Strana 674 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Settings on Print Server
Settings on Print Server
When you use the printer on a network, set up the printer driver for sharing on the server system.
The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows:
1. Install the printer driver on the print server system
For details on installation instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting
Started.
2. Select items from the Start menu as shown below:
In Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers.
In Windows XP, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware ->
Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Settings -> Printers.
The Printers window (Windows Vista, Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes window (Windows XP)
is displayed.
3. Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared
In Windows Vista, press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as administrator ->
Sharing... from the displayed File menu.
In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select Sharing... from the File menu.
Important
In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling,
or starting software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
Note
Windows XP may display a message recommending the user to use the Network Setup
Wizard to set up sharing.
When this message appears, choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing.
4. Set sharing
Select Share this printer (Windows Vista, Windows XP) or Shared as (Windows 2000) on the
Sharing tab to set a shared name if necessary, and click OK.
The setup on the print server system is complete. Next, set up the client systems.
Page top
Settings on Client PC
Strana 675 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Settings on Client PC
Settings on Client PC
After setting up the print server system, set up the client system.
The procedure for setting up the client systems is as follows:
In Windows Vista
1. Install the printer driver on the client systems
To install the driver, load the Setup CD-ROM that comes with the machine, and select Custom
Install.
For details on connection instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting
Started.
Note
During the installation, a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears. Click Manual
Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation.
2. Start the wizard
Select the Start menu -> Network -> Add a printer.
The Add Printer window appears.
3. Add a printer
Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and click the icon for the printer that you have
configured on the print server system to be shared, and then click Next.
Note
If the icon for the printer is not displayed, check that the printer is actually connected to the print
server.
It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear.
4. Complete the setup
Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish.
The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers window.
The setup on the client systems is complete. You can now share the printer in the network.
In Windows XP/Windows 2000
1. Install the printer driver on the client systems
To install the driver, load the Setup CD-ROM that comes with the machine, and select Custom
Install.
For details on connection instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting
Started.
Note
During the installation, a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears. Click Manual
Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation.
2. Start the wizard
In Windows XP, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware ->
Settings on Client PC
Strana 676 z celkového počtu 684
Printers and Faxes -> Add a printer.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Settings -> Printers -> Add a printer.
When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears, click Next.
3. Add a printer
Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer (Windows XP) or Network printer
(Windows 2000), then click Next.
On the Specify a Printer window (Windows XP) or Locate Your Printer window (Windows 2000), click
Next and then search for the print server system.
Click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared, and
then click Next.
Note
If the icon for the printer is not displayed, check that the printer is actually connected to the print
server.
4. Complete the setup
Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish.
The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window (Windows XP) or
Printers window (Windows 2000).
The setup on the client systems is complete. You can now share the printer in the network.
Page top
Restrictions on Printer Sharing
Strana 677 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Restrictions on Printer Sharing
Restrictions on Printer Sharing
These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment. Check the
restrictions for the environment you are using.
When You Are Sharing a Printer in a Network
A print completion message may be displayed. To disable the message display, follow the
procedure below.
In Windows Vista:
Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system. Open Run as administrator ->
Server Properties... from the displayed File menu.
Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab, and then
restart the computer.
In Windows XP or Windows 2000:
Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window (Windows XP) or the
Printers window (Windows 2000) on the print server system.
Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab, and then restart the
computer.
The bi-directional communication function is disabled and the correct printer status may not be
recognized.
When a client user opens the printer driver properties and then clicks OK with the Enable
bidirectional support check box on the Ports tab unchecked, the bi-directional function of the printer
server system may also be disabled.
In this case, check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the
client system.
When you print from a client system, you cannot use Canon IJ Preview.
When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system, they may be
grayed out. In this case, change the settings from the print server.
When you change the settings of the print server, you should delete the icon of the shared printer
from the client system, and then specify the shared settings again in the client system.
When the Same Printer Driver is Installed in the Print Server System and the Client
System as the Local Printer
The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system.
Page top
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 678 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
--- Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art --Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with
digital cameras.
You can also print borderless photos easily.
Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Click Here: Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Note
See the section below for details on how to use Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Printing with the Bundled Application Software
Create a Personalized Photo Album
Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy-PhotoPrint EX!
All you need to do is select which photos to use, select a layout, then load paper into your printer and
print. After you bind the printed sheets, you'll have the one and only album of your memories!
You can change the layout and background, and attach
comments to photos.
You can also select the size and orientation.
You can arrange a photo across the left and right
pages.
CHECK!
Select a theme (background design) to create a single-themed album.
Decorate Items with Text and Frames
You can add text and frames to photos. Attach a description of the photo in an album, and add a frame to
enhance the photo's atmosphere.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 679 z celkového počtu 684
CHECK!
Select Album to add text and frames. You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print.
Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos
Create calendars easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Create your own calendar using your favorite photos!
It'll be exciting to turn the calendar pages.
You can use all kinds of photos.
You can also create 2-month, 6-month and 12-month
calendars.
Create Stickers
Create stickers easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX!
Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends!
CHECK!
You can add text to photos.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Strana 680 z celkového počtu 684
Page top
Using MP Navigator EX
Strana 681 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > Using MP Navigator EX
Using MP Navigator EX
MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable
even for beginners.
Start MP Navigator EX
Click Here: MP Navigator EX
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX.
Scan Photos and Documents
You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens. You can also save/print scanned
images using MP Navigator EX.
Scan Small Documents at One Time
You can scan multiple small documents (photos, cards, etc.) at one time. It is useful as you do not need
to scan multiple times.
Scan Large Documents
You can easily scan documents that are larger than the Platen using MP Navigator EX. It allows you to
scan the left and right halves of a document separately and combine them back into one image.
Using MP Navigator EX
Strana 682 z celkového počtu 684
Scan with One-click
In One-click Mode, MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving, with a click of an icon. One-click
Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e-mail automatically.
Scan and Correct/Enhance Photos
You can easily correct/enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX. You do not need to use other
applications.
For details on how to use MP Navigator EX, refer to " Scanning with the Bundled Application Software ."
Page top
About Solution Menu
Strana 683 z celkového počtu 684
Advanced Guide > About Solution Menu
About Solution Menu
Quick Shortcut!! Solution Menu
Solution Menu is a menu window that provides quick access from your desktop to Canon applications,
manuals, and online product information.
Important
The number and types of buttons displayed in the window may vary depending on your printer and
region.
Starting Solution Menu
Click Here: Solution Menu
To start from desktop, see below.
Double-click the Canon Solution Menu icon on the desktop. Alternatively, from the Start menu, select (All)
Programs > Canon Utilities > Solution Menu > Solution Menu.
From the next time, Solution Menu starts when Windows starts.
If the Start Solution Menu when Windows starts checkbox at the bottom left of the window is not selected,
Solution Menu does not start when Windows starts.
Note
Solution Menu will start automatically when you install it using the Setup CD-ROM that
accompanies the printer.
Changing the Window Size
Click
(window size: large) or
(window size: small) on the title bar to change the window size
About Solution Menu
Strana 684 z celkového počtu 684
(large or small).
Solution Menu opens with the last used window size next time it is started.
When screen size is small
Starting an Application
1. Point to a button on the window to display the description of each application.
2. By clicking each button, the introduced application starts.
Follow the same steps to view the manuals or online product information.
Important
Internet connection is required to access the online information. Internet connection fees apply.
Exiting Solution Menu
Click
(Close) on the title bar.
Restriction on Use of Solution Menu
This software is subject to the following restriction. Keep this point in mind when using it.
All icons of the installed applications that support Solution Menu are displayed in the window. After
the installation, you cannot rearrange the icons or delete only the icons.
Page top

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Key Features

  • Home & office Inkjet Colour printing
  • 4800 x 1200 DPI
  • A4 8.4 ppm
  • Colour copying Colour scanning
  • 5.6 kg

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement